The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutMSW DEANS BRIDGE LANDFILL MAINTENANCE FACILITY ;~ JtJ/3~ Contract Documents and Detailed Specifications for Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill Maintenance Facility \ Volume 1 of2 Augusta-Richmond County Commission Council Betty Beard Joe Jackson Corey Johnson Jerry Bri$ham Joe Bowles. Jimmy Smith Alvin Mason J.R. Hatney Calvin Holland, Sr. Don A. Grantham Mayor Deke S. Copenhaver \ REVISED SEPTEMBER 15,2008 (TO INCORPORATE ADDENDA ITEMS) Bid Item #08-157 Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill . Maintenance Facility Bid Opening: 8/26/2008 at 3:00 p.m. $300.00 I I I I I I I I I I I I . I I I I I I I DEANS BRIDGE ROAD MSW LANDFILL' - MAINTENANCE FACILITY AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY ACORD,. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE CSR LS I DATE (MMlDDIYYYY) DABBS-2 12/11/08 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Blount, Burke, Wimberly & ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Po Box 877 HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 1100 B.z:'ampton Ave Suite M ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Statesboro GA 30459 Phone: 912-764-9602 Fax:912-764-2695 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED INSURER A Westfield Companies Dabbs-Williams General INSURER B: Builders IosuranCQ Companies Contractors, LLC INSURER C: Mon taomery Insu.z:'ance Brad Williams P. O. Box 765 INSURER 0: Statesboro GA 30459 INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRJBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR NSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER ~9..l'~rJ~rDEJ=~E .ltk'TETI;r-J,h'lf'~N LIMITS ~NERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 A ~ COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY TRA3436903 07/15/08 07/15/09 ~s (Ea occurenee) $ 300,000 f-- tJ CLAIMS MADE [!] OCCUR MED EXP (Anyone person) $ 10,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000 I-- GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 ~L AGGRnE LIMIT APnS PER: PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGG $2,000,000 POLICY ~~8i LOC ~TOMOBIlE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 A 2f- ANY AUTO TRA3436903 07/15/08 07/15/09 lEa accident) ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY I-- $ SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) - ~ HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ ~ NON-QWNED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ R ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESSlUMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $9,000,000 A ~ OCCUR 0 CLAIMS MADE TRA3436903 07/15/08 07/15/09 AGGREGATE $ 9,000,000 $ ~ DEDUCTIBLE $ X RETENTION sO $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X I TORY LIMIT's I 10m- B EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY WCV 0018210 02/28/08 02/28/09 E.L EACH ACCIDENT $ 500000 ANY PROPRIETORlPARTNERJEXECUTIVE OFFICERlMEMBER EXCLUDED'? E,L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $500000 ~~~Mi'f~~v'I~s below E,L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $500000 OTHER C Builder's Risk IM8544682 11/06/08 11/06/09 Building $5,477,358 Oed. $5,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS Additional Insured:Augusta Richmond County 530 Greene Street, Augusta, GA 30911 / Atlantic Coast Consulting, Inc. 7 East Congress St., , Suite 801, Savannah, GA 31401 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION AUGUSTR SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL ~ DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFI E HOLDER NAMED T E LEFT BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL Augusta Richmond County 530 Greene Street Augusta GA 30911 ACORD 25 (2001/08) IMPORTANT' If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed, A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s) If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s) DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon . ACORD 25 (2001/08) ~~ii;I"IIf~!~~~I~~rl~t[r~I~~R~~~ll~l(ll~~~~~~i~I~II~.i;l~i'!I~lfl~li~~l~ Reference Section 00700, Art~cle 21, Paragraph 21,8 - General Conditions against the following special hazards: 1) Damage by blasting; Only to extent to which such risk is present / None Present 2) Damage to existing structures 3) Damage to private driveways, wlaks, shrubbery, plantings, etc 4) Damage to public utilities, electric, water, telephone, gas, sewerage,etc.. 5) Damage to US government markers Reference Section 00700, Article 21, Paragraph 21.7 - Montgomery Insurance is licensed to business in Georgia. Montgomery is owned by Liberty MutuaL See attached A"M. Best Rating.. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I NOTICE "All addenda items for Specifications and Drawings issued prior to the date of Bid opening have been incorporated into these Contract Documents. " A "(1)" directly left of Specification Section number on the title page of a section indicates that section has been replaced or added by addendum. A "1,, in the text of a Specification Section indicates that an addendum item has been incorporated. Atlantic Coast Consulting, Inc. 630 Colonial Park Drive, Suite 110 Roswell, Georgia 30075 (770) 594-5998 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00010 Table of Contents SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME 1 OF 2 Section Title Division 0 - Bidding and Contract Requirements 00020 00100 00300 00410 00413 00414 00420 00481 00500 00550 00610 00620 00697 00698 00699 00700 00800 Invitation to Bid Instructions to Bidders Bid Bid Bond Partnership Certificate Corporate Certificate Statement of Qualifications Noncollusion Affidavit of Subcontractor Contract Pre-Award Oath Performance Bond Payment Bond Notice of Award Notice to Proceed Certificate of Owner's Attorney General Conditions Supplementary Conditions Division 1 - General Requirements 01010 01011 01016 01025 01026 01041 01051 01055 01060 01070 01080 01201 01202 01310 01320 01340 01500 01510 01540 01562 01590 01610 Summary of Work Unique Requirements Occupancy Measurement and Payment Schedule of Values Coordination of Work Grades, Lines and Levels Construction Staking Regulatory Requirements Abbreviations, Symbols, Trade Names, and Materials Applicable Codes and Standards Preconstruction Conference Progress Meetings Construction Schedules Construction Videos and Photographs Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples Construction Facilities Temporary Utilities . Job Site Security Dust Control Field Offices Transportation and Handling 06/19/08 G003-1 06\XC0001 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 01620 01630 01710 01720 01740 00010 - 2 Table of Contents Storage and Protection Substitutions and Product Options Cleaning Record Documents Warranties and Bonds Division 2 - Sitework 02010 02060 02100 02125 02140 02200 02225 02361 02510 02666 02700 02720 02730 02745 Subsurface Conditions Demolition of Existing Facilities Site Preparation Erosion and Sedimentation Control Dewatering Earthwork Trench Excavation and Backfill Termite Control Asphalt Concrete Pavement Pipe Testing and Acceptance Landfill Piping Systems Storm Sewers and Pipe Culverts Sewers and Accessories High Density Polyethylene Pipe Division 3 - Concrete 03050 03300 Concrete Site Work Cast-In-Place Concrete Division 4 - Masonry 04810 Unit Masonry VOLUME 2 OF 2 Division 5 - Metals 05120 05220 05310 05400 05450 05500 05510 05521 Structural Steel Steel Joists Steel Deck Cold Formed Metal Framing Pre-Engineered Light Gauge Steel Truss Frames Metal fabrications Metal Stairs Pipe and Tube Railings Division 6 - Wood and Plastic 06105 06402 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Interior Architectural Woodwork 06/19/08 G003-1 06\XC0001 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07841 07920 Penetration Fireproofing Joint Sealants Division 8 - Doors and Windows 08110 08210 08331 08410 08710 08800 08830 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors Overhead Coiling Doors Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts Finish Hardware Glazing Mirrors Division 9 - Finishes 09220 09260 09310 09511 09651 09671 09680 09912 Portland Cement Plastering Gypsum Board Assemblies Ceramic Tile Acoustical Panel Ceilings Resilient Tile Resinous Flooring Carpet Painting Division 10 - Specialties 10101 10155 10200 10505 10522 10801 Visual Display Surfaces Toilet Compartments Louvers and Vents Metal Lockers Fire Protection Specialties Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories Division 12 - Furnishings 12491 Horizontal Louver Blinds Division 13 - Special Construction 13125 Metal Building Systems Division 15 - Mechanical 15010 15140 15190 15242 15260 General Requirements Supports, Anchors, and Sleeves Identification of Piping Vibration Isolation Piping Insulation 06/19/08 G003-106\XC00010 00010 - 3 Table of Contents I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15290 15340 15410 15535 15671 15855 15870 . 15890 15936 15985 15990 I Ductwork Insulation I Fire Protection I Plumbing Piping : Refrigeration Piping and Specialties Air Cooled Condensing Units Air Handling Units : Power Ventilators Ductwork and Access6ries Air Inlets and Outlets I Air Controls and Sequence of Operation Testing, Adjusting andlBalancing I 00010 - 4 Table of Contents Division 16 - Electrical General Provisions Conduit Wire Boxes Wiring Devices Cabinets and Enclosures Supporting Devices I Electrical Identification Utility Service Entrance Disconnect Switches Secondary Grounding Dry Type Transformers I Panelboards Motor Starters!Contactors Transfer Switches I Lighting Fixtures Emergency Lighting Equ'ipment Packaged Engine Gene~ator System Surge Suppressors I Lightning Protection I Fire Alarm and Security System Cabling Identification I Data and Telephone Cabling Systems Multi-Mode Fiber Optic d~bles Communication Systems I Wiring Methods for Data and Voice Cabling Systems I FINISH SCHEDULE Finish Schedule! Finish Legend I I DRAWINGS Title Cover Notes and Legend 16010 16111 16120 16130 16141 16160 16190 16195 16421 16440 16450 16461 16470 16480 16495 16510 16535 16622 16650 16681 16721 16726 16729 16730 16741 16800 Sheet C-0.1 - 06/19/081 G003-106\XC00010 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C-0.2 C-0.3 C-1.0 C-2.0 C-3.0 C-3.1 C-4.0 C-4.1 C-4.2 C-4.3 C-5.0 C-5.1 C-5.2 C-5.3 C-5.4 A-O.O A-0.1 A-0.2 A-0.3 A-1.0 A-1.1 A-1.2 A-2.0 A-3.0 A-3.1 A-4.0 A-5.0 A-5.1 A-5.2 A-5.3 A-6.0 LS-1.0 LS-1.1 S-1.0A S-1.0B S-1.1 S-1.2 S-2.1 S-3.1 S-4.1 S-4.2 E-2.1 E-2.2 E-2.3 E-3.1 E-3.2 LP-2.1 M-2.1 M-2.2 M-3.1 Overall Site Plan Existing Conditions Plan Grading and Drainage Plan Site and Utility Plan Storm Drain Profiles Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Profiles Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution Control Plan Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution Control BMP Notes Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution Control CMP Notes Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution Control Details Miscellaneous Details Miscellaneous Details Miscellaneous Details Miscellaneous Details Miscellaneous Details General Information Door, Window and Louver Types Door and Window Details Wall Types Maintenance Building - First Floor Plan Maintenance Building - Second Floor Plan Maintenance Building - Roof Plan Maintenance Building - Exterior Elevations Maintenance Building - Enlarged Plans Maintenance Building - Stair Sections Maintenance Building - Reflected Ceiling Plan Maintenance Building - Wall Sections Maintenance Building - Wall Sections Maintenance Building - Wall Sections Maintenance Building - Plan Details Maintenance Building -Interior Elevations Maintenance Building - First Floor Life Safety Plan Maintenance Building - Second Floor Life Safety Plan Maintenance Building - Structural Notes Maintenance Building - Structural Notes Maintenance Building - Foundation Plan Maintenance Building - Foundation Sections Maintenance Building - Mezzanine Framing Plan Maintenance Building - Column & Foundation Schedules Maintenance Building - Typical Details Maintenance Building - Typical Details First Floor Plan - Power First Floor Plan - Lighting Second Floor Plan - Power and Lighting Details and Schedules - Power Details and Schedules - Lighting Lightning Protection Plan First Floor Plan - HV AC Second Floor Plan - HV AC Details and Schedules - HVAC 00010 - 5 Table of Contents - 06/19/08 G003-106\XC00010 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , -- P-2.1 P-2.2 P-2.3 P-2.4 P-3.1 First Floor Plan - Plumbing Waste First Floor Plan - Plumbing Water First Floor Plan - Fluid Distribution System Second Floor Plan - Plumbing Waste and Water Details and Schedules - Plumbing Waste Plumbing Water 06/19/08 8003-1 06\XC0001 0 . 00010 - 6 Table of Contents I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , - . Section 00020 Invitation to Bid AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY GEORGIA Separate sealed Bids for furnishing of all materials labor, tools, equipment, and appurtenances necessary for Bid Item #08-157, Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility will be received by the Owner at the offices of Geri Sams, the Augusta-Richmond County Purchasing Department, 530 Greene Street, Room 605, Augusta, Georgia 30911, until 3:00 p.m. local time on August 28, 2008, and then at said office publicly opened and read aloud. The project consists of the following: :!: 17,300 SF Maintenance building, site infrastructure, and other facilities and appurtenances. A mandatory prebid conference will be held at Augusta-Richmond County Procurement Department, 530 Greene Street, Room 605, Augusta, Georgia 30911 on July 25, 2008 at 10:00 a.m. All bidders must attend all of the Pre-Bid Conference. Copies of the Contract Documents, Drawings, Proposal, and Specifications will be available for purchase from the Purchasing Department for $300.00. Any bidder that does not attend the prebid conference will be disqualified from bidding and their bids will not be accepted. The $300.00 payment for purchasing contract documents is nonrefundable. No partial sets of plans, documents, or specifications will be provided. The Instructions to Bidders, Form of Bid, Form of Contract, Drawings, Specifications, and forms of Bid Bond, Performance Bond, Payment Bond, and other Contract Documents may be examined during business hours at the fOllowing: Augusta-Richmond County Procurement Department 530 Greene Street, Room 605 Augusta, GA 30911 Award, if award is made, will be to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder on the total bid per the bid proposal form. Each Bid must be accompanied by a certified or cashier's check on a duly authorized bank, a certified check of the Bidder, or a bid bond prepared on the Form of Bid Bond attached hereto, duly executed by the Bidder as principal and having as surety thereon a surety company listed in the latest issue of U.S. Treasury Circular 570, in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Bid. Certified checks or cashier's checks shall be made payable to the Owner. Such checks or bid bonds will be returned promptly after the Owner and the accepted Bidder have executed the Contract, or, if no award has been made within sixty (60) days after the date of the opening of Bids upon demand of the Bidder at any time thereafter, so long as he has not been notified of the acceptance of his Bid. . Each Bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope, addressed to the Owner. Each sealed envelope containing a Bid must be plainly marked on the outside as, "Bid Item #08-157 Bid for Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility". 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00020 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I r 00020 - 2 Invitation to Bid If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelopes containing the Bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed to the Owner. Bidders responding to this Invitation to Bid must provide the 1Residential-light commercial or General Contractor License Number with their bids. The Bidder must write their license number on the front of the bid envelope. Any and all Bids not meeting the aforementioned criteria for Bid submittal, will be declared nonresponsive, will not be opened and will be returned to the Bidder. All Bids must be made out and submitted on the proposal form furnished for this purpose and in accordance with the instructions in the Instructions to Bidders. No interlineations, additions, or deletions shall be made in the. proposal form by the Bidder. The Owner reserves the right to waive any informalities or to reject any or all Bids, to evaluate Bids, and to accept any Bid which in its opinion may be for the best interest of the Owner. Bidders are cautioned that obtaining of bidding documents through any source other than the office of the Purchasing Department is not advisable. Acquisition of bidding documents from unauthorized sources place the bidder at the risk of receiving incomplete or inaccurate information upon which to base his proposal. No Bids will be received or accepted after the above specified time for the opening of Bids. Bids submitted after the designated hour will be deemed invalid and returned unopened to the Bidder. The successful Bidder for this Contract will be required to furnish a satisfactory Performance Bond and Payment Bond in the amount of 100% of the Bid. It is the wish of the Owner that minority businesses be given the opportunity to bid on the various parts of the work. This desire on the part of the Owner is not intended to restrict or limit competitive bidding or to increase the cost of the work. The Owner supports a healthy free market system that seeks to include responsible businesses and provide ample opportunity for business growth and development. No Bidder may withdraw his Bid within sixty (60) days after the actual date of the opening thereof. OWNER: AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY, GEORGIA (Date) END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00020 - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00100 I nstructions To Bidders 1. Receipt and Openinq of Bids Augusta-Richmond County, Georgia (herein called the "Owner"), invites bids and qualifications on the forms attached hereto, all blanks of which must be appropriately filled in. Bids will be received by the Owner at Augusta Richmond County Procurement Department. The Owner may consider informal any Bid not prepared and submitted in accordance with the provisions hereof and may waive any informalities or reject any and all Bids. Any Bid may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for the opening of Bids or authorized postponement thereof. Any Bid received after the time and date specified shall not be considered. No Bidder may withdraw a Bid within 60 days after the actual date of the opening thereof. 2. Preparation of Bid Each Bid must be submitted on the Bid Form as provided with the Contract Documents. All blank spaces for Bid prices must be filled in, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures. (In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern.) All required enclosed certifications must be fully completed, executed, and submitted with the Bids including Sections 00300, 00410, 00413, 00414, 00420, 00480,00481,00500, and 00550. 1Two (2) separately sealed bids must be submitted in a sealed envelope, addressed to the Owner. Each sealed envelope containing a Bid must be plainly marked on the outside as, "Bid Item #08-157, Bid for Dean's Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility". If forwarded by mail, the separate sealed envelope containing the Bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed to the Owner at Augusta-Richmond County Procurement Department, 530 Greene Street, Room 605, Augusta, GA 30911. Bidders responding to this Invitation to Bid must provide the 1 Residential-light commercial or General Contractor License Number. The Bidder must write their license number on the front of the bid envelope. Any and all Bids not meeting the aforementioned criteria for Bid submittal, will be declared nonresponsive, will not be opened and will be returned to the Bidder. 3. Subcontracts The Bidder is specifically advised that any person, firm, or other party to whom it is proposed to award a subcontract under this Contract must be acceptable to the Owner. 09/19/08 8003-1 06\XCOO 100 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - 00100 - 2 Instructions to Bidders 4. Teleoraphic Modifications Any Bidder may modify his Bid by telegraphic communication at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids, provided such telegraphic communication is received by the Owner prior to the closing time, and, provided further, the Owner is satisfied that a written confirmation of the telegraphic modification over the signature of the Bidder was mailed prior to the closing time. The telegraphic communication should not reveal the Bid price but should provide the addition or subtraction or other modification so that the final prices or terms will not be known by the Owner until the sealed Bid is opened. If written confirmation is not received within two days from the closing time, no consideration will be given to the telegraphic modification. 5. Method of Bidding The unit or lump sum price for each of the several items in the proposal of each Bidder shall include its pro rata share of overhead and profit so that the sum of the products obtained by multiplying the quantity shown for each item by the unit price represents the total Bid. Any Bid not conforming to this requirement may be rejected as informal. The special attention of all Bidders is called to this provision, for should conditions make it necessary to revise the quantities, no limit will be fixed for such increased or decreased quantities nor extra compensation allowed, provided the net monetary value of all such addition or subtraction in quantities of such items of work (Le., difference in cost) shall not increase or decrease the total original contract price by more than twenty-five (25%) percent, except for work not covered in the Drawings and Detailed Specifications as provided for under "General Conditions" and "Supplementary Conditions." 6. Qualifications of Bidder The Owner reseNes the right to reject any Bid if the Bidder fails to be deemed qualified by the Owner. 7. Bid Security Each Bid must be accompanied by a cashier's check on a duly authorized bank, certified check of the Bidder, or a Bid Bond prepared on the Form of Bid Bond attached hereto, duly executed by the Bidder as principal and having as surety thereon a surety company listed in the latest issue of U.S. Treasury Circular 570, in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the Bid. Certified checks or cashier's checks shall be made payable to the Owner. Such checks or Bid Bonds will be returned promptly after the Owner and the accepted Bidder have executed the Contract, or, if no award has been made within 60 days after the date of the opening of Bids, upon demand of the Bidder at any time thereafter, so long as he has not been notified of the acceptance of his Bid. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XCOO 100 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I . 00100 - 3 Instructions to Bidders 8. Liquidated DamaQes for Failure to Enter into Contract The successful Bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the Contract, Bonds, and Certificates of Insurance required within 10 days after he has received notice of the acceptance of his Bid, shall forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his Bid. 9. Time for Completion and liquidated Damaqes Bidder must agree to commence work on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 240 consecutive calendar days thereafter. Bidder must agree also to pay as liquidated damages in the sum of $750.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as hereinafter provided in the General Conditions. 10. Conditions of Work Each Bidder must inform himself fully of the conditions relating to the construction of the project and the employment of labor thereon. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful Bidder of his obligation to furnish all material and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of his Contract. Insofar as possible the Contractor, in carrying out his work, must employ such methods or means as will not cause any interruption of or interference with the work of any other Contractor. 11. Addenda and Interpretations No interpretation of the meaning of the Drawings, Specifications, Construction Quality Assurance Plan or other prebid documents will be made to any Bidder orally. Every request for such interpretation. should be in writing addressed to Attn: Geri Sams, Procurement Director, Augusta Procurement Department, 530 Greene Street, Room 605, Augusta, Georgia 30911, fax: 706-821-2811, and to be given consideration must be received prior 3:00 p.m. on August 8, 2008. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the Specifications which, if issued, will be mailed by certified mail with return receipt requested, faxed or shipped via delivery service, to all prospective Bidders (at the respective addresses furnished for such purposes), not later than three (3) business days prior to the date fixed for the opening of Bids. Failure of any Bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such Bidder from any obligation under his Bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become a part of the Contract Documents. 12. Security for Faithful Performance Simultaneously with his delivery of the executed Contract, the Contractor shall furnish a surety Bond from a single surety, as security for faithful performance of this Contract 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC001 00 - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - 17. 15. 16. 00100 - 4 Instructions to Bidders and for the payment of all persons performing labor on the project under this Contract and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract, as specified in the General Conditions included herein. Surety companies executing Performance and Payment Bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the state where the Project is located. 13. Power of AttorneX' Attorneys-in-fact who sign Bid Bonds or Contract Bonds must file with each Bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their Power of Attorney. 14. Notice of Special Conditions Attention is particularly called to those parts of the Contract Documents and Specifications, which deal with the following: (a) Inspection and testing of materials (b) Insurance requirements (c) Surveys, permits, and regulations The federal regulations enclosed or herein referred to supersede all conflicting requirements of the Contract Documents. Laws and ReQulations The Bidder's attention is directed to the fact that all applicable State laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the Contract throughout, and they will be deemed to be included in the Contract the same as though herein written out in full. Oblioation of Bidder At the time of the opening of Bids each Bidder will be presumed to have inspected the site and to have read and to be thoroughly familiar with the Drawings and Contract Documents (including all addenda). The failure or omission of any Bidder to examine any form, instrument, or document shall in no way relieve any Bidder from any obligation in respect to his Bid. Execution of Bid Documents The Contractor, in signing his Bid on the whole or any portion of the work, shall conform to the following requirements: 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00100 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00100 - 5 Instructions to Bidders (a) Bids which are not signed by individuals making them shall have attached thereto a Power of Attorney evidencing authority to sign the Bid in the name of the person for whom it is signed. (b) Bids which are signed for a partnership shall be signed by all of the partners or by an attorney-in-fact. If a Bid is signed by an attorney-in-fact, there should be attached to the Bid a Power of Attorney executed by the partners evidencing authority to sign the Bid. (c) Bids which are signed for a corporation shall have the correct corporate name thereof and the signature of the President or other authorized officer of the corporation manually written below the corporate name following the wording "By ".Corporation seal shall also be affixed to the Bid. 18. Method of Award - Lowest Qualified Bidder - The Contract will be awarded to the responsive, responsible Bidder submitting the lowest Bid complying with the Contract Documents. Award will be made on the basis of the prices given in the Bid and Owner selected alternatives. The Bidder to whom the award is made will be notified at the earliest possible date. The Owner reseNes the right to reject any and all Bids and to waive any informality in Bids received whenever such rejection or waiver is in its interest. A responsive Bidder shall be one who submits his Bid in the proper form without qualification or intent other than as called for in the Specifications and on the Contract DraWings and who binds himself on behalf of his Bid to the Owner with the proper Bid Bond or certified check completed and attached, and who properly completes all forms required to be completed and submitted at the time of the bidding. A responsible Bidder shall be one who can fulfill the following requirements: (a.) The Bidder shall maintain a permanent place of business. (b.) The Bidder shall demonstrate adequate construction experience and sufficient equipment resources to properly perform the work under and in conformance with the Contract Documents. This evaluation will be based upon a fist of completed or active projects and a list of construction equipment available to the Bidder to perform the work. The Owner may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work, and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may reasonably request. The Owner reseNes the right to reject any Bid if evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the Project contemplated therein. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC001 00 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I r 00100-6 Instructions to Bidders (c.) The Bidder shall demonstrate financial resources of sufficient strength to meet the obligations incident to the performance of the work covered by these Contract Documents. The ability to obtain the required Performance and Payment Bonds will not alone demonstrate adequate financial capability. 19. Emplovment of Local Labor Preference in employment on the project shall, insofar as practicable, be given to qualified loea/labor. END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC001 00 -- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I . Date: 09-19-08 (1 )Section 00300 Bid Project Description: Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility Proposal of Dabbs-Williams General Contractors, LLC (hereinafter called "Bidder'), doing business as Limited Liability Company (a Corporation, a Partnership, an Individual) To Augusta-Richmond County (hereinafter called "Owner"), Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for construction of this project having examined the Drawings and Specifications with related documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all conditions surrounding construction of the proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish al/ labor, materials and supplies, and to construct the project in accordance with the Contract Documents, within the time set forth therein, and at the price(s) stated below. This price(s) is to Cover al/ expenses including overhead and profit incurred in performing the work required under the Contract Documents, of which this proposal is a part. Bidder hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract on or before a date to be specified in the written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 240 consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the Specifications. Bidder further agrees to pay as liquidated damages, the sum of $750.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as hereinafter provided in the General Conditions. Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: 1 . 8-06-08 2. 8-08-08 3. 8-25-08 Bidder agrees to perform all the construction of the Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility complete with appurtenant and accessory work described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings within 240 consecutive calendar days for the following prices: 09/19/08 8003-106\XC00300 - . I 00300 - 2 Bid I ITEM 1 -BUILDINGS I a. Lump Sum Maintenance Building $2,612,958.48 ITEM 2 - EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL I a. 1 Each Construction Exit $ 1.400.00 lEA $ 1 .400.00 b. 4,040 L.F. Silt Fence $4.00 ILF $ 16.160.00 I c. 3 Each Sediment Traps $ 200.00 lEA $ 600.00 d. 100 S.Y. Rip Rap $ 6.00 ISY $ 600.00 I e. 100 S.Y. Erosion Control Matting $ 6.00 ISY $ 600.00 f. 2 Each Stone Check Dam $ 200.00 lEA $ 400.00 I g. Lump Sum NPDES Monitoring and Reporting $ 6.500.00 ITEM 3 - EARTHWORK I a. Lump Sum Site Structural Fill and Excavation $ 45.000.00 ITEM 4 - SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM I a. 62 L.F. 4-lnch PVC $ 13.05 ILF $ 809.00 b. 157 L.F. 6-lnch PVC $ 18.64 LF $ 2926.00 I c. 770 L.F. 8-lnch PVC $ 22.47 ILF $ 17,301.00 d. 3 Each Sanitary Sewer Manhole $ 1.482.67 lEA $ 4.448.00 I e. 2 Each 1500 gallon Septic Tank $ 6,734.00 lEA $ 13.468.00 f. 1 Each Oill Water Separator $ 8.457.00 lEA $ 8,457.00 I g. 1 Each Aerobic Treatment Unit $ 17,955.00 lEA $ 17,955.00 h. 315 L.F. Infiltrator Chambers $ 18.70 ILF $ 5,890.00 I i. 1 Each Distribution Box $ 1 ,375.00 lEA $ 1 ,375.00 j. 1 Each 4" Three Way True Union Ball Valve $ 1 ,303.00 lEA $ 1,303.00 I k. 1 Each 4" Blind Flange with Line Marker $ 44.00 lEA $ 44.00 I. 2 Each 6" Cleanouts $ 451.50 lEA $ 903.00 I m. 989 L.F. Cleanup & Testing $ 1.83 ILF $ 1 ,808.00 ITEM 5 - LEACHATE COLLECTION SYSTEM I 2-lnch by 4-lnch Dual Contained a. 50 L.F. Forcemain $ 24.20 ILF $1,210.00 I 4-lnch by 8-lnch Dual Contained b. 925 L.F. Forcemain $ 40.33 ILF $ 37,305.00 c. 4 Each 4-lnch Gate Valves $1.163.00 ILF $ 4,652.00 I I 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00300 - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - 00300 - 4 Bid d. 1 Each Cutting System $ 4.000.00 lEA $ 4.000.00 e. 2 Each Portable Cooling System $ 3.000.00 lEA $ 6.000.00 1. 1 Each Air Compressor $ 44.000.00 lEA $ 44.000.00 g. 1 Each Pressure Washer $ 8.500.00 lEA $ 8.500.00 h. 1 Each Parts Washer $6.300.00 lEA $ 6.300.00 i. 1 Each Crane System $ 75.439.00 lEA $ 75.439.00 ITEM 10 - CASH ALLOWANCES a. MATERIALS TESTING b. FUEL TANK AND EQUIPMENT c. CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION SERVICES d. MAINTENANCE TOOLS & EQUIPMENT e. FURNITURE. FIXTURES & EQUIPMENT 1. LANDSCAPING & FENCING 19. CONTENGENCY * * * ADDITIONAL WORK IF ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER * * * ITEM 11 - TRENCH STABILIZATION a. 200 C.Y. Beyond Bedding $ 25.00 ICY ITEM 12 - REMOVAL OF UNSUITABLE MATERIAL AND REPLACEMENT WITH a. 200 C.Y. Suitable Earth Material $ 10.00 ICY b. 500 C.Y. Crushed Stone $ 35.00 ICY $ 15.000.00 $ 175.000.00 $ 150.000.00 $ 500,000.00 $ 250,000.00 $ 200,000.00 $ 500.697.08 $ 5.000.00 $ 2.000.00 $ 17.500.00 BASE BID TOTAL. ITEMS 1 THROUGH 12, INCLUSIVE, THE AMOUNT OF: Five Million Four Hundred Eiahtv Thousand One Hundred Thirteen & 00/100 DOLLARS ($ 5.480.113.00 -). The Bid stated hereinbefore shall include all labor, materials, bailing, shoring, removal, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the finished work of the several kinds called for. The Bid shall also include the furnishing and installing of Major Material Items of the manufacturers and Suppliers listed on the attached Tabulation of Major Material Items for the Base Bid and approval alternates. This Tabulation and selected subcontractor's forms must be completed and accompany the Bid. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and to waive any informalities in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 60 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving Bids. 11/11/08 G003-106\XC00300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00300 - 5 Bid Within ten (10) days upon receipt 'of written notice of the acceptance of this Bid, Bidder shall execute the formal Contract and the Performance and Payment Bonds attached along with Certificates of Insurance as required by the Contract Documents. The Bid security attached in the sum of ten percent (10%) of the total Bid is to become the property of the Owner in the event the contract, bonds, and the Performance and Payment Bonds attached along with Certificates of Insurance are not executed within the time above set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the Owner caused thereby. Respectfully submitted: Dabbs-Williams General Contractors. LLC By: Bradlev M. Williams (Signature on File) Title: Vice-President Address: P.O. Box 765 Statesboro. GA 30458 Phone: 912-489-9844 ATTEST: Name Jeanne Owens (Signature on file) Title Construction Specialist Note: Attest for a corporation must be by the corporate secretary; for a partnership by another partner; for an individual by a Notary. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00300 I 00300 - 6 Bid I Selected Subcontractors I The Bidder proposes to employ the below listed subcontractors: Subcontractor Steve Duffie I Address I Subcontractor Auqusta Ready Mix I Address I Subcontractor POAG I Address I Subcontractor Auqusta Fire Protection I Address I I END OF SECTION I I I I I I I 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00414 Corporate Certificate I, Bradlev M. Williams certify that I am the Secretary of the corporation named as Contractor in the foregoing proposal; that Dabbs-Williams General Contractors, LLC who signed said proposal in behalf of the Contractor was then Bradlev M. Williams of said corporation; that said proposal was duly signed for and in behalf of said corporation by authority of its Board of Directors, and is within the SCope of its corporate powers; that said corporation is organized under the laws of the State of Georqia This 4th day of Corporate Secretary: September , 2008 Bradley M. Williams (signature on file) END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00414 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00481 Non-Collusion Affidavit of Subcontractor State of Georq ia County of Richmond Steve Duffie being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) He or she is Owner of Steve Duffie Gradinq , hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor"; (2) He or she is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the Subcontractor's Proposal submitted by the Subcontractor to Dabbs-Williams General Contractors, LLC the Contractor for certain work in connection with the Maintenance Facility Contract pertaining to the Project in Richmond County Landfill. (3) Such Subcontractor's Proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Proposal; (4) Neither the Subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Proposal in connection with such Contract or to refrain from submitting a Proposal in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said Subcontractor's Proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against Augusta-Richmond County or any person interested in the proposed Contract; and (5) The price or prices quoted in the Subcontractor's Proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. BIDDER: Steve Duffie (Signature on file) Title: Owner Subscribed and sworn to me this 4th ,2008. day of September NOTARY PUBLIC: Samantha Turner (Signature on file) Commission Expires: May 15. 2011 END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00481 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00481 Non-Collusion Affidavit of Subcontractor State of Georqia County of Columbia Richard Deeb being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) He or she is Officer of Auqusta Fire Protection Div. of Century Fire Protection hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor"; (2) He or she is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the Subcontractor's Proposal submitted by the Subcontractor to Dabbs-Williams General Contractors, LLC the Contractor for certain work in connection with the Deans Bridqe Road Maintenance Facility Fire Sprinklers Contract pertaining to the Project in Auqusta. Georqia. (3) Such Subcontractor's Proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Proposal; (4) Neither the Subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Proposal in connection with such Contract or to refrain from submitting a Proposal in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said Subcontractor's Proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against Augusta-Richmond County or any person interested in the proposed Contract; and (5) The price or prices quoted in the Subcontractor's Proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Richard Oeeb (Signature on file) (Title) Vice President Subscribed and Sworn to before me this 3rd day of September, 2008 Sharon Busby (Signature on file) My commission expires September 4.2011 END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00481 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00481 Non-Collusion Affidavit of Subcontractor State of Georqia County of Richmond Michael Garrett being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) He or she is Representative of Auqusta Overhead Door Sales, Inc., hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor"; (2) He or she is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the Subcontractor's Proposal submitted by the Subcontractor to Dabbs-Williams General Contractors. LLC the Contractor for certain work in connection with the Deans Bridqe Road Maintenance Facilitv Contract pertaining to the Project in Auqusta. Georoia #08- 157. (3) Such Subcontractor's Proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Proposal; (4) Neither the Subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Proposal in connection with such Contract or to refrain from submitting a Proposal in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said Subcontractor's Proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against Augusta-Richmond County or any person interested in the proposed Contract; and (5) The price or prices quoted in the Subcontractor's Proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) (Title) Michael Garrett (Signature on file) Proiect Manaqer Subscribed and Sworn to before me this ~ day of September, 2008 Jimmv Garrett (Signature on file) My commission expires October 1. 2010 END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00481 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 'I I I Section 00481 Non-Collusion Affidavit of Subcontractor State of Georqia County of Richmond Robert J. Dressel. Jr. being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) He or she is President Of Dressel Electrical Contractinq, Inc. hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor"; (2) He or she is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the Subcontractor's Proposal submitted by the Subcontractor to Dabbs-Williams GC the Contractor for certain work in connection with the Deans Bridqe Road Maintenance Facilitv Contract pertaining to the Project in Auqusta, Georgia. (3) Such Subcontractor's Proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Proposal; (4) Neither the Subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Proposal in connection with such Contract or to refrain from submitting a Proposal in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said Subcontractor's Proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against Augusta-Richmond County or any person interested in the proposed Contract; and (5) The price or prices quoted in the Subcontractor's Proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Robert J. Dressel. Jr. (Signature on file) (Title) President Subscribed and Sworn to before me this ~ day of Auqust, 2008 Mary Dressel (Signature on file) My commission expires December 8. 2008 END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00481 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00481 Non-Collusion Affidavit of Subcontractor State of Georqia ) County of Columbia Theresa R. Brooks being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: (1) He or she is Owner Of Brooks & Brooks. Inc. , hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor"; (2) He or she is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the Subcontractor's Proposal submitted by the Subcontractor to Dabbs-Williams General Contractors, LLC the Contractor for certain work in connection with the Deans Bridqe Road Maintenance Facility Contract pertaining to the Project in Richmond County. GA. Blythe, GA 30805. (3) Such Subcontractor's Proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Proposal; (4) Neither the Subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Proposal in connection with such Contract or to refrain from submitting a Proposal in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said Subcontractor's Proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against Augusta-Richmond County or any person interested in the proposed Contract; and (5) The price or prices quoted in the Subcontractor's Proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Theresa R. Brooks (Signature on file) (Title) Owner Subscribed and Sworn to before me this 22nd day of Auqust, 2008 Stephanie Berry (Signature on file) My commission expires July 17. 2010 END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00481 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00500 Contract THIS CONTRACT, made this day of ,2008, by and between Augusta-Richmond County, hereinafter called "Owner" and Dabbs-Williams General Contractors. LLC doing business as corporation hereinafter called "Contractor. WITNESS: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereafter mentioned: 1. The Contractor will commence and complete the construction of Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility. 2. The Contractor will furnish all of the material, supplies, tools, equipment, labor and other services necessary for the construction and completion of the project described herein. 3. The Contractor will commence work required by the Contract Documents on or before a date specified in the written Notice to Proceed and will complete the same within 240 calendar days unless the period for completion is extended otherwise by the Contract Documents. Time is of the essence and is an essential element of this Contract, and the Contractor shall pay to the Owner, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages, the sum of $750.00 for each calendar day that there is default of completing the Work within the time limit named herein for each calendar day there is default of completing the Work or defaults in completion of all the Work after commencement thereof, the Contractor shall be liable for such liquidated damages. These fixed liquidated damages are not established as a penalty but are calculated and agreed upon in advance by the Owner and the Contractor due to the uncertainty and impossibility of making a determination as to the actual and consequential damages incurred by the Owner and the general public of Richmond County, Georgia as a result of the failure on the part of the Contractor to complete the Work on time. Such liquidated damages referred to herein are intended to be and are cumulative and shall be in addition to every other remedy now or hereafter enforceable at law, in equity, by statute, or under the Contract. 4. The Contractor agrees to perform all of the Work described in the Contract Documents and comply with the terms therein for the sum of Five Million Four Hundred Eiohtv Thousand One Hundred Thirteen & 00/100 DOLLARS ($ 5.480.113.00 ). 5. The term "Contract Documents" means and includes the following: (A) Invitation to Bid (B) Instructions to Bidders (C) Bid (D) Partnership or Corporate Certificate 11/11/08 G003-106\XC00500 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (E) Noncollusion Affidavits (F) Contract (G) General Conditions (H) Supplementary Conditions (I) Payment Bond (J) Performance Bond (K) Notice of Award (L) Notice to Proceed (M) Change Order(s) (N) Certificate of Owner's Attorney (0) Drawings prepared and issued by Atlantic Coast Consulting, Inc. (P) Specifications prepared and issued by Atlantic Coast Consulting, Inc. (Q) Addenda: 00500 - 2 Contract 6. The Owner will pay to the Contractor in the manner and at such times as set forth in the General Conditions such amounts as required by the Contract Documents. 7. This Contract shall be binding upon all parties hereto and their respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed, or caused to be executed by their duly authorized officials, this Contract in six (6) copies each of which shall be deemed an original on the date first above written. OWNER: AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY By: L~<<A. ~ i,_ .~ ''i,'to.,.,~ .--;\ ~i-"<. ;. . Y~"'~.P 5. ( erG.,...J +tu'C-A- (Please Print or Type) ILl( J4-'f~ Name: .' ,,~"O"~~ H""'"'1'''~,,~ Title: Title (SEAL) 09/19/08 8003-106\XC00500 ~\0i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ATTEST: r;J.{R~r:J Name l.K~~D-f\ }-\Qff-'> (PI se Print 0 ype) Title A 01 m~ n . .4 S )'1 S .J.o.,,+ 00500 - 3 Contract CONTRACTOR: DABBS-WilLIAMS GENERAL CONTRACTORS, LlC BY:~~ Name: ~~ ~..\J~~ (Please Print or Type) Title: ~ ~ $? Address: P.O. Box 765 Statesboro, GA 30459 Note: Attest for a Corporation must be by the corporate secretary; for a partnership by another partner; for an individual by a Notary. END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00500 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I STATE OF GEORGIA Section 00550 Pre-Award Oath COUNTY OF RICHMOND In accordance with O.C.G.A. ~36-91-21(e), we, the undersigned of Dabbs-Williams General Contractors, LLC, being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: . We have not directly or indirectly violated O.C.G.A. ~36-91-21 (d), and more specifically, we have not prevented or attempted to prevent competition in such bidding or proposals by any means whatever, prevented or endeavored to prevent anyone from making a bid or proposal thereof by any means whatever, nor caused or induced another to withdraw a bid or proposal for the work. We, the undersigned, to the best of our knowledge, affirm that no other officers, agents or other persons acted for or represented the Contractor in the bidding for and procurement of this Contract. Printed Name Bradlev M. Williams "6'f .G(p~ ~y Commission Expires: tary Public END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00550 Title Vice- President Date 1"[03{~ I' I I I I I I i I I I I , I , I I I I I I I 1\ Section 00610 Performance Bond Bond II 0026212 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that Dabbs-Williams General Contractors, LLC the ;'Principal," and a corporation of the State of Georgia, Westfield Insurance Company, PO Box 5001, Westfield Center, OH 44251 the "Surety," are held and firmly bound unto Augusta-Richmond County (the "Owner") existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Georgia, in the sum of Five Million Four Hundred Seventy Seven Thousand Three Hundred Fiftv Seven & 51/100 DOLLARS ($ 5,477.357.51 ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum in lawful money of the United States well and truly to be made we do hereby bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns jointly and severally. '--- The condition of this obligation is such that whereas Principal has entered into a ceriain Contract with the Owner, dated as of the day of , 2008, which is by reference incorporated in and made a part hereof as fUlly as if copied here verbatim, for the following work: Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall in all respects comply with and perform all the terms and conditions of the Contract (which includes the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract Documents) and such alterations as may be made in said contract as the documents therein provide for, during the original term thereof and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with or without notice to Surety, and during the one year warranty period, and if PrinCipal shall satisfy all claims and demands and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury, or conduct, want of care, skill, negligence. or default, including compliance with performance guarantees and patent infringement by the Principal, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise, Principal and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to Owner any difference betvveen the sum to Which the Principal would be entitled on completion of the contract and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of the work by contractor otherwise, together with any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which Owner may sustain on account of such work., or on account of the failure of the Principal to keep and execute all provisions of the Contract Principal and Surety further- bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns. jointly and severally, that if the Principal shall keep and perform its agreement to repair or replace defective work or equipment during the warranty pel-lod of one (1) year as provided, then this paragraph shall be void; but if default shall be made by Principal in the performance of its contract to so repair or replace saId work, then this paragraph shall be in effect and Owner shall have and recover from Pr-incipal and its Surety damages for all defective conditions arising by reason of defective materials, work, or labor periormed by or on the account of Principal and it is further understood and agreed that this obligation shall be a continuing one against the Principal and Surety hereon, and that successive recoveries may be had hereon for successive breaches until the full amount shall have been exhausted; and it is further understood that the obligation therein to maintain said work shall continue throughout said maintenance period, and the same shall not be changed, diminished, or in any manner 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC0061 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00610 - 2 Performanc€ Bond affected from any cause during said time; and to fully save and hold the Owner harmless for any damages it may be caused to pay on account of injury to person, loss of nfe or damage to property. And the Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of the Surety and this Bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of time, . modification, omission, addition, or change in or to the contract, the work to be performed thereunder, or by any payment thereunder before the time required therein, or by any waiver of any provision thereof, or by any assignment subletting or other transfer thereof, or of any part thereof, of any work to be performed, or of any moneys due to become due thereunder; and the said Surety does hereby waive notice of any and all such extensions, modifications, omissions, additions, changes, payments, waivers, assignments. subcontracts, and transfer, and hereby stipulates and agrees that any and all things done and omitted to be dons by and in relation to executors, administrators, successors, assignees, subcontractors, and other transferees shall have the same effect as to said Surety as though done or omitted to be done by and in relation to the Principal. This bond Is given pursuant to and in accordance with the provisions of O.C.G.A. Section 36-91-1 et.seq. and all the provisions of the law referring to this character of Bond as set forth in said Sections or as may be hereinafter enacted, and these are hereby made a part hereof to the same extent as if set out herein in full. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have executed this Bond by causing their respective names to be hereunto subscribed and their seals to be hereunto affixed by their duly authorized officers, on this the day of , 2008, executed in six counterparts, 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC0061 0 I; I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I 00610 - 3 Performance Bond CONTRACTOR - PRINCIPAL: DABBS-WILLIAMS GENERAL CONTRACTORS, LlC . By: =--- Name: ~e ~\;> ..-vt. ~lJ.AA-f.-S (Please Print or Type) Title: ~~~ ... SURETY: WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY By: G-----~'- (Please Print or Type ) CHARLES W. SEILER iIoTTORNEY. IN. FACli GA Ii 414695 Name: Title: Agency: WACHOVIA INSURANCE SERVICES, INC. 25 BULL ST. I P.a. BOX 847 SAVANNAH,GA 31402 912 - 231 - 6934 Address: WITNESS: ~ ~ Mark Wilcox Name Account Executive (Please Print or Type) Title Asst. VP (SEAL) Note: Surety companies executing Bonds must appear on the Treasury Depallment's most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the state where the project is located. END OF SECTION 09/19/08 8003-1 06\XC0061 0 /I " ~. . } General Power of Attorney POWER NO. 1016052 01 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co. Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, Ohio CERTIFIED COpy Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a "Company" and collectively as "Companies," duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these presents make, constitute and appoint CHARLES W. SEILER of SAVANNAH and State of GA its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, with fuli power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other instruments or contracts of suretyship- - _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ . . _ . _ _ . _ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . . LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY'SONDS. . and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seai of the applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming ali that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment Is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint anyone or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behaif of the Company subject to the following provisions: The AttorneY-in-Fact. may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and ali notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed ahd attested by the Corporate Secretary." "Be it Further Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." (Each adopted at a meeting held on February 8, 2000). In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 24th day of APRIL A.D., 2006 . ~..,d'U""" Corporate "........'Ull..t"'......... Seal s " '^ '''.......... ('.....'" fi d'-~.. '.,.-, Af xe !~/ """" '\Cl \ (Sf SEAL )~) \ ~~~ ,., .I~ \ 'Y '.., ..... ~ ~ ..~ .......... I' ...... ~ Stafe of Ohio .........-....... County of Medina ss.: \,uHUU."" ,,'~''--<\ONAl.I.',.lI, .' ""1"-'..........'11& '" ..~....Q...~. .....~........... 'ii/'- '.'7~ h:J SEAL ':A; ~\n~ fm~ ~ \J,l-., .."!} f ..;~ '" .." ,,' ........., ............. \,........ "'1, * \,\' ""UIUI"'" ~ ."....~.U"",' ,':;;'c.. \"SIIR ;~I',,> .,' ..'l"!_.....;.~.....'''>< ;,"'~...,... - .....it"":. l~/t'dMTERtD\g, =0: l~: \%\ 1848 iff \: . .....::-....". .. ......~ """"'" ,..,~....",... I".....",.. WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY By: Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive ;Pz. On this 24th day of APRIL A.D., 2006 , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said Instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies; and that he signed his name thereto by like order. ;aL Notarial d2' Seal .... Affixed William J. Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code) State of Ohio County of Medina sS.: I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing Is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still In full force and effect; and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this A.D., .........u..t,,~# ,,~~\\~~~~.~~1"'-' #&~..., '. ,.. 'to !~l """" --\Cl\ (~( SEAL)~ I \ ~""" ,., .... Ii .~......~::::../ .day of ,~U'"trllfl, ,..'\'~\ONAl. /""" .' ""I"- ..........'11& I,. ;,''0 .... ....~'.~ ~iif'" \')7:- hd ~A~ =f-: SEAL :m: \{......,............<~/ 'I" * \\\\ '",,,,,,,-,.,,, . .,......,,,,,'1. "..... \"SIIR ;~I", ,"'..~ ......-.~." loI~",,:.." .... ....':(1'\ f~'t'dMTERtb\g, =0: :~= \~\ 1848 ~~j '\ . .... .. ......~...l ~. ....... .. .... """"'" ,.,........... ""I,U.,...' ~,no1.~et~ SllCl'rltary BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02) I" I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Bond II 0026212 Section 00620 Payment Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that Dabbs-Williams General Contractors, LLC ., the "Principal," a corporation of the State of Georqia... and Westfield Insurance Company, . PO Box 5001, Westfield Center. OH 44251 , the "Surety," are held and firmly bound unto Augusta-Richmond County (the "Owner") existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Georgia, in the sum of Five Million Four Hundred Seventy Seven Thousand Three Hundred Fifty Seven & 51/100 DOLLARS ($ 5,477,357.51 ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum in lawful money of the United states well and truly to be made' we do hereby bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns jointly and severally. The condition of this obligation is such that whereas Principal has entered into a certain Contract with the Owner, dated as of the ~ day of 2008, which is by reference incorporated in and made a part hereof as fully as if copied here verbatim, for the following work: Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility. NOW, THEREFORE, jf the Principal shall fully pay for all the labor and materials used by said Principal or any immediate or remote subcontractor or furnisher of labor or materials under him in the performance of the work in lawful money of the United Sta.tes as the salTle shall beoome due, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, electricity, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment, and tools, consumed or used in connection with performance of the work and all Insurance premiums and other charges incurred under said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain In full force and effect. Principal and Surety further bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns) jointly and severally, that they shall promptly make payments of all taxes, licenses, assessments, contributions, penalties, and interest thereon, when, and If, the same may be [awfully due the State of Georgia or any County, Municipality, or political subdivision thereof by reason of and directly connected with the performance of the Contract, or any part thereof. And the Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of the Surety and this Bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of time, modification, omission, addition, or change in or to the contract; the work to be performed thereunder. or by any payment thereunder before the time required therein, or by any waiver of any provision thereof, or by any assignment subletting or other transfer thereof, or of any part thereof, of any work to be performed, or of any moneys due to become due thereunder; and the said Surety does hereby waive notice of any and all such extensions, modifications, omissions additions, changes, payments, waivers, assignments, subcontracts, and transfer, and hereby stipulates and agrees that any and all things done and omitted to be done by and in relation to executors, administrators, successors, assignees, subcontractors, and other transferees shall have the same effect as to said Surety as though done or omitted to be done by and in relation to the Principal. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00620 I- I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I' 1 I 00620 - 2 Payment Bond This Bond is given pursuant to and in accordance with provisions of O.C.GA Section 36-91-1 et.seq. hereinafter, and all the provisions of law referring to this character of Bond as set forth in said Sections or as may be hereinafter enacted, and these are hereby made a part hereof to the same extent as if set out herein in full. IN WiTNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have executed this Bond by causing their respective names to be hereunto subscribed and their seals to be hereunto affixed by their duly authorized officers, on this the day of. ,2008, executed in seven counterparts. 09119/08 8003-106\XC00620 I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00620 - 3 Payment Bond CONTRACTOR - PRINCIPAL: DABBS~~MS_G~~ERALCONTRACTORS,LLC By: ~ Name: ~o .J..... \M.~~ (Please Print or Type) Title: \J.. ~ _ t , partner; for an individual by a Notary. SURETY: WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY G. - k,Q.,- By: CHARLES W. SEILER ATTORNEY. IN . FAct GA if414695 Name: (Please Print or Type) Title: Agency: WACHOVIA INSURANCE SERVICES, INC. 25 BULL ST. / p'Q. BOX 847 SAVANNAH,GA 31402 912 - 231 - 6934 Address: WITNElJ Jw Name Mark Wilcox Title (Please Print or Type) Account Execut~ve Asst. VP (SEAL) Note: Surety companies executing Bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the state where the project is located. END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC00620 ;, . t \ -p... I POWER NO. 1016052 01 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co. Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, Ohio General Power of Attorney CERTIFIED COpy Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a "Company" and collectively as "Companies," duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office In Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these presents make, constitute and appoint CHARLES W. SEILER of SAVANNAH and State of GA its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deiiver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other instruments or contracts of suretyship- - - _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _. LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY'BONDS. . and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by Its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary.or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint anyone or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-In-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: The AttorneY-in-Fact. may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and on behaif of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and ,deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary." HBe it Further Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." (Each adopted at a meeting heid on February 8, 2000). In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 24th day of APRIL A.D., 2006 . . .....'"&..u,.,~'. "","IHIl", ~ .....~..I'lIt, Corporate .........'UII.(I/'......., .,,"':\:\ONAl. I. "'., ........, 'MS'~;~'",_ Seals ~ '<:l ';.........,...C""\ .", ""~...........!}'.sc:-.., ...~~...~:.~.,~ Affixed J~/ ...,.,.,. "\Cl '\ .iuS.:.... .....?7Z\. l~..'" - .....~ 0:- · it. Sl.4 J( Y'1 . - f~it'/.t.RrE1It1J\~~ t ~( .l:4.M.L)~ ~ 0~ SEAL ~~ ~ !o: :~E l~"" .Ii; ~~~ :()~ .~. 18 :~- \ l' ..... 'lIn .... ~ .l' ~.~..... ./0,/ \ c=:J ". 4 8 ...~! ~__ ...........:Ii . . ~.. .. ......_....... . ,~...~ ......, .~., ........ ..........' ....... ...,. ....... ..wIt'- "'" * \,\' """," ",~.."",... Stafe of Ohio WWWI...nM'.,.-- It".""ftll"'\\\ "'''I..tll,,1 County of Medina ss.: WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY By: Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive On this 24th day of APRIL A.D., 2006 , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFiELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies; and that he signed his name thereto by like order. ;aL Notarial tfd. Seal ... Affixed William J. Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code) State of Ohio County of Medina sS.: I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still in full force and effect; and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this A.D., ~"""u""~'" ....... ,U 11.,( """ /.. '<:l '~"""""~~""'\ J~/ ...,.,.,. \Cl,\ I it; Sl.4 J( Y ;~! i I-t .l:4.M.L :,.1 \~\. i~J \1'...... 'lIn ....~./ ;#-\. .......... ~ ...............,-'''''' .day of ,,,'UUt,,,, \'..'\'~\ONAl. /'/'// ,'''''I''..........i\t.s ". ::'''0 .... ....(/1l"~ ~'-:-f'" "'7:- ~"": '.Z"- : li:: SEAL :():: - f-' 'm- \~'................../~/ '/II""'''j~t.l'''\\\\\'' . ,........,"/", ...,..... ,"SU, ;~"'" .' ':e.~ ......-.~.. /.:!!o..~' _ ....~,;..\ ~~. .r ~ ! ~!t'/.WERllJ\~ ! -_..iI:_ !~~ _' :3:J: \~.. 1848 ':~f \ .. .... .... ...... ""i...l ~ ............. ""'" .......... """;,.."..",,, ~. ~ ~, S~CNrt(lry Frank A. carrinodcret _ BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00697 Notice Of Award To: Re: Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility The Owner has considered the Bid submitted by you for the above-referenced Project in response to its Invitation to Bid and. Information for Bidders. You are hereby notified that your Bid has been accepted for items in the amount of _ You are required by the Information for Bidders to execute the Agreement and furnish the required Contractor's Performance Bond, Payment Bond, and certificates of insurance within ten (10) calendardays from the date of this Notice to you. If you fail to execute said Contract and furnish said Bonds within ten (10) days from the date of this Notice, said Owner will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the Owner's acceptance of your Bid as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your Bid Bond will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law. . Owner. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award to the Dated this day of 200_. Augusta-Richmond County By: Name and Title: ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged by this the day of ,200 . By: Name and Title: END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00697 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II Section 00698 Notice to Proceed To: Re: Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill, Maintenance Facility . You are hereby notified that to commence work in accordance with the Agreement dated. · 200_, on or before , 200_. and you are to complete the project within 270 consecutive calendar days thereafter. The date of completion of all work is therefore . 200_. Dated this day of ,200_. By: Name and Title: ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged by this the day of .200_, By: Name and Title: END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00698 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00699 Certificate Of Owner's Attorney I, the undersigned, I the duly authorized and acting legal representative of Augusta- . hmond County, do hereby certify as follows: I have examined the attached Contract(s) and surety bonds and the manner of. execution thereof, and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid agreements has been duly executed by the proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized representatives; that said representatives have full power and authority to execute said agreements on behalf of the respective parties named thereon; and that the foregoing agreements constitute valid and legally binding obligations upon the parties executing the same in accordance with terms, conditions and provisions thereof. Date: L~l f1\o( END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00699 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. GENERAL CONDITIONS General Definitions Additional Instructions and Detail Drawings Schedules, Reports, and Records Correlation of Documents Shop Drawings Materials, Services, and Facilities Inspection and Testing Substitutions Patents Surveys, Permits, Regulations Protection of Work, Property, Persons Supervision by Contractor Changes in the Work Changes in Contract Price Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages Correction of Work Subsurface Conditions Suspensions of Work, Termination, and Delay Payments to Contractor Acceptance of Final Payment as Release Insurance Contract Security Assignments Indemnification Separate Contracts Subcontracting Engineer's Authority Land and Rights-of-Way Guaranty Taxes Disputes Contract Provisions Required by Law Prohibited Interest Use of Premises and Removal of Debris Estimate of Quantities Contractor's Obligations Payments by Contractor Waiver Chemicals Connecting of Existing Work Program and Method of Construction Buildings and Shanties Sewage, Surface and Flood Flows Obstructions Encountered Use of Streets Access by Representatives of Governmental Agencies Local and State Laws Deleted 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 Section 00700 General Conditions I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 00700 - 3 General Conditions GENERAL CONDITIONS o. GENERAL 0.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS: The General Conditions are general in scope and may refer to conditions not encountered on the work covered by these Contract Documents. Any provision of the General Conditions which pertains to a nonexistent condition and is not applicable to the work to be performed hereunder, shall have no meaning in these Contract Documents and shall be disregarded. 0.2 SPECIFICATIONS: No attempt has been made in the Specifications to segregate work to be performed by any trade or subcontract. Any segregation between the trades or crafts will be solely a matter for agreement between the Contractor and his employees and his subcontractors. The Specifications as a whole will govern the construction of the entire work. The applicable provisions thereof will govern work to be performed under each section. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents cover all matters relating to the work the Contractor is obligated to perform. The Contract Documents are organized into various parts and sections for convenience. All parts and sections of the Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any shall be as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents, as defined herein, form the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor for the performance of the work covered by these Contract Documents. It is agreed by the Owner and the Contractor, as evidenced by and through the execution of the Contract, that all terms of the Contract Documents shall be binding on both parties to the Contract and shall be a part of the Contract, the same as if the Contract Documents are repeated therein. LEGAL ADDRESSES: Both the business address of the Contractor given in the Bid Proposal Form and the Contractor's office in the vicinity of the work either of which are hereby designated as the place to which all notices, letters, and other communication to the Contractor will be mailed or delivered. The address of the Owner is indicated in the bidding instructions, and is hereby designated as the place to which all notices, letters, and other communication to the Owner shall be mailed or delivered. Either party may change his address at any time by an instrument in writing delivered to the other party. . INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: The relation of the Contractor to the Owner shall be that of an independent contractor. GOVERNING STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: Standard specifications or other specifications of organizations, societies, governmental agencies, or bodies, referred , to in these Contract Documents, are made a part of these Contract Documents the same as if repeated herein. Unless specifically stated otherwise, the standard shall be that adopted and published at the date of the Advertisement for Bids. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I II I I 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 .1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 00700- 5 General Conditions' Notice to Proceed, and the Specifications, Drawings, and Engineering Data furnished by the Contractor and accepted by the Owner. Whenever, in any portion of the Contract Documents, the terms "Plans and Specifications" or "Specifications" or "Contract" or words of like import appear, they shall be interpreted to mean Contract Documents as defined herein. CONTRACT PRICE: The contract price or contract prices named in the Contract Documents shall be the amount of the compensation to the Contractor agreed to by the Owner and the Contractor for the proper and satisfactory completion of the work specified herein, including all contingencies, in full conformity with the Contract Documents. The contract price(s) shall be full payment for the performance of the work and the furnishing of labor, materials, transportation, supplies, tools, equipment, taxes, employee benefits, incidentals, services, and other items necessary or convenient for completion of the work in a satisfactory and acceptable manner, and within the intent of these Contract Documents. CONTRACT TIME: The number of calendar days allowed by these Contract Documents for the completion of the work, including authorized time extensions for the completion of the work sufficient for acceptance as substantially complete by the Owner. CONTRACTOR: The person, firm, or corporation whose proposal is accepted by the Owner and who enters into a Contract with the Owner for performance of the work covered by and in conformance 'with these Contract Documents. DRAWINGS: Drawings, which are sometimes referred to herein as "plans," are defined as all (a) drawings furnished by the Owner as a basis for bids; (b) supplementary drawings furnished by the Owner to clarify and to define in greater detail the intent of the Contract Drawings and Specifications; (c) drawings furnished by the Owner to the Contractor during the progress of the work;. ENGINEER/PROJECT MANAGER: Owner approved personnel and Contractor(s). FIELD ORDER: A written order effecting a change in the WORK not involving an adjustment in the CONTRACT PRICE or an extension of the CONTRACT. TIME issued by the ENGINEER to the CONTRACTOR during construction. NOTICE OF AWARD: The written notice of the acceptance of the BID from the OWNER to the successful bidder. NOTICE TO PROCEED: Written communication issued by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR authorizing him to proceed with the WORK and establishing the date of commencement of the WORK. OBSERVER: An authorized representative of the Engineer assigned to make necessary observations of the work performed by the' Contractor. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00700 - 7 General Conditions 1.28 SPECIFICATIONS: A part of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS consisting of written descriptions of a technical nature of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, and workmanship. 1.29 SUBCONTRACTOR: The person, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor or with any other subcontractor for performing work covered by these Contract Documents which the Contractor is obligated to. perform or to cause to be performed. 1.30 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: That date as certified by the ENGINEER when the construction of the PROJECT is sufficiently completed, in accordance with the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, so that the PROJECT can be safely, conveniently and beneficially utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. 1.31 SUPPLIER: The person, firm, or corporation who will furnish products acceptable to the Engineer for incorporation into the work covered by these Contract Documents. A supplier may also be referred to as "manufacturer" or "distributor" in these Contract Documents. 1.32 WORK: Everything specified, indicated, shown, or contemplated, including materials, labor, equipment, transportation, supplies, and things required to be done, furnished, or performed by the Contractor under these Contract Documents. The work shall include everything expressly or impliedly required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents. 1.33 WRITTEN NOTICE: Any notice to any party of the Agreement relative to any part of this Agreement in writing and considered delivered and the service thereof completed, when posted by certified or registered mail to the said party at his last given address, or delivered in person to said party or his authorized representative on the WORK. 1.34 MAY: Permissive. 1.35 "SHALL" IMPLIED: Some sentences, statements and clauses used in the specifications exclude any form of the verb "shall" normally expressed in a verb phrase with verbs such as "furnish", "install", "provide", "perform", "construct", "erect", "comply", "apply", "submit" or similar verb, but in any such sentences, statements, and clauses shall be interpreted to include the applicable form of the phrase ''The . CONTRACTOR shall" and the requirements described therein shall be interpreted as mandatory elements of the CONTRACT. 1.36 SHALL: Mandatory 1.37 WILL: Mandatory 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 00700 - 9 General Conditions The costs employed in making up any of these schedules will be used only for determining the basis of partial payments and will not be considered as fixing a basis for additions to or deductions from the contract price. An updated schedule and an updated Schedule of Submittals shall be presented with each partial payment request. Lack of an updated schedule and/or an updated Schedule of Submittals will delay processing of the pay request until receipt of the updated schedule and/or an updated Schedule of Submittals. If the schedule reflects a completion date prior to the completion date established by the Contract Agreement, this shall afford no basis to claim for delay should the Contractor not complete the Work prior to the projected completion date. Instead all"float" between the completion date in the Contractor's schedule and the completion date established in the Contract" Agreement shall belong to and be exclusively available to the Owner. Should a change order be executed with a revised completion date, the progress schedule shall be revised to reflect the new completion date. Contractor's Responsibilities (1) Implement the detailed Near Term Schedule of activities to the fullest extent possible between Project Coordination Meetings. (2) The Contractor shall prepare the Contractor's Daily Report by 10:00 a.m. of the day following the Report date. This Daily Report will contain, as a minimum, the weather conditions; number of workers by craft, including supervision and management person'nel on site; active and inactive equipment on site; work accomplished by CPM activity item; problems; and visitors to the jobsite. (3) If a current activity or series of activities on the OPS is behind schedule and if the late status is not due to an excusable delay for which a time extension would be' forthcoming, the Contractor shall attempt to reschedule the activity to be consistent with the Overall Project Schedule so as not to delay any of the Contract milestones. The Contractor agrees that: a. The Contractor shall attempt to expedite the activity completion so as to have it agree with the OPS. Such measures as the Contractor may choose shall be made explicit during the Project Coordination Meeting. b. If, within two weeks of identification of such behind-schedule activity, the Contractor is not successful in restoring the activity to an on schedule status, the Contractor shall: 1. Carry out the activity with the scheduled crew on an overtime basis until the activity is complete or back on schedule. 2. Increase the crew size or add shifts so the activity can be completed as scheduled. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 00700 - 11 General Conditions 4.6 The parts of the Contract Documents are complementary, each part being an essential part of these Contract Documents, which are intended to describe and provide for a complete work. A requirement occurring in one is as binding as though occurring in all. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare all Drawings, Specifications, and other instructions; shall test all figures on the Drawings before laying out the work; shall notify the Engineer of all errors, inconsistencies, or omissions which he may discover. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any error or omission, which may be found in the Drawings or other Contract Documents. In case of unresolved conflict between items of the Contract Documents, the following order of precedence shall govern, with the higher item taking precedence over a lower item: Contract (including Supplemental Agreements and Change Orders thereto) Addenda Instructions to Bidders Bid General Conditions Specifications Schedules on Drawings Notes on Drawings Details on Drawings Large Scale Drawings Small Scale Drawings Dimensions Given in Figures Scaled Dimensions In the event of any discrepancy between any Drawing and the figures written thereon, the figures, unless obviously incorrect, shall be taken as correct. When measurements are affected by conditions already established or where items are to be fitted into constructed conditions, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify all such dimensions at the site and the actual job dimensions shall take precedence over scale and figure dimensions on the Drawings. Wherever a stock size of manufactured item or piece of equipment is specified by its nominal size, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the actual space requirements for setting and for entrance to the setting space and to make all necessary allowances and adjustments therefor in his work without additional cost to the Owner. 02/13/08 G003-106\.XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I . 5.6 5.7 . 5.8 5.9 5.10 5.11 5.12 00700 - 13 General Conditions 5.5 When the drawings and data are returned marked "AMEND AND RESUBMIT" or "REJECTED" the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by the Engineer and not less than six (6) corrected copies resubmitted. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, when drawings and data are returned marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED," the changes shall be made as noted thereon and not less than six (6) corrected copies shall be furnished. All corrections and changes made on the drawings or data sheets other than those noted by the Engineer shall be clearly identified with a revision symbol and shall be suitably documented on the drawing with a brief description and date. When the drawings and data are returned marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN," fabrication and/or installation can begin and no additional copies need be furnished. No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication or manufacture of materials and equipment, nor shall any accessory or appurtenance be purchased until the drawings and data therefor have been reviewed by the Engineer and returned marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED". A copy of each approved SHOP DRAWING and each approved sample shall be kept in good order by the CONTRACTOR at the site and shall be available to the ENGINEER. The Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by the Contractor will cover only general conformity to the Drawings and Specifications, external connections, and dimensions which affect the layout. The Engineer's review of drawings returned marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" does not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the material, equipment, devices, or items shown and shall not in any way be deemed to relieve the Contractor from any responsibility for errors or deviations from the requirements of these Contract Documents or from full responsibility for complete and accurate performance of the work in conformance with these Contract Documents or from any liability placed upon him by any provisions of these Contract Documents. The schedule of submittals of engineering data and submittals of samples of materials or products, if required, shall be made by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements in the section entitled "Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples" of these Specifications. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 00700 - 15 General Conditions 6.10 The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for delivery and handling of equipment and materials as he may require for the prosecution of the work. The location of all temporary lines, roadways, and similar facilities shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, and these shall be located and operated so as not to interfere with other work carried on by the Owner or by other contractors. The materials, fixtures, and apparatus furnished shall be new, except as otherwise provided herein, unused, and of good quality, and shall be incorporated into the work in an undamaged condition. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Whenever materials are sold by the manufacturer in sealed packages, they shall be so delivered to the site of the work. The materials shall be manufactured, handled, and used in a workmanlike manner to provide a completed work in accordance with these Contract Documents. Materials, products, and equipment designated for permanent installation in the work shall be properly stored by the Contractor in a manner to ensure protection against deterioration of any type. These items shall be so placed as to cause a minimum of interference with the prosecution of the work and to the public. The method of storing shall be so as to facilitate inspection. Deterioration of any kind or to any degree shall be cause for rejection. Stored materials, even though meeting the requirements of these Contract Documents before being stored, shall be inspected prior to incorporation in the work and shall meet the requirements of these Contract Documents at the time of incorporation in the work. If material, products, or equipment stored by the Contractor and paid for under the terms of these Contract Documents is damaged or otherwise becomes unsuitable before its permanent incorporation into the work, the amounts paid the Contractor for the damaged material shall be deducted from the next progress payment. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all materials, products, and equipment, which he has furnished and shall replace at his own expense all such material found to be defective or which has been damaged after delivery. This includes the replacement of material which is found to be defective at any time prior to expiration of the guarantee period. It is agreed that any temporary power lines, roadways, or other facilities which the Contractor furnishes, installs, maintains, and removes at the completion of the work may be used by the Owner or any of his contractors at such reasonable time or times as may be directed by the Engineer. Likewise it is provided that similar facilities of other contracts will become available to the Contractor under similar conditions. Adequate sanitary facilities shall be provided by the Contractor. All such sanitary facilities shall conform to the requirements of the respective state and county departments of public health. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I I I 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 00700 - 17 General Conditions If the ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that covered WORK be inspected or tested by others, the CONTRACTOR, at the ENGINEER's request, will uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as the ENGINEER may require, that portion of the WORK in question, furnishing all necessary labor, materials, tools, and equipment. If it is 'found that such WORK is defective, the CONTRACTOR will bear all the expenses of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing, and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such WORK is not found to be defective, the CONTRACTOR will be allowed an increase in the CONTRACT PRICE or an extension of the CONTRACT TIME, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, and reconstruction and an appropriate CHANGE ORDER shall be issued. The field testing of materials shall be made by a competent laboratory or other person paid for by the Owner, .one time only. The Contractor shall submit samples of materials for testing as required by the Engineer. The cost of all retests made necessary by the failure of materials to conform to the requirements of these Contract Documents shall be paid by the Contractor. The testing of equipment and products shall be performed as provided in the Specifications. All materials and equipment used in the construction of the project shall be subject to adequate inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards. The laboratory or inspection agency shall be approved by the Owner. The cost of all inspection and testing of all materials and equipment for determination of source, suitability, applicability, all certified mill tests, etc., shall be included in the contract price for supplying the applicable materials and equipment as no separate payment will be made for these services. Materials of construction, particularly those upon which the strength and durability of the structure may depend, shall be subject to inspection and testing to establish conformance with Specifications and suitability for uses intended. Where mill. tests of materials are found by the Engineer to be acceptable, the Contractor shall furnish certified copies of such mill tests. The cost of furnishing such certified copies shall be borne by the Contractor, with no separate payment allowed. Where shop equipment performance tests are specified, the Engineer shall be permitted to witness such tests. In the absence of a witnessed test, certified copies of shop tests shall be submitted to the Engineer. No payment will be made to the Contractor for samples taken for tests such as concrete cylinders, soils samples, etc. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8.4 8.5 9. 9.1 10. 10.1 10.2 00700 - 19 General Conditions The Owner, through the Engineer, will consider proposals for substitution of materials, equipment, and methods only when such proposals are accompanied by full and complete technical data and all other information required to evaluate the proposed substitution. The Contractor shall not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been specifically approved for this project by the Engineer. PATENTS Royalties and fees for patents covering materials, articles, apparatus, devices, or equipment (as distinguished from processes) used in the work shall be included in the Contract Price(s). The Contractor shall satisfy all demands that may be made at the time for such royalties or fees, and he shall be liable for any damages or claims for patent infringements. The Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, defend all suits or proceedings that may be instituted against the Owner for alleged infringement of any patents involved in the. work and in case of an award of damages the Contractor shall pay such award. SURVEYS, PERMITS, REGULATIONS The OWNER shall furnish all boundary surveys and establish all base lines for locating the principal component parts of the WORK together with a suitable number of bench marks adjacent to the WORK as shown in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. From the information provided by the OWNER, unless otherwise specified in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, the CONTRACTOR shall develop and make all detail surveys needed for construction such as slope stakes, batter boards, stakes for pile locations, and other working points, lines, elevations, and cut sheets. Permits, licenses, and easements of a temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the WORK shall be secured and paid for by the CONTRACTOR. Permits, licenses, and easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the OWNER unless otherwise specified. The CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the conduct of the WORK as drawn and specified. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in Section 13, CHANGES IN THE WORK. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 11.5 11.6 11.7 11 .8 11 .9, 00700 - 21 General Conditions Reasonable care shall be taken during construction to avoid damage to vegetation. Ornamental shrubbery and tree branches shall be tied back, where appropriate, to minimize damage. Trees, which receive damage to branches, shall be trimmed of those branches to improve the appearance of the tree. Tree trunks receiving damage from equipment shall be treated with a tree dressing. The Contractor shall not enter upon private property for any purpose without first obtaining permission, and he shall be responsible for the preservation of all pUblic and private property. The Contractor shall at all times while the work is in progress use extraordinary care to see that adjacent buildings are not endangered in any way by reason of fire, water, or construction operations, and to this end shall take such steps as may be necessary or directed to protect the property therefrom, and the same care shall be exercised by all Contractor's and subcontractor's employees. The Contractor shall give due notice to any controlling person, department, or public service company prior to adjusting items to grade and shall be held strictly liable to the Owner if any such items are disturbed, damaged, or covered up during the course of the work. The Contractor shall not disturb, remove, or relocate any land monuments and property marks until an authorized agent has witnessed or otherwise referenced their location. , , Any temporary drains and drainage, which may be required by the Contractor during the construction period, shall be furnished, installed, and maintained by him. No such drains or drainage systems shall be installed or used without the prior approval of the Engineer. At the completion of the work, all such drains and drainage systems shall be removed and the premises returnedtoa neat and clean condition. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the work shall be kept accessible to the firefrghting apparatus at all times, and no material or obstruction shall be placed within 10 feet of any hydrant. Adjacent premises must be given access, as far as practicable, and obstruction of sewer inlets, gutters, and ditches will not be permitted. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and superviSing all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety' of employees on the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local safety laws and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. The Contractor shall comply with the Department of Labor's Safety and Health Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (PL 91-596) and under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (PL 91-54). Copies of these regulations may be obtained from the U. S. Government Printing Office, 275 Peachtree Street, N.E., Atlanta, Georgia 30303. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00700 - 23 General Conditions 11.15 The Contractor shall carefully preserve all monuments, bench marks, property markers, reference points, and stakes. In case of his destruction thereof,' the Contractor will be charged with the expense of replacement and shall be responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be caused. Permanent monuments or bench marks which must be removed or disturbed shall be, protected until properly referenced for relocation. The Contractor shall furnish materials and assistance for the proper replacement of such monuments or bench marks. 11.16 Whenever, in the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor has not taken sufficient precaution for the safety of the public or the protection of the work to be constructed under these Contract Documents or of adjacent structures or property, and whenever, in the opinion of the Owner, an emergency has arisen and immediate action is considered necessary, then the Owner, with or without notice to the Contractor, may provide suitable protection by causing work to be done and material to be furnished and placed. The cost of such work and material shall be borne by the Contractor, and if the same is not paid on presentation of the bills thereof, such costs may be deducted from any amounts due or to become due the Contractor. The performance of such emergency work shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage which may occur. 12. SUPERVISION BY CONTRACTOR 12.1 The CONTRACTOR will supervise and direct the WORK. He will be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. The CONTRACTOR will employ and maintain on the WORK a qualified supervisor-' or superintendent who shall have been designated in writing by the CONTRACTOR as the CONTRACTOR's representative at the site. The supervisor shall have full authority to act on behalf of the CONTRACTOR and all communications given to the supervisor shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. The supervisor shall be present on the site at all times as required to perform adequate supervision and coordination of the WORK. 12.2 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the work efficiently using the best skill and attention and shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. The Contractor will be responsible to see that the finished work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 12.3 The Engineer shall have the right to reject or demand . replacement of such superintendent at any time, with or without cause, solely at the Engineer's discretion, based upon objective or subjective reasons, which reasons the Engineer may, but is not required to, disclose to the Contractor. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.9 13~ 10 13.11 14. 14.1 00700 - 25 General Conditions No claim for extra work will be considered unless said extra work was ordered in writing as aforesaid and the claim presented in writing to the Engineer within 30 days after receipt by the Contractor of the written order to perform said extra work. If the performance of the extra work results in additional time being required by the Contractor to complete the work covered by these Contract Documents, said Change Order will provide for an equitable extension in the contract time. All Change Orders, including a change in technical design or an increase in cost, must be approved by the Owner, the Engineer, and those governmental agencies whose approval is required. Should the Contractor encounter, or the Owner discover, during the progress of the Work, subsurface or latent conditions at the site materially differing from those shown on the Drawings or indicated in the Specifications, or unknown conditions of an unusual nature differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in Work of the character provided for in the Drawings and Specifications, the Owner shall immediately be notified in writing of such conditions before they are disturbed. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions. If the Owner finds that conditions do so materially differ, or are of an unusual nature, and upon written request of the Contractor, an equitable adjustment will be authorized by Change Order. If the Contractor does not immediately notify the Owner in writing of the belief that a field order, additional work by other contractors or the Owner, or subsurface, latent or unusual unknown conditions entitles the Contractor to a Change Order, no consideration for time or money will be given the Contractor. The Owner may, with the Contractor's concurrence, elect to postpone the issuance of a Change Order until such time that a single Change Order of substantial importance can be issued incorporating several changes. In such cases, the Owner will indicate this intent for each change in the Contract in a written response to the Contractor's request for a change, following agreement by the Owner and Contractor on the change's scope, price and time. CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE The CONTRACT PRICE may be changed only by a CHANGE ORDER. The value of any WORK covered by a CHANGE ORDER or of any claim for increase or decrease in the CONTRACT PRICE shall be. determined by one or more of the following methods in the order of precedence listed below: (1) Method A UNIT PRICES contained in the CONTRACTOR's Proposal for the same type or class or WORK. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 14.6 14.7 14.8 15. 15.1 15.2 00700 - 27 General Conditions (5) All power, fuel, lubricants, water, and similar operating expenses as well as other expendable materials. (6) All incidental expenses incurred as a direct result of such CHANGED or EXTRA WORK, including payroll taxes and a prorated portion of the premium on the PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT and MAINTENANCE BOND, and, where the premiums therefore are based on payroll cost, on Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance, Workmen's Compensation Insurance, and Occupational Disease Disability Insurance, Builder's Risk, and other insurance . required by the CONTRACT. (7) No repairs, replacements or other forms of overhead expense shall be included in "ACTUAL FIELD COSTS". The ENGINEER may direct the form in which the accounts of the ACTUAL FIELD . COSTS shall be kept and may also specify in writing, before the WORK commences, the method of doing the WORK and the type and kind of machinery and equipment, if required, which shall be used in the performance of any CHANGED or EXTRA WORK under Method "0". In the event that machinery and heavy construction equipment are required for such CHANGED or EXTRA WORK, the authorization and basis of payment for the use thereof shall be stipulated in the CHANGE ORDER. The 15 percent of the "ACTUAL FIELD COST" to be paid to the CONTRACTOR shall cover and be full compensation for the CONTRACTOR'S profits, overhead,' general superintendence, and field office expense, and all other elements of cost not embraced within the "ACTUAL FIELD COST" as herein defined. In determining the amount payable to the CONTRACTOR an additional 5 percent may be added to the amount payable to a SUBCONTRACTOR, but no "pyramiding" or additional percentage will be authorized for any WORK done by SUBCONTRACTORS. When compensation for extra work is provided under paragraph 14.1 above, the Contractor's representative and the Engineer shall' compare records of extra work done at the end of each day. Such records shall be made in duplicate upon a form provided for such purpose by the Engineer and shall be signed by both representatives referred to herein, one copy being submitted to the Engineer and the other being retained by the Contractor. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES The date of beginning and the time for completion of the WORK are essential conditions of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and the WORK embraced shall be commenced on a date specified in the NOTICE TO PROCEED. The CONTRACTOR will proceed with the WORK at such a rate of progress to insure full completion within the CONTRACT TIME. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the CONTRACT TIME for the completion of the WORK described herein is a reasonable time, taking into 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00700 - 29 General Conditions (3) Unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, including, but not restricted to, acts of God which are unusual weather phenomena, or acts of the public enemy, acts of the OWNER, fires, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, industry-wide strikes, freight embargoes, and severe weather as provided above. (4) Delays of a CONTRACTOR'S SUBCONTRACTORS or suppliers occasioned by any of the causes specified in (2) and (3) hereof. 15.8 Provided, however, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER through the ENGINEER of the alleged cause of such delay as hereinbefore required. The OWNER shall ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay with the assistance of the ENGINEER. 15.9 The number of days used in determining the amount of liquidated damages to be paid by the Contractor for delay in completing the work shall be determined by subtracting the contract time and any time extensions thereof from the time actually required for the completion of the work. The time actually required for the completion of the work is . defined as the total number of calendar days from the date of the Notice to Proceed to the date of substantial completion. 15.10 This provision for liquidated damages shall be effective between the parties ipso facto without necessity for demand or putting in default by any notice or other means than by the terms of these Contract Documents, the Contractor hereby waiving any such other notice of default and acknowledging that the Contractor shall be deemed to be in default by the mere act of his failure to complete the work within the contract time, or within any valid extension of such time hereunder. 15.11 It is understood and agreed that these liquidated damages are not a penalty, but constitute liquidated damages for loss to the Owner because of increases in expenses for administration, legal counsel, accounting, engineering and construction supervision, and inspection and any other expenses incurred directly as a result of the delay of the Contractor in completing the work. 16. CORRECTION OF WORK 16.1 The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from the premises all WORK rejected by the ENGINEER for failure to comply with the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, whether incorporated in the construction or not, and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly replace and reexecute the WORK in accordance with the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and without expense to the OWNER and shall bear the expense of making good all WORK of other CONTRACTORS destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 00700 - 31 General Conditions. If the CONTRACTOR is adjudged a bankrupt or insolvent, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for the CONTRACTOR or for any of his property, or if he files a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or to reorganize under the bankruptcy or applicable laws, or if he fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, or if he fails to make prompt payments to SUBCONTRACTORS or for labor, materials, or . equipment or if he disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public body having jurisdiction of the WORK or if he disregards the authority of the ENGINEER, or if he otherwise violates any provision of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, then the OWNER may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the CONTRACTOR and his surety a minimum of ten (10) days from delivery of a WRITTEN NOTICE, terminate the services of the CONTRACTOR and take possession of the PROJECT and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment, and machinery thereon owned by the CONTRACTOR, and finish the WORK by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the CONTRACT PRICE exceeds the direct and indirect costs of completing the PROJECT, including compensation for additional professional services, such excess SHALL BE PAID TO THE CONTRACTOR. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, the CONTRACTOR will pay the difference to the OWNER. Such costs incurred by the OWNER will be determined by the ENGINEER and incorporated in a CHANGE ORDER. Where the CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by the OWNER, said termination shall not affect any right of the OWNER against the CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of monies by the OWNER due to the CONTRACTOR will not release the CONTRACTOR from compliance with the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. After ten (10) days from delivery of a WRITTEN NOTICE to the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER, the OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, elect to abandon the PROJECT and terminate the CONTRACT. In such case, the CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all WORK executed plus reasonable profit. If the performance of all or any portion of the WORK is suspended, delayed, or interrupted as a result of a failure of the OWNER or ENGINEER to act within a reasonable time, an adjustment in the CONTRACT PRICE or an extension of the CONTRACT TIME, or both, shall be made by CHANGE ORDER to compensate the CONTRACTOR for the costs and delays necessarily caused by the failure of the OWNER or ENGINEER. The Contractor shall not suspend the work and shall not remove any equipment, tools, supplies, materials, or other items without the written permission of the Owner or Engineer. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00700 - 33 General Conditions 19. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR 19.1 At least ten (10) days before each progress payment falls due (but not more than once a month), the CONTRACTOR will submit to the ENGINEER a partial payment estimate filled out, and signed by the CONTRACTOR covering the WORK performed during the period covered by the partial payment estimate and supported by such data as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the WORK but delivered and suitably stored at or near the site, the partial payment estimate shall also be accompanied by such supporting data, satisfactory to the OWNER, as will establish the OWNER's title to the material and equipment and protect his interest therein, including applicable insurance. The ENGINEER will either indicate in writing his approval of payment and present the partial payment estimate to the OWNER, or return the partial payment estimate to the CONTRACTOR indicating in writing his reasons for refusing to approve payment. In the latter case, the CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the partial payment estimate. The OWNER will pay the CONTRACTOR a progress payment on the basis of the approved partial payment estimate. The OWNER shall retain ten (10) percent of the amount of each payment until final completion and acceptance of all work covered by the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The OWNER at any time, however, after fifty (50) percent of the WORK has been completed, if he finds that satisfactory progress is being made, may reduce retainage to five (5%) percent on the current and remaining estimates. When the WORK is SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETE (operational or beneficial occupancy), the retained amount will be further reduced below five (5) percent to two hundred (200) percent of the value of the outstanding Work. On completion and acceptance of a 'part of the WORK on which the price is stated separately in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, payment may be made in full, including retained percentages, less authorized deductions. 19.2 The request for payment may also include an allowance for the cost of such major materials and equipment which are suitably stored either at or near the site. 19.3 Prior to SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, the OWNER, with the concurrence of the CONTRACTOR, may use any completed or SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED portions of the' WORK. Such use shall not constitute an acceptance of such portions of the WORK. 19.4 The OWNER shall have the right to enter the premises for the purpose of doing work not covered by the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. This provision Shall not be construed as relieving the CONTRACTOR of the sole responsibility for the care and protection of the WORK, or the restoration of any damaged WORK except such as may be caused by agents or employees of the OWNER. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I 1 I 1 00700 - 35 General Conditions 19.9 No compensation will be made in any case for loss of anticipated profits. 19.10 The basis of payment shall be the contract unit prices and/or contract lump sum price(s) named in these Contract Documents. 19.11 The measurement of quantities shall be made by the Engineer in accordance with the Specifications and other Contract Documents. 19.12 If the Contract is based on a unit price bid, the items of work to be measured and the units of measurement shall be as set forth in the Bid Proposal Form. Only net quantities of finished work will be measured. Any items of work not set forth in the Bid Proposal Form, but necessary or convenient for the satisfactory completion of the work under the terms of these Contract Documents, shall not be measured separately and shall be considered a part of said items of work set forth in the Bid Proposal Form. 19.13 If the Contract is based on a lump sum bid, the measurement of quantities for progress estimates and progress payment requests will be made by the Contractor, subject to the Engineer's approval, and will be based on items of work and the value thereof contained in the Contractor's Schedule of Values. A final measurement of quantities will not be required. 19.14 The Contractor may submit to the Engineer, on forms furnished by the Engineer, a progress payment request for the amount of work accomplished, products furnished, and products stored at the site during the previous month. Ten (10) signed copies of each request shall be furnished. The progress payment request shall be signed by the Contractor and be supported by such data as the Engineer may reasonably require. If payment is requested for products not incorporated in the work but delivered and suitably stored at or near the site, the progress payment request shall also be accompanied by such supporting data, satisfactory to the Owner, as will establish the Owner's title to said products and protect his interest therein, including appropriate insurance. The Contractor shall furnish a proper and duly executed written authorization designating those persons who will be autho~ized to sign and/or certify progress payment requests for the Contractor. 19.15 It is understood and agreed that the approval of the progress payment request and the paying of a partial payment shall not be construed as acceptance of any work, materials, or products and shall not relieve the Contractor in any way from his responsibilities and obligations under these Contract Documents. 19.16 A partial payment will not be made when, in the judgment of the Owner or the Engineer, the work is not proceeding in accordance with any of the provisions of these Contract Documents. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 21 .2 21.3 00700 - 37 General Conditions 21.1.1 Claims under workman's compensation, disability benefit, and other similar employee benefit acts; 21.1.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of his employees; 21.1.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees; 21.1.4 Claims for damages' insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the CONTRACTOR, or (2) by any other person; and 21.1.5 Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of-use resulting therefrom. The CONTRACTOR shall within ten (10) days after the receipt of the NOTICE OF AWARDfurnish the OWNER with Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the OWNER shall be filed with the OWNER prior to commencement of the WORK. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverage afforded under the policies will not be canceled unless at least thirty (30) days prior WRITTEN NOTICE has been given to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall procure and maintain, at his own expense, during the CONTRACT TIME, liability insurance as hereinafter specified. The limits of liability the CONTRACT TIME, liability insurance as hereinafter specified. The limits of liability must be at least equal to the limits carried by Augusta-Richmond County. 21.3.1 CONTRACTOR's General Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance including vehicle coverage issued to the CONTRACTOR and protecting him from all claims for personal injury, including death, and all claims for destruction of or damage to property, arising out of or in connection with any operations under the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, whether such operations be by himself or by any SUBCONTRACTOR under him, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the CONTRACTOR or by a SUBCONTRACTOR under him. Insurance shall be written with a limit of liability of not less than $1,000,000 for all damages arising , out of bodily injury, including death, at any time resulting therefrom, sustained by anyone person in anyone accident; and a limit of liability not less than $1,000,000 aggregate for any such damages sustained by two or more persons in anyone accident. Insurance shall be written with a limit of liability of not less than $1,000,000 for all property damage sustained by anyone person in anyone accident; and a limit of liability of not less than $1,000,000 aggregate for any such damage sustained by two or more persons in anyone accident. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I 1 I I I I' I I ,I I I I I I I 00700 - 39 General Conditions 21.9 The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all of the insurance required and such insurance has been approved by the Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until the insurance required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. 21.10 In the event any insurance coverage should be canceled or allowed to lapse, the Contractor will not be permitted to work until adequate and satisfactory insurance is in effect. Failure to keep insurance policies in effect WILL NOT be cause for any claims for extension of time under this Contract. 22. CONTRACT SECURITY 22.1 The CONTRACTOR shall within ten (10) days after the receipt of the NOTICE OF AWARD furnish the OWNER with a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond in penal sums equal to the amount of the CONTRACT PRICE, conditioned upon the performance by the CONTRACTOR of all undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreement of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, and upon the prompt payment by the CONTRACTOR to all persons supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the WORK provided by the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Such BONDS shall be executed by the CONTRACTOR and a corporate bonding company licensed to transact such business in the state in which the WORK is to be performed and named on the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds" as published in the Treasury Department Circular Number 570. The expense of these BONDS shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. If at any time a surety on any such BOND is declared a bankrupt or loses its right to do business in the state in which the WORK is to be performed or is removed from the list of Surety Companies accepted on Federal Bonds, CONTRACTOR shall within ten (10) days after notice from the OWNER to do so, substitute an acceptable BOND (or BONDS) in such form and sum signed by such other surety or sureties as may be satisfactory to the OWNER. The premiums on such BOND shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR. No further payments shall be deemed due nor shall be made until the new surety or sureties shall have furnished an acceptable BOND to the OWNER. 22.2 Payment Bond in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price and a Performance Bond in the amourit of 100 percent of the contract price shall be required in the form set forth in the Contract Documents. 22.3 Whenever a Construction and Maintenance or Maintenance Bond may be required in the.se Contract Documents, the same shall be the Performance Bond included herein. 22.4 The attorney-in-fact or officer who signs the Performance Bond and the Payment Bond for a surety must file with such bond a certified copy of his power of attorney authorizing him to do so. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00700 - 41 General Conditions 25. 25.1 25.2 26. 26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6 SEPARATE CONTRACTS The OWNER reserves the right to let other CONTRACTS in connection with this PROJECT. The CONTRACTOR shall afford other CONTRACTORS reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their WORK, and shall properly connect and coordinate his WORK with theirs. If the proper execution or results of any part of the CONTRACTOR'S WORK depends upon the WORK of any other CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR shall inspect and promptly report to the ENGINEER any defects in such WORK that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. The OWNER may perform additional WORK related to the PROJECT by himself, or he may let other CONTRACTS containing provisions similar to these. The CONTRACTOR will afford the other CONTRACTORS who are parties to such CONTRACTS (or the OWNER, if he is performing the additional WORK himself), reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of WORK, and shall properly connect and coordinate his WORK with theirs. SUBCONTRACTING The CONTRACTOR may utilize the services of specialty SUBCONTRACTORS on those parts of the WORK which, under normal contracting practices, are performed by specialty SUBCONTRACTORS. The CONTRACTOR shall not award WORK to SUBCONTRACTOR(s), in excess of fifty (50) percent of the CONTRACT PRICE, without prior written approval of the . OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to the OWNER for the acts and omissions of his SUBCONTRACTORS, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as he is for the acts and omissions of person directly employed by him. See Paragraph 26.11 of these General Conditions. Nothing contained in this CONTRACT shall create any contractual relation between any SUBCONTRACTOR and the OWNER. The Contractor shall give his personal attention to the fulfillment of the Contract and shall at all times keep the work under his control. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00700 - 43 General Conditions 27.2 The CONTRACTOR shall perform all of the WORK herein specified under the general direction, and to the entire satisfaction, approval, and acceptance of the Engineer. The Engineer shall decide all questions relating to measurements of quantities, the character of the WORK performed and as to whether the rate of progress is such that the WORK will be completed within the time limit of the Contract. All questions as to the meaning of these Specifications will be decided by the Engineer. 27.3 The approval of the Engineer of any materials, plants, equipment, Drawings, or of any other items executed, or proposed by the Contractor, shall be construed only to constitute an approval of general design. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor from the performance of the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents, or from any duty, obligations, performance guarantee, or other liability imposed upon him by the provisions of the Contract. 27.4 The CONTRACTOR will be held strictly to the intent of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS in regard to the quality of materials, workmanship, and execution of the WORK. Inspections may be made at the factory or fabrication plant of the source of material supply. 27.5 The ENGINEER will not be responsible for the construction means, controls, techniques, sequences, procedures, or construction safety. 27.6 The ENGINEER shall promptly make decisions relative to interpretation of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 27.7 The Engineer may appoint such inspectors as he may desire. Inspection will extend to all parts of the work and to the preparation and manufacture of the materials to be used. An inspector is placed on the work to keep the Engineer and Owner informed as to the progress of construction and the manner in which it is being done and also to call to the attention of the Contractor any deviation from the Drawings and Specifications. 27.8 The inspectors have the authority to reject defective material or work that is being improperly done subject to the final decision of the Engineer. The inspectors are not . authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, or relax the provisions of these conditions, nor are they authorized to approve or accept any portion of the completed work, or to issue instructions contrary to the Drawings and Specifications. 27.9 The Contractor may request written instructions from the Engineer upon any important items which lie within the inspector's jurisdiction. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 29. 29.1 30. 30.1 30.2 30.3 31. 31 .1 32. 32.1 00700 - 45 General Conditions WARRANTY The CONTRACTOR shall warrant all materials and equipment furnished and WORK performed for a period of one (1) year from the date of FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER. The CONTRACTOR warrants for a period of one (1) year the completed system is free from all defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly make such corrections as may be necessary by reason of such defects including the repairs of any damage to other parts of the system resulting from such defects. The OWNER will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. In the event that the CONTRACTOR should fail to make such repairs, adjustments, or other WORK that may be made necessary by such defects, the owner may do so and charge the CONTRACTOR the cost thereby incurred. The PERFORMANCE BOND shall remain in full force and effect through the warranty period. TAXES. PERMITS AND LICENSES The CONTRACTOR will pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required by the law of the place where the WORK is performed. The Contractor shall pay all applicable taxes levied by federal, state, and local governments and obtain all permits on any part of the work as required by law in connection with the work. It is understood and agreed that the cost of said taxes is included in the contract price(s) for the work. The Contractor shall procure all temporary permits and licenses necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the work and shall pay all charges and fees, and all costs thereof shall be deemed to be included in the contract price(s) for the work. DISPUTES Disputes shall be settled in the Superior Court of Richmond County where the Owner is located. CONTRACT PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW It is understood and agreed that each and every provision and clause required by local, state, and federal laws to be inserted in these Contract Documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein in their entirety, and the Contract Documents shall be read and enforced as though they were included herein. If through mistake or otherwise any such provision' or clause is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, these Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction upon the application of either party of the Contract. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 35. 35.1 35.2 35.3 36. 36.1 36.2 00700 - 47 General Conditions ESTIMATE OF QUANTITIES When the Bid Proposal Form contains the provision for receiving bids based on unit prices for various items comprising the complete work, the quantities indicated are approximate only, being given as a basis for comparison of bids. The Owner does not, expressly or by implication, agree that the actual quantity of the items will correspond with the estimated quantity shown in the Bid Proposal Form, and reserves the right to increase or decrease the amount of any item or portion of the work, or to omit portions of the work, as may be deemed necessary or advisable by the Engineer. When the Bid Proposal Form contains the provision for receiving bids based on a lump sum price, the Contractor shall be held responsible for having prepared his own estimate of the quantities necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work specified in these Contract Documents and for having based the lump sum price bid on his estimate of quantities. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall be held responsible for the inclusion of the cost of all incidental items of work necessary or convenient for the satisfactory completion of the work, in accordance with and within the intent of these Contract Documents, in the price(s) bid and that the price(s) bid provide for the satisfactory completion of the work specified in these Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR'sOBLlGA TIONS The Contractor shall in good workmanlike manner perform all work and furnish all supplies and materials, machinery, equipment, facilities, and means, except as herein otherwise expressly specified, necessary or proper to perform and complete the work required by this Contract, within the time herein specified, in accordance with the provisions of this Contract and said Specifications and in accordance with the Drawings covered by this Contract and all supplemental Drawings, and in accordance with the directions of the Engineer as given from time to time during the progress of the work. He shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary works as may be required. The Contractor shall observe, comply with, and be subject to all terms, conditions, requirements, and limitations of the Contract and Specifications and shall do, carryon, and complete the entire work to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner. The Contractor shall restore disturbed areas to original or better condition. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 39. 39.1 40. 40.1 41. 41.1 42. 42.1 00700 - 49 General Conditions CHEMICALS All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all chemicals and disposal of residues shall strictly conform with the manufacturer's instructions. CONNECTING OF EXISTING WORK The Contractor shall remove such existing masonry and piping as is necessary in order to make the proper connections to these structures at the locations shown. Also, he shall make the necessary pipeline, roadway, and other connections at several points in order that on completion of the Contract, all required flows may flow through the several pipelines and structures. No extra payment shall be made for this work, but the entire cost of the same shall be included in the price bid for the various items of the work to be done under this Contract. PROGRAM AND METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION The order or sequence of execution of the work, the methods of construction, the general conduct of the work, and the general arrangements of the construction plant to be installed shall at all times be subject to the approval and direction of the Engineer. If at any time before the commencement or during the progress of the work, or any part of it, such methods, features, and appliances used or to be used appear to the Engineer as unsafe, insufficient, or improper, he may order the Contractor to increase their safety or efficiency or to improve their character, and the Contractor shall conform to such orders, but the failure of the Engineer to demand any increase of such safety, efficiency, adequacy, or any improvement shall not release the Contractor from his obligation to secure the safe conduct and quality of the work specified. BUILDING AND SHANTIES No shanties, camps, or buildings for the housing of men employed on the work shall be erected on land owned or leased by the Owner unless a permit, in writing, is secured from the Owner allowing their construction. Should permission be asked and granted, the Contractor must comply with all regulations regarding the construction and maintenance of such buildings. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 45. 45.1 45.2 45.3 45.4 45.5 46. 46.1 00700 - 51 General Conditions USE OF STREETS During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall make ample provision for both vehicular and foot traffic on any public road and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any expense whatsoever due to his operations over said roadways. The Contractor shall also provide free access to all fire hydrants and water and gas valves located along the line of his work. Gutters and waterways must be kept open or other provisions made for the removal of storm water. Street intersections may be blocked only one half at a time, and the Contractor shall lay and maintain temporary driveways, bridges, and crossings such as in the opinion of the Engineer are necessary to reasonably accommodate the public and to provide access to needed private driveways. In the event of the Contractor's failure to. comply with these provisions, the Owner may cause the same to be done and will deduct the cost of such work from any money due or to become due the Contractor under this Contract, but the performance of such work by the Owner or at its insistence shall serve in nowise to release the Contractor from his general or particular liability for the safety of the public or the work. Required line crossings of all streets and roads shall be done in accordance with the applicable state Department of Transportation procedures. The Contractor will be peimitted to close a street when necessary for the proper prosecution of the work. The Contractor shall keep the Police and Fire Departments continuously informed as to his intentions to close streets and give' the Police Department sufficient notice in order that "No Parking" signs may be placed at the proper time to clear the street for construction. The Contractor shall maintain proper barricades and flagmen to detour traffic. At all times, the Contractor is responsible for damage to City and County streets as a result of their use in this project. The streets must be kept clear of all dirt, stone, or other debris. All debris, dirt, etc., whether cause by rains storms, spillage from trucks or otherwise, shall be kept out of sewers. The Contractor is responsible for and may not plead ignorance of City and County ordinances and amendments hereto that may affect the use of streets sewers. ACCESS BY REPRESENTATIVES OF GOVERNMENTAL AGENCIES The authorized representatives and agents of all governmental agencies involved in this project shall have access to the work at all times and shall be permitted to inspect all work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials, and other relevant data and records. The Contractor shall provide proper facilities for the access and inspection of the work by such persons. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 52.3 52.4 52.5 52.6 00700 - 53 General Conditions Utility facilities, such as water mains, gas mains, storm sewers, sanitary sewers, telephone lines, power lines, and buried facilities and structures in the vicinity of the work are indicated on the drawings only to the extent such information has been made 'available to or discovered by the Engineer during the course of preparing the Drawings. The actual locations of the utility facilities may vary from the locations shown and there may be utility facilities existing that are not indicated on the Drawings. It is understood and agreed that there is no guarantee as to. the accuracy or completeness of the utility information indicated on the Drawings and all responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof is expressly disclaimed. Generally, service connections are not indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for locating all existing underground facilities, including service connections, in advance of excavating, trenching, or other work, by contacting the owners of the facilities or prospecting. The Contractor shall . use his own information and shall not rely upon any information shown on the Drawings concerning utility facilities. In the event of accidental damage to or disruption of utilities by the Contractor or any . of his subcontractors or agents, the Contractor shall immediately take all necessary steps to replace any pieces of damaged equipment and all damaged materials, make all necessary repairs, and restore all services to normal. The Contractor shall engage any and all required additional labor, individuals, subcontractors, or other outside services which may be deemed necessary to operate on a continuous "around-the- clock" basis until services are restored. He shalf also provide and install all required equipment and materials to maintain temporary emergency services for uninterrupted use of facilities. All costs involved in making the repairs and restoring the disrupted service to normal shall be borne by the Contractor responsible for any and all damage claims resulting from such disruption. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor or any of his subcontractor or agents disrupt or disconnect any type of facility whatsoever without first obtaining the written permission of the utility owner to do so. Request for disruption or disconnection shall state: 1. The location of the required disconnect and which utility is concerned. 2. The exact date and time at which the disconnect will be required. 3. The duration of the proposed disconnect or interruption. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 56. 56.1 00700 - 55 General Conditions ARCHAEOLOGICAL PLAN FOR IDENTIFICATION AND EXCAVATION OF SIGNIFICANT SITES Identification and Excavation: Since no known sites are to be directly impacted by proposed construction, no plans have been made for archaeological excavations prior to construction. Due to the possibilities that sites may be encountered during construction, the following procedure has been established: A. The Engineer shall be instructed to notify either a local professional archaeologist or the director of the state Division of Archaeology in the event that concentrations of shells, pottery fragments, bones, beads, flint projectiles, etc., are encountered during construction. B. Construction shall be stopped immediately in the area in question and will be diverted to other areas so as to provide for minimal delays in construction. C. If the site is determined to be significant, the Engineer and Contractor shall cooperate with the archaeologist(s) so that salvage archaeology may be arranged and carried out expediently. The Contractor shall not be held responsible for unreasonable delays associated with salvage archaeology operations. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 00800 Supplemental General Conditions o. GENERAL 0.1 SUPPLEMENTS: The supplements contained in these Supplemental General Conditions modify, change, delete from, or add to the General Conditions of these contract Documents. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph, or clause thereof is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph, or clause thereof is modified by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph, or clause shall remain in effect. 1.0 INSURANCE (Refers to Article 21, General Conditions) Contractor shall submit to the Engineer and Owner the following: 1.1 A Certificate of Insurance certifying that the contractor's insurance includes coverage for the following: a. The Contractor shall be responsible from the time of signing the contract, or from the time of the beginning of the first work, whichever shall be earlier, for all injury or damage of any kind resulting from this work, to person or property. The Contractor shall exonerate, indemnify and save harmless the OWNER and the Engineer from and against all claims or actions, and all expenses incidental to the defense arising out of damage or injury (including death) to persons or property caused by or sustained in connection with the performance of this contract or by conditions created thereby or arising out of or in any way connected with work performed under this contract and shall assume and pay for, without cost to the OWNER or the Engineer, the defense of any and all claims, litigation and actions suffered through any act or omission of the Contractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed under the supervision of any of them. 1.2 A Certificate of Insurance showing coverage by insurance carriers licensed and doing business in Georgia and acceptable to the OWNER for the following: a. Statutory Workmen's Compensation Insurance. b. Comprehensive Liability Insurance covering all operations and automobiles (i) with limits of $1,000,000 per occurrence $3,000,000 General Aggregate Bodily Injury inclusive of protection against bodily injury due to excavation, shoring, underpinning and blasting, to the extent to which such risks are present, and (ii) with limit of $1,000,000 per occurrence Property Damage, inclusive of protection against damage due to excavation, shoring, underpinning and blasting, to the extent to which such risks are present. c. Protective coverage for any subcontractor's operations. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00800 - 3 Supplemental General Conditions 1.5 Criteria for Holding Companies Submitting Surety Bonds to the OWNER. An insurer, to be acceptable, will be required to meet the following criteria: a. A Company holding a Certificate of Authority as an acceptable Surety on Federal Bonds, as published in the latest such listing in the Federal Register; and an insurance company licensed to do business within the State of Georgia as a company writing policies of insurance and/or bid bonds, payment bonds and performance bonds, regulated as such by the Georgia Department of Insurance, and the participant in the State of Georgia Insurance and Solvency Pool, and meet the following additional criteria: (1) A company with a rating in the AM. Best Companies' most recent publishing rating of "A++ or A+: Class IV or Larger". (2) A company with a rating in A.M. Best Companies' most recent publishing rating of "A: Class V or Larger". (3) A company with a rating in AM. Best Companies' most recent publishing rating of "A-: Class X or Larger". (4) A company which can furnish an assumption certificate or cut through clause in a statement of coverage under which payment is guaranteed 1 00% to third-party claimants by a reinsurer with a rating in AM. Best Companies' most recent published rating of "A or A+: Class V or Larger". (5) In lieu of the AM. Best Company Rating, insurers rated AAA, AA+, AA, AA- by Standard & Poors Insurance Rating Services will also be acceptable. b. If surety does not meet any of the above qualifying criteria, the OWNER, in its sole discretion, shall evaluate any such surety, upon receiving from the company the following information, plus any other information it deems relevant: (1) Copy of a certified financial audit for the insurer's most recent fiscal year, performed by a nationally or regionally recognized accounting firm, giving the company a clean opinion. (2) Copy of a report for the insurer's most recent fiscal year from an independent, certified actuary verifying recommended and approved loss reserves, premium structures (not less than 85% approved by the Georgia Department of Insurance for insurance writing bid bonds, payment bonds and performance bonds within Georgia), and appropriate funding. 02/13/08 . G003-106\XC00800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00800 - 5 Supplemental General Conditions e. Settle all outstanding liabilities and all claims arising out of such termination of orders and subcontracts, with the approval or ratification of the OWNER to the extent the OWNER may require. Its approval or ratification shall be final for all the purposes of Article 2.3.e. f. Transfer title to the OWNER, and delivery in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if any, directed by the OWNER, (i) the fabricated or unfabricated parts, work in progress, completed work, supplies, and other material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of the work terminated by the Notice of Termination, and (ii) the completed or partially completed plans, drawings, information, and other property which, if the contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the OWNER; g. Use his best efforts to sell, in the manner, at the times, to the extent, and at the price or prices that the OWNER directs or authorizes, and property of the types referred to in Article 2.3.f., but the Contractor (i) shall not be required to extend credit to any purchaser, and (ii) may acquire any such property under the conditions prescribed and at a price or prices approved by the OWNER. The proceeds of any such transfer or disposition shall be applied in reduction of any payments to be made by the OWNER to the Contractor under this contract or shall otherwise be credited to the price or cost of the work covered by this contract or paid in such other manner as the OWNER may direct; h. Complete performance of such part of the work as shall not have been terminated by the Notice of Termination; and, i. Take such action as may be necessary, or as the OWNER may direct, for the protection and preservation of the property related to this contract which is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the OWNER has or may acquire an interest; 2.4 After receipt of a Notice of Termination, the Contractor shall submit to the OWNER his termination claim in the form and with the certification the OWNER prescribes. Such claims shall be submitted promptly but in no event later than ninety (90) days from the effective date of termination, unless one or more extensions in writing are granted by the OWNER upon request of the Contractor made in writing within such ninety-day (90) period or authorized extension. However, if the OWNER determines that the facts justify such action, it may receive and act upon any such termination claim at any time after such ninety-day (90) period or extension. If the Contractor fails to submit his termination claim within the time allowed, the OWNER may determine, on the basis of information available to it, the amount, if any, due to the Contractor because of the termination. The OWNER shall then pay to the Contractor the amount so determined and the Contractor shall have no further claim against the OWNER; 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00800 I I I I I I I I 1 I' I I I I I I I I I 00800 - 7 Supplemental General Conditions b. The reasonable cost of the preservation and protection of property incurred under Article 2.3.i and any other reasonable cost incidental to termination of work under this contract, including expense incidental to the determination of the amount due to the Contractor as a result of the termination of work under this contract. The total sum to be paid to the Contractor under Article 2.6.a shall not exceed the total contract sum as reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further reduced by the contract price of work. not terminated. Except for normal spoilage and except to the extent that the OWNER shall have otherwise expressly assumed the risk of loss, there shall be excluded from the amount payable to the Contractor under Article 2.6.a above, the fair value, as determined by the OWNER of property which is destroyed, lost, stolen, or damaged to the extent that it is undeliverable to the OWNER, or to a buyer under Article 2.3.g; 2.7 The Contractor shall have the right to make claim from any determination the OWNER makes under Articles 2.4 or 2.6. But if the Contractor has failed to submit his claim within the time provided in Article 2.4 and has failed to request extension of such time, he shall have no such right of appeal In any case where the OWNER has determined the amount due under Articles 2.4 or 2.6, the OWNER shall pay to the Contractor the following: (1) the amount so determined by the OWNER or (2) if an adverse proceeding is initiated, the amount finally determined in such proceeding; 2.8 In arriving at the amount due the Contractor under Article 2.6, there shall be deducted (1) all unliquidated advance or other payments on account theretofore made to the Contractor, applicable to the termination portion of this contract, (2) any claim which the OWNER may have against the Contractor in connection with this contract, and (3) the agreed price for, or the proceeds of sale of, any materials, supplies, or other things kept by the Contractor or sold under the provisions of Article 2.6 and not otherwise recovered by or credited to the OWNER; 2.9 If the termination hereunder be partial, before the settlement of the termination portion of this contract, the Contractor may file with the OWNER a request in writing for an equitable adjustment of the price or prices specified in the contract related to the continued portion of the contract (the portion not terminated by the Notice of Termination). Such equitable adjustment as may be agreed upon shall be made in the price or prices. Nothing contained herein shall limit the right of the OWNER and the Contractor to agree upon the amount or amounts to be paid to the Contractor for the completion of the continued portion of the contract when the contract does not contain an established contract price for the continued portion. 2.10 Upon written notice from the OWNER, the Contractor agrees to cure any structural defect caused by the Contractor in the project or remedy any departure from the plans and specifications not approved by change order within twenty (20) days of receipt of such notice unless extended by OWNER in writing. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4.5 00800 - 9 Supplemental General Conditions 4.3 In the event the Contractor shall be delinquent in respect to compliance with the time limits established in Paragraph 4.2, he shall, within seven days after receipt of written demand of the OWNER, COMMENCE WORKING NOT LESS THAN A TWELVE-HOUR DAY AND NOT LESS THAN SIX DAYS A WEEK UNTIL SUCH TIME AS HE SHALL HAVE BROUGHT THE AMOUNT OF WORK IN PLACE INTO COMPLIANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE. Fulfillment of this requirement as to overtime work shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for breach of the covenant as to time. For account of recovery of lost time required of the contractor for his breach of the covenant as to time, the Contractor shall be entitled to no claim against the OWNER for any payment, repayment, reimbursement, remittance, remuneration, compensation, profit, cost, overhead, expense, loss, expenditure, allowance, charge, demand, hire, wages, salary, tax, cash, assessment, price, money, bill, statement, dues, recovery, restitution, benefit, recoupment, exaction, injury, or damages. 4.4 The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time called for in the Contract Documents. It is expressly understood and agreed that the Contractor has considered all contingencies and factors affecting his ability to perform all the work within this time, including among others, delays caused by bad weather (as detailed in 4.5 below) and other possible delays, and after consideration of these factors, he had made an allowance for such factors before agreeing to completion date specified in the Contract Documents, and does further agree that all things considered, such completion date is a reasonable time for completion of all Work to be performed hereunder, without the need for any extension of time. Completion time will not be extended for normal bad weather. The time for completion as stated in the Contract Documents includes due allowance for calendar days on which work cannot be performed out-of-doors. For the purpose of this Contract, the Contractor agrees that he may expect to lose a TOTAL number of calendar days between the "start-of-work date" and functional completion date due to weather in accordance with the following table which is the average from three local area weather stations over the same period of time. This is the same source of data used to determine normal weather losses. Jan 10 days Feb 9 days Mar 9 days April 8 days May 10 days June 8 days July 11 days Aug 9 days Sept 7days Oct 6days Nov 7days Dec 8days Also, the Contractor agrees that a "day lost to weather" for the period covered by this contract is defined as a calendar day in which either: A. Precipitation exceeded 0.10 inch OR 02/13/08 G003-106\XC00800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 01010 Summary of Work Part 1 General 1.01 Description A. The Work to be performed under this Contract shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals and performing all Work required for the construction of a Maintenance building and related site and utility improvements. B. All Work described above shall be performed as shown on the Drawings and as specified. 1 .02 Project Location The equipment and materials to be furnished will be installed at the locations shown on the Drawings. 1.03 Quantities The Owner reseNes the right to alter the quantities of work to be performed or to extend or shorten the improvements at any time when and as found necessary, and the Contractor shall perform the work as altered, increased or decreased. Payment for such increased or decreased quantity will be made in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. No allowance will be made for any change in anticipated profits nor shall such changes be considered as waiving or invalidating any conditions or provisions of the Contract and Bond. 1.04 Partial Owner Occupancy The existing facilities to which these improvements are being made will continue operation during the period of construction. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01010 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part 1 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 General Section 01011 Unique Requirements Scope The scope of this Section is to convey to the Contractor unique and unusual stipulations and requirements which have been established for this Project. Some requirements are based on technical aspects of the Project which are not otherwise conveyed to the Contractor. The provisions of this Section shall supersede the provisions of the Division 1 through 17 Specifications but shall not supersede the Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms or Conditions of the Contract. Submittals A. Sequence Submittal 1. Submit a proposed sequence in accordance with Section 01310 with appropriate times of starting and completion of tasks to Engineer for review. 2. The Contractor may propose alternatives to the sequencing constraints to that . shown in this Section in an attempt to reduce the disruption of the operation of the existing facility or streamline the tasks of this Contract. The Owner and Engineer are not obligated to accept any of these alternatives. Ex!sting Facility Operations A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with the Owner so that the construction will not restrain or hinder the operation of the existing facilities. If, at any time, any portion of the facilities are out of service, the Contractor must obtain approval from the Owner as to the date, time and length of time that portion of the facilities are out of service. B. Connections to the existing facilities or alteration of existing facilities will be made at times when. the facility involved .is not in use or at times, established by the Owner, when the use of the facility can be conveniently interrupted for the period of time needed to make the connection or alteration. C. After having coordinated the work with the Owner, the Contractor shall prepare a submittal in accordance with Section 01340 to include the time, time limits and methods of each connection or alteration and have the approval of the Engineer before any work is undertaken on the connections or alterations. D. Before any roadway or facilities are blocked off, the Owner's approval shall be obtained to coordinate operations for the landfill. Sequencing A. General 1. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction sequencing. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01011 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 01016 Occupancy Part 1 General 1.01 Partial Occupancy by Owner Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any section or portion of the Work or any structure is in suitable condition, it may be put into use upon the written order of the Engineer, and such usage shall not be held to be in any way an acceptance of said Work or structure, or any part thereof, or as a waiver of any of the provisions of these Specifications and the Contract. Pending final completion and acceptance of the Work, all necessary repairs and removals, due to defective materials or workmanship or to operations of the Contractor, of any section of the Work so put into use shall be performed by the Contractor at his own expense. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01016 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 01025 Measurement and Payment Part 1 General 1.01 Scope A. The Bid lists each item of the Project for which payment will be made. No payment will be made for any items other than those listed in the Bid. B. Required items of work and incidentals necessary for the satisfactory completion of the work which are not specifically listed in the Bid, and which are not specified in this Section to be measured or to be included in one ofthe items listed in the Bid, shall be considered as incidental to the work. All costs thereof, including Contractor's overhead costs and profit, shall be considered as included in the lump sum or unit prices bid for the various Bid items. The Contractor shall prepare the Bid accordingly. C. Work includes furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, tools and materials, which are not furnished by the Owner and performing all operations required to complete the work satisfactorily, in place, as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. 1.02 Descriptions A. Measurement of an item of work will be by the unit indicated in the Bid. B. Final payment quantities shall be determined from the record drawings. The record drawing lengths, dimensions, quantities, etc. shall be determined by a survey after the completion of all required work. Said survey shall conform to Section 01720 of these Specifications. The precision of final payment quantities shall match the precision shown for that item in the Bid. C. Payment will include all necessary and incidental related work not specified to be included in any other item of work listed in the Bid. D. Unless otherwise stated in individual sections of the Specifications or in the Bid, no separate payment will be made for any item of work, materials, parts, equipment, supplies or related items required to perform and complete the work. The costs for all such items required shall be included in the price bid for item of which it is a part. E. Payment will be made by extending unit prices multiplied by quantities provided and then summing the extended prices to reflect actual work. Such price and payment shall constitute full compensation to the Contractor for furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, tools and materials not furnished by the Owner and for performing all operations required to provide to the Owner the entire Project, complete in place, as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. F. "Products" shall mean materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the work. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC01 025 01025 - 3 Measurement and Payment 3. Fuel Tank and Equipment: Allow the amount provided in the Bid for the construction of a fuel facility by a firm selected by the Owner. Fuel facilities shall be constructed in the area shown on the drawings and in accordance with separate documents and/or requirements to be provided by the Owner. This construction will include tank, concrete foundations, pumps, and other equipment. Contractor shall not hinder the construction of the fuel facility and shall coordinate with the selected fuel facility contractor at no additional charge to the Owner. Wiring, conduits, junction boxes and electrical work within the maintenance building shall be responsibility of the Contractor. Underground conduit outside the building associated with this work shall be the responsibility of the fuel facility contractor. 4. Furniture, Fixtures and Equipment: Allow the amount specified in the Bid for the purchase of furnishings and equipment as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall direct the Contractor to purchase, receive delivery, store, protect, and deliver for installation at the Facility, the office equipment, signage and furnishings deemed necessary by the Owner. The Contractor shall not include any costs in the Bid for the installation of the furnishings and equipment. If deemed necessary by the Owner, Contractor services for installation will be requested by the Owner in the form of a Change Order, as outlined in these Specifications. 5. Maintenance Tools and Equipment: Allow the amount provided in the Bid for the purchase and installation of miscellaneous tools and equipment in the Maintenance Building by a firm selected by the Owner. The Owner shall direct the Contractor to purchase, receive delivery, store, protect, and deliver for installation at the Facility, the office equipment and furnishings deemed necessary by the Owner. The Contractor shall not include any costs in the Bid for the installation of the furnishings and equipment. If deemed necessary by the Owner, Contractor services for installation will be requested by the Owner in the form of a Change Order, as outlined in these Specifications. 6. Landscaping and Fencing: Allow the amount provided in the Bid for the construction of landscaping, fencing and gates by a firm selected by the Owner. Landscaping, fencing and gates shall be constructed in accordance with separate documents and/or requirements to be provided by the Owner and will include trees, shrubs, fencing, gates, gate operator and hardscape features. Contractor shall not hinder the construction of these items and shall coordinate with the selected landscaping contractor at no additional charge to the Owner. Clearing and Grubbing No separate payment shall be made for clearing and grubbing. The cost of moving and reestablishing landscape features, including labor and materials, shall be included in the unit price bid for the item to which it pertains. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC01 025 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 01025 - 5 Measurement and Payment E. Stone Check Dams: All costs for check dams, including stone, necessary earthwork, periodic maintenance and repair, and removal of sediment and stone following establishment of permanent erosion control measures shall be included in the unit price bid for Stone Check Dams. F. Rip Rap 1. The cost of all rip rap, including filter fabric, shown on the Drawings, specified, or directed by the Engineer, shall be included in the unit price bid for Rip Rap. 2. When crossing a stream or ditch, the quantity eligible for payment shall be limited to 10 feet upstream and 10 feet downstream from top of trench excavation and from five feet from top of bank, across a creek or ditch, banks and bottoms, to five feet beyond top of bank. Any other areas at creeks or ditches disturbed by the Contractor, which require rip rap, shall be rip rapped at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Grassing: No separate payment will be made for temporary or permanent grassing. H. Erosion Control Matting: All costs for erosion control matting, including installation, maintenance, and repair, shall be included in the unit price bid for Erosion Control Matting. I. NPDES Monitoring and Reporting: All costs associated with NPDES monitoring, sampling and reporting in accordance with Georgia EPD requirements and these Contract documents shall be included in the lump sum price bid for this item. This includes, but is not limited to preparation and submission of all inspections, storm water sampling, record keeping, and reporting as required under the permit. NOI and NOT shall be the responsibility of the Owner. 1.07 Earthwork A. Site structural fill and excavation 1. Structural fill and excavation of on-site soil materials shall include all work associated with filling and excavation of soils within the Project. Excavation and backfill of pipelines, stockpile work as well as unsuitable materials are not excavation and will not be included in payment. 2. Payment for all construction items for completion of the site structural fill and excavation as shown in the Drawings shall be included in the lump sum price bid for Site Structural Fill and Excavation. 3. No separate payment will be made for providing sheeting, bracing and timbering. B. Rock Excavation: No separate payment will be made for rock excavation. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC01 025 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 01025 - 7 Measurement and Payment B. Trench Excavation: No separate payment will be made for trench excavation. All costs shall be included in the unit price bid for the item to which it pertains at the appropriate depth. C. Sheeting, Bracing and Shoring: No separate payment will be made for providing any sheeting, bracing and shoring. D. Rock Excavation: No separate payment will be made for rock excavation. The cost of such work and all associated costs shall be included in the unit price for the item to which it pertains. E. Dewatering Excavations: All costs of equipment, labor and materials required for dewatering shall be included in the price bid for the item to which it pertains. F. Trench Foundation and Stabilization 1. No payment for trench stabilization shall be authorized until after the trench has been dewatered. If the pipe is installed in an inadequately prepared trench bottom, the Engineer shall notify the Contractor in writing of the deficiency. and will not authorize payment for that portion of that length of pipe which was improperly installed. 2. Payment for trench stabilization shall be made on the. basis of the amount authorized and the unit price bid for trench stabilization. Payment shall include all costs for the removal and disposal of the unsuitable material and replacement with crushed stone. No additional payment will be made for material required for specified bedding. G. Bedding and Haunching 1. The price bid for each utility shall include trench excavation to the depth below the pipe necessary to provide specified bedding and to lay the utility line to grade. 2. No additional payment will be made for additional trench depth. 3. No separate payment will be made for material used to provide specified bedding. The cost of all bedding materials shall be included in the unit price bid for the item to which it relates, except for trench stabilization. 4. Payment for the additional costs of providing Type 4 bedding shown on the Drawings, specified or ordered by the Engineer shall be made at the unit price bid for trench stabilization. 5. No additional payment will be made for improved bedding required to compensate for over excavation of the trench. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC01 025 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 01025 - 9 Measurement and Payment C. No separate payment shall be made for traffic control or maintaining highways, streets, roadways and driveways. D. Laying and Jointing Pipe and Accessories 1. Measurement for payment at the unit price for gravity sewer shall be made from centerline of manhole to centerline of manhole or to inside face of structure wall penetrated. Depth of cut shall be measured from pipe invert to ground level at pipe centerline. Cut sheets prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer shall be the basis for payment. 2. No additional payment will be made for replacement of defective materials. 3. No separate payment shall be made for detection tape or tracer wire. 4. No payment will be made for cutting and beveling pipe. E. Manhole and Precast Concrete Product Construction 1. Measurement for payment at the unit price for manholes shall include manhole bases, subgrade preparation, foundation, risers, frame and cover, inverts, pipe connections, joints, steps and backfill. 2. Unit price bid for other precast concrete structures shall include subgrade preparation, foundation, structure, cover, inverts, pipe connections, and backfill. F. Valves: The unit price bid for valves shall include the cost of providing the valve, extension stem, valve box, valve marker, and all related items. G. Infiltrator Chambers: The unit price bid for infiltrator chambers shall include all cost for labor, materials and equipment required install the septic field. No separate payment shall be made for hand holes and inspection ports as indicated on the Drawings. All costs for coordination with and final approvals by the County Health Department shall be shall be included in the unit price bid for Infiltrator Chambers. H. Clean-up and Testing: Payment for clean-up and testing shall be made at the unit price shown for clean-up and testing. Any other cost for labor, materials and equipment required for clean-up shall be included in the unit price bid for the item to which it pertains. No payment for clean-up and testing shall be made for any length of line unless both testing and clean-up have been performed satisfactorily for that segment of line for which payment is being requested. \ Aerobic Treatment Unit (A TU): The unit price bid for Aerobic Treatment Unit (A TU) shall include all cost for labor, materials and equipment required for install. No separate payment shall be made for compressor and electrical work as indicated on the Drawings. All costs for coordination with and final approvals by the County Health Department shall be included in the unit price bid for Aerobic Treatment Unit. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC01 025 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 01025-11 Measurement and Payment B. All costs for constructing the Gravel Pavement as shown on the drawings and as specified from the bottom of the compacted subgrade to the top of the graded aggregate surface shall be included in the unit price bid for Gravel Pavement. C. All costs for constructing the Concrete Pavement as shown on the drawings and as specified from the bottom of the compacted subgrade to the top of the concrete surface shall be included in the unit price bid for Concrete Pavement. All costs shall include, but are not limited to, clearing and grubbing, earthwork, subgrade preparation, materials, jointing, finishing, curing and backfill. D. All costs for constructing the Concrete Sidewalk as shown on the drawings and as specified from the bottom of the compacted subgrade to the top of the concrete surface shall be included in the unit price bid for Concrete Sidewalk. All costs shall include, but are not limited to, clearing and grubbing, earthwork, subgrade preparation, materials, jointing, finishing, curing and backfill. E. 24-lnch Curb & Gutter: 1. All costs for curb & gutter, including soil grading, and materials, placement, finishing, joints and curing of concrete, for the full width shall be included in the unit price bid for 24-lnch Curb & Gutter. Measurement shall be made of actual quantity constructed, which had been authorized by the Engineer. 2. No separate payment will be made for removal and replacement of curb and gutter damaged prior to Substantial Completion. F. No additional payment will be made for thicknesses greater than the thickness specified for each type of pavement. G. No additional payment will be made for preparation of the subgrade. H. No additional payment will be made for repair to existing pavements to remain as damaged by the Contractor. No additional payment will be made for traffic control measures. No additional payment will be made for replacement of work as deemed by the Engineer to be not consistent with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. l. Payment for materials testing shall be made from the appropriate item in the cash allowance. No payments shall be made for tests that fail to verify required results. J. Payment for striping and signage for shall be included in the unit price bid for Asphalt Pavement. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC01 025 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 01025 -13 Measurement and Payment K. Crane System: All costs for providing and installing an Ace Industries 10-ton, top running girder crane including the runway system as shown on the drawings. Bridge shall have 40-foot span with variable frequency 1.5 (two) horsepower motors enabling bridge speed of 100FPM. Trolley shall be 2-speed with 1/2-1/6 horsepower motor enabling speed of 50/16.7 FPM. The hoist shall be model number C3M10-025S20-2. Controls should include a radio controller. Load test will be required prior to completion. END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC01 025 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part 1 1.01 1.02 1.03 General Section 01026 Schedule of Values Scope The work under this Section includes preparation and submittal of a schedule of values. General A. Timing of Submittal: Submit to the Engineer, a schedule of values allocated to the various portions of the Work, within 10 days after Notice to Proceed. The first progress payment will not be made until the next pay cycle following the Engineer's approval of the Contractor's values. B. Supporting Data: Upon request of the Engineer, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. C. Use of Schedule: The schedule of values, unless objected to by the Engineer, shall be used only as a basis of the Contractor's Application for Payment. Form and Content of Schedule of Values A. Form and Identification 1. Type schedule on 8-1/2 x 11-inch white pap~r. 2. Contractor's standard forms and automated printout may be used. 3. Identify schedule with: a. Title of project and location b. Engineer c. Name and address of Contractor d. Contract designation e. Date of submission B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. Breakdown shall be by structure, then by CSI Format, for ease of field verification of quantities completed in each structure. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 01 041 Coordination Of Work Part 1 General 1.01 General Management of the project shall be through the use of a logical method of construction planning, scheduling, and cost value documentation as further described in the section entitled "Construction Scheduling," of these Specifications. 1.02 Existing Landfill Facilities A. The existing facilities at the Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill including the existing scales, scale house and administration building must out of necessity remain in operation while new construction is in progress. B. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with the Owner so that construction will . not restrain or hinder operation of the existing facilities at the Landfill. If, at any time, any portion of the Landfill is out of service, the Contractor must obtain prior approval from the Owner as to the date, time and length of time that portion of the existing facilities are out of service. C. Connections to the existing facilities or alteration of existing facilities will be made at times when the facility involved is not in use or at times, established by the Owner, when use of the facility can be conveniently interrupted for the period of time needed to make the connection or alteration. D. After having coordinated his work with the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the time, time limits and methods of each connection or alteration and have approval of the Engineer before any work is undertaken on the connections or alterations. E. Before any roadway or facilities are blocked off the Owner shall be contacted to coordinate operations for the landfill. 1.03 Other Utilities The Contractor shall coordinate his operations with all utility companies in or adjacent to the area of his work. The Contractor shall require said utilities to identify in the field their property and provide drawings a~ necessary to locate them. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 041 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part 1 General Section 01 055 Construction Staking 1.01 Scope A. Construction staking shall include all of the surveying work required to layout the Work and control the location of the finished Project. The Contractor shall have the full responsibility for constructing the Project to the correct horizontal and vertical alignment, as shown on the Drawings, as specified, or as ordE?red by the Engineer. The Contractor shall assume all costs associated with rectifying work constructed in the wrong location. B. From the information shown on the Drawings and the information to be provided as indicated under Project Conditions below, the Contractor shall: 1. Be responsible for setting reference points and/or offsets, establishment of. baselines, and all other iayout, staking, and all other surveying required for the construction of the Project. 2. Safeguard all reference points, stakes, grade marks, horizontal and vertical control points, and shall bear the cost of re-establishing same if disturbed. 3. Stake out the permanent and temporary easements or the limits of construction to ensure that the Work is not deviating from the indicated limits. 4. Be responsible for all damage done to reference points, baselines, center lines and temporary bench marks, and shall be responsible for the cost of re-establishment of reference points, baselines, center lines and temporary bench marks as a result of the operations. C. Baselines shall be defined as the line to which the location of the Work is referenced, i.e., edge of pavement, road centerline, property line, right-of-way or survey line. D. Record Drawing surveys shall be performed in accordance with Section 01720 of these Specifications. 1.02 Project Conditions A. The Drawings provide the location and/or coordinates of principal components of the Project. The alignment of some components of the Project may be indicated in the Specifications. The Engineer may order changes to the location of some of the components of the Project or provide clarification to questions regarding the correct alignment. B. The survey points, control points, and baseline to be provided to the Contractor shall be limited to only that information which can be found on the Project site by the Contractor. C. A topographic survey is included on the Drawings. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01055 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part 1 General 1.01 Description Permits and Responsibilities Section 01060 Regulatory Requirements The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner, be responsible for obtaining any necessary licenses and permits, and for complying with any applicable Federal, State and municipal laws, Codes and regulations, in connection with the execution of the Work. He shall take proper safety and health precautions to protect the Work, the workers the public and the property of others. He shall also be responsible for all materials delivered and work performed until completion and acceptance of the Work, except for any completed unit of construction thereof which may heretofore have been accepted. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01060 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part 1 1.01 1.02 General General Section 01070 Abbreviations, Symbols, Trade Names, and Materials Whenever reference is made to the furnishing of materials or testing thereof to conform to the Standards of any technical society, organization, or body, it shall be construed to mean the latest Standard, Code, specification or tentative specification adopted and published at the time of advertisement for bids. Such standards are made a part hereof to the extent which is indicated or intended. Abbreviations AA AAMA AASHTO ACI ACPA AEIC AFBMA AGA AGMA AlA AlEE AlSO AISI AITC ANSI AMCA APA APHA API. APWA ASA ASCE ASHRAE ASME ASTM AWS AWWA CFR CRSI CTI DEMA EDA Aluminum Association Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials American Concrete Institute American Concrete Pipe Association Association of Edison Illuminating Companies Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association American Gas Association American Gear Manufacturers Association American Institute of Architects American Institute of Electrical Engineers American Institute of Steel Construction American Iron and Steel Institute American Institute of Timber Construction American National Standards Institute Air Moving and Conditioning Association American Plywood Association American Public Health Association American Petroleum Institute American Public Works Association American Standards Association American Society of Civil Engineers American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society for Testing and Materials American Welding Society American Water Works Association Code of Federal Regulations Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Cooling Tower Institute Diesel Engine Manufacturers Association Economic Development Administration 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 070 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.01 Section 01080 ' Applicable Codes and Standards General A. All materials, equipment, fabrication, and installation practices shall comply with the following applicable Codes and standards, except in those cases where the Contractor's quality standards establish more stringent quality requirements, as determined by the Engineer. 1. Pressure Piping and Tubing ANSI (American National Standards Institute) API (American Petroleum Institute) ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) AWWA (American Water Works Association) NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) 2. Materials AASHTO (American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials) ANSI (American National Standards Institute) . ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 3. Painting and Surface Preparation NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) 4. Gear Reducers and Bearings AFBMA (Anti-friction Bearing Manufacturers Association) AGMA (American Gear Manufacturers Association) 5. Ventilating Fans AMCA (Air Moving and Conditioning Association) PFMA (Power Fan Manufacturers Association) 6. Electrical and Instrumentation EIA (Electronic Industries Association) IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) IPC (Institute of Printed Circuits) IPCEA (Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association) ISA (Instrument Society of America) NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 080 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 01080 - 3 Applicable Codes and Standards 16. Refrigeration, Heating, and Air Conditioning ARI (American Refrigeration Institute) ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers) 17. Pressure Vessels ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) In addition, all work shall comply with the applicable requirements of local codes, utilities, and other authorities having jurisdiction. B. All material and equipment, for which a UL Standard, an AGA approval, or an ASME requirement is established, shall be so approved and labeled or stamped. Label or stamp shall be conspicuous arid not covered, painted, or otherwise obscured from visual inspection. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 080 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 01201 Preconstruction Conference Part 1 General 1.01 Description After award of Bid and prior to beginning construction, a conference will be held with representativE3s of the Contractor, Owner, Engineer, and the affected utility companies to discuss schedules and utility conflicts in the Project. This conference is intended to establish lines of communication between the parties involved. Time and place of preconstruction conference will be determined at time of bid award. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01201 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 01202 Progress Meetings Part 1 General 1.01 Description The Owner may request meetings with the Contractor at any time on matters pertaining to the progress of Work being carried out under this Contract. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to supply whatever information is requested by the Owner concerning the project throughout its duration. Weekly reviews of progress shall be held between the Contractor and Engineer. Monthly reviews of progress shall be held between the Owner and Engineer. The Contractor shall make himself available if his presence is requested. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01202 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 01310 Construction Scheduling Part 1 General 1.01 Description The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval construction planning, scheduling, and cost value documentation pertaining to the project as detailed herein and shall update same throughout proiect as required. 1.02 Submittal Procedures A. Within ten working days of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the products required by this section of the Specifications. B. Within five working days following receipt of same the Engineer shall arrange for a meeting with the Contractor so as to familiarize the Engineer with the Contractor's proposed construction plans and schedules. C. Within five working days following the Engineer's review the Contractor shall resubmit a corrected copy of those documents requiring revision. D. Within five working days following his receipt of the adequately revised documents the Engineer will approve same for use on the project. E. Once approved, the Contractor shall submit four copies of the construction scheduling documents to the Engineer for use on the project. F. The Contractor shall update the work schedules at least monthly and indicate those activities whose completion dates are in jeopardy because of activities behind schedule. G. The Owner may require the Contractor to modify any portions of the work schedule that become infeasible because of "activities behind schedule" or for any other valid reason. Any such modification will be at the Contractor's expense unless the modification is required to accommodate schedule revisions required by the Owner. H. An activity that cannot be completed by its original latest completion date shall be deemed to be behind schedule. 1.03 Change Orders Upon approval of a Change Order by the Owner the approved change shall be reflected in the next submittal by the Contractor. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0131 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.04 2.05 01310-3 Construction Scheduling 1. Project Name 2. Contractor 3. Type of Tabulation (Initial or Updated with revision number) 4. Project Duration 5. Project Scheduled Completion Date 6. Effective or Starting Date of the Schedule 7. If an updated (revised) schedule, the new project completion date and project status Schedule Monitoring A. When specifically requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a revised schedule for those activities that remain to occur. B. The revised schedule shall be submitted in the form, sequence, and of the number of copies requested for the initial schedule. Cost Value for Activities A. The Contractor shall establish and submit a cost value for each activity in his progress schedule and estimates so that monthly partial payments to the Contractor can be calculated on the basis of work in place. B. Subject to the provisions for 'Payments to Contractor and Completion" in the General Conditions of the Contract all cost value reports for network activities shall be based upon the close of books as of the 25th day of each month, and the submittal of such costs value for activities shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval not later than the last day of each month. C. Wherever in the General Conditions it is provided that payments will be allowed for materials delivered to the site but not yet incorporated in the work, subject to the terms and conditions specified in the General Conditions, separate pay items shall be established for furnishing and installation of such items. D. Costs of materials delivered to the site but not yet incorporated into the work shall be included as a separate pay item and shall not be included in the cost value of the installation activity for such materials. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01310 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 01320 Construction Videos and Photographs Part 1 General . 1.01 Scope A. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and labor materials required to provide the Owner with digital construction videos and photographs of the Project. Videos shall be . in both VHS format and recorded on a compact disk, in DVD format. B. Photo and video files shall become the property of the Owner and none of the videos or photographs herein shall be published without express permission of the Owner. 1.02 Pre and Post Construction Videos and Photographs A. Prior to the beginning of any work, the Contractor shall take project videos and photographs of the work area to record existing conditions. B. Following completion of the work, another recording and photos shall be made showing the same areas and features as in the pre-construction videos and photographs. C. All conditions which might later be subject to disagreement shall be shown in sufficient detail to provide a basis for decisions. D. The pre-construction videos and photographs shall be submitted to the Engineer within 25 calendar days after the date of receipt by the Contractor of Notice to Proceed. Post-construction videos and photographs shall be provided prior to final acceptance of the project. 1.03 Progress Photographs A. Photo files shall be provided on compact discs. B. The photographs shall include the date and time marking of the recording. All photographs shall be labeled on a tab connected to the bottom of the photo to indicate date and description of work shown. C. A minimum of ten photographs shall be submitted with each request for payment. The view selection will be as agreed to with the Engineer. Two prints of each photograph shall be submitted. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01320 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part 1. 1.01 Section 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples General Description and Requirements A. Type of Submittals This Section of the specifications describes the procedures for submittals such as shop drawings, product data, samples and miscellaneous work-related submittals. It does not include the submittals required for administrative work. B. Submittal Contents The submittal contents required are specified in each section. C. Definitions Submittals are categorized as follows: 1. Shop Drawings a. Shop drawings shall include technical data, drawings, diagrams, performance curves, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculation, instructions, measurements and similar information as applicable to specific item for which the shop drawing is prepared. b. Provide newly-prepared information, on reproducible sheets, with graphic information at accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated) or appropriate number of prints hereof, with name or preparer (firm name) indicated. The Contract Drawings shall not be traced or reproduced by any method for use as or in lieu of detail shop drawings. Show dimensions and note which are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in the work shown. Indicate compliance with standards and special coordination requirements. Do not allow shop drawing copies without appropriate final "Action" markings by the Engineer to be used in connection with the Work. 2. Product Data a. Product data includes standard printed information on materials, products and systems, not specially prepared for this project, other than the designation of selections from among available choices printed therein. b. Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system, and mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XCO 1340 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 01340 - 3 Shop Drawings, Product Data, And Samples B. Coordination of Submittal Times Prepare and transmit each submittal to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of performing related work or other applicable activities, so the installation will not be delayed or improperly sequenced by processing times, including non-approval and resubmittal (if required). Coordinate with other submittals, testing, purchasing, delivery and similar sequenced activities. No extension of time will be authorized because of Contractors failure to transmit submittals to the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the work. C. Sequencing Requirements As applicable in each instance, do not proceed with a unit of work until submittal procedures have been sequenced with related units of work, in a manner which will ensure that the action will not need to be later modified or rescinded by reason of a subsequent submittal which should have been processed earlier or concurrently for coordination. D. Preparation of Submittals Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor, subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other subniittals. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and provide space for the Engineer's "Action" marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are received from sources other than through the Contractor's office will be returned "without action." E. Transmittal Identification 1. Number transmittals in sequence for each Division of the Specifications. The number after the dash indicates the Section of the Specifications, and the number before the dash is the sequence number of the transmittal (1-1 5140 would be the first transmittal applicable to Section 15140 of the Specifications, 2-15140 would be the second transmittal for Section 15140, etc.) 2. Identify resubmittals with a letter of the alphabet following the original number, using A for the first resubmittal, B for the second resubmittal, etc. A resubmittal affecting transmittal 1-1 5140 would than be numbered 1A-15140. The number 1-1 5140 would then be entered in the space 'Previous Transmittal Number," which is left blank except on resubmittals. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01340 I 1 I I I I I I 1 I. I I I I I I I I I 01340 - 5 Shop Drawings, Product Data, And Samples m. Submittal sheets or drawings showing more than the particular item under consideration shall have all but the pertinent description of the item for which review is requested crossed out. 1.05 Routing of Submittals A. Submittals and routine correspondence shall be routed as follows: 1. Supplier to Contractor (through representative if applicable) for preliminary check. 2. Contractor to Consulting Engineer for general review or comment. 3. Consulting Engineer to Contractor. 4. Contractor to Supplier. 1.06 Address for Communications Augusta-Richmond County Deans Bridge Road MSW Landfill 4330 Deans Bridge Road Augusta, GA 30805 1.07 Submittal Copies Required A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Miscellaneous Submittals All submittals marked "A" or "B" will be distributed as follows: 1. For Owner's Project Manager 1 copy 2. For Contractor 3. cppies 3. For Field Inspection Office 1 copy 4. For Owner 1 copy Total 6 copies B. To the above number may be added additional copies as required by the Contractor. C. The Engineer will mark all copies of each shop drawing. One will be retained in the Engineer's office, one sent to the Field Inspection office, one will be retained for the Owner and the remaining copies sent to the Contractor for his records and distribution. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01340 I I 1 I 1 I 1 I I I I I I 1 1 1 I I I 01340 - 7 Shop Drawings, Product Data, And Samples 2. Final-But-Restricted Release Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations and corrections on submittal and with contract documents, when submittal is returned with the following: Marking: liB" - Make Corrections Noted. 3. Returned for Resubmittal Do not proceed with Work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking. Do not allow submittals with the following marking (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the work. Marking: "C" - Revise and resubmit. "0" - Rejected - Does Not Comply with Project Requirements. Only two copies of items marked "C" or "0" will be reviewed and marked. One coPY will be retained and the other copy with all remaining unmarked copies will be returned to the contractor for resubmittal. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01340 I I I I 1 1 I I 1 I I I 1 1 I I I I 1 Section 01500 Construction Facilities Part 1 General 1.01 Sanitary Facilities The Contractor will provide sufficient sanitary facilities in proximity to the areas of work for his employees and those employees of his subcontractors. The Contractor will be responsible for continual maintenance and servicing of these facilities. 1.02 First Aid Facilities The Contractor shall maintain at a well known place at the job site, all articles necessary for giving first aid to the injured, and shall make standing arrangements for the immediate removal to a hospital or a doctor's care of persons (including employees) who may be injured on the job site. In no case, shall employees be permitted to work at a job site before the employer has made a standing arrangement (verified in writing to the Owner) for removal of injured persons to a hospital or a doctor's care. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01500 I 1 1 I I I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 I I 1 I Section 01510 Temporary Utilities Part 1 General 1.01 Temporary Light The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting facilities for the proper prosecution and inspection of the work. These facilities shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor and shall be located in such a manner as to result in the least interference with work upon the project site and existing facilities. 1.02 Temporary Power The Contractor shall provide temporary power facilities required for the proper prosecution and inspection of the work. These facilities shall be installed and maintained by the Contractor, and shall be located in such a manner as to result in the least interference with work upon the project site and existing facilities. Temporary power facilities shall remain in place after completion of construction until final acceptance of the work. After final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall remove temporary power facilities. 1.03 Temporary Water The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for securing and transporting all water required in the construction, including water required for earthwork, mixing of concrete, sprinkling, testing, flushing, flooding or jetting and including any temporary pipeline or equipment which may be necessary to make use of such water. 1.04 Potable Water The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing a supply of potable drinking water for employees, subcontractors, inspectors, Engineers and the Owner who are associated with the work progress. 1.05 Temporary Telephone Service Provide and pay for monthly telephone service, for the duration of the project, at the Contractor's field office and at the Engineer's field office as specified. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0151 0 I I I I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I 1 I I I Section 01540 . Job Site Security Part 1 General 1.01 Barricades, Light, and Watchmen A. The Contractor shall furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights, and danger signals, shall provide such watchmen, and shall provide such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and of the work as are necessary. Barricades shall be painted in a color that will be visible at night. From sunset to sunrise, the Contractor shall furnish and maintain at least one light at each barricade and sufficient numbers of barricades shall be erected to keep vehicles from being driven on or into any work under construction. The Contractor shall furnish watchmen in sufficient numbers to protect the work. B. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, lights, and watchmen to protect it arid whenever evidence is found of such damage, the Contractor shall immediately remove the damaged portion and replace it at his cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights, and for providing watchmen shall not cease until the project has been accepted by the Owner. C. All job site. security shall be coordinated with the Owner's landfill security procedures. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01540 1 I I 1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 I I I 1 I Section 01562 Dust Control Part 1 General 1.01 Description Limit blowing dust caused by construction operations by applying water or employing other appropriate means or methods to maintain dust control. 1.02 Protection of Adjacent Property The bidders shall visit the site and note the buildings, landscaping, roads, parking areas and other facilities near the work site that may be damaged by their operations. The Contractor shall make adequate provision to fully protect the surrounding area and will be held fully responsible for all damages resulting from his operations. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01562 I 1 I 1 I I I 1 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 I I I I Section 01590 Field Offices Part 1 General 1.01 Engineer's Field Office A. The Contractor shall provide and equip an Engineer's office space (prefabricated . building or mobile trailer), properly weatherproofed, skirted, and adequately anchored against 100 mile per hour gusts and winds. The office building shall be located on the project site and shall be in the vicinity of the Contractor's offices and buildings. Engineer's office space may be provided in a separate locked room within the same building as the Contractor's office. B. The office shall contain a minimum of 300 square feet of floor space. C. Walls, ceilings, and floors shall be adequately insulated. D. Interior finishes shall be manufacturer's standard, subject to approval. E. The office building shall be adequately wired for electricity in accordance with applicable Codes to handle the total lighting, air conditioning, and other loads. Lighting fixtures, in adequate numbers, shall be installed to give an illumination of 150 foot candles average and minimum glare. Fluorescent lamp fixtures with minimum 45 degrees shielding will be required. F. 11 O-volt convenience outlets, and 220-volt grounded wall outlets. G. Air conditioning and heating combination unit to maintain 78 OF inside in winter with outside air temperature of 20 OF and 72 OF inside in summer with the outside air temperature of 100 OF. H. Telephone with telephone service and jacks. Contractor is responsible for paying monthly phone 'bill for service including long distance as necessary for the Engineer's site representative. I. Fax machine with a dedicated telephone line and paper supply for duration of the project. Contractor is responsible for paying monthly bill for phone service including long distance for the Engineer's site representative. J. Awnings over windows and entrance stoops are required. K. Photo copying machine supplied with paper for duration of project. L. Venetian type blinds shall be installed on all windows. M. Windows and outside entrance doors shall be properly screened. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01590 I I 1 I I I 1 1 1 1 I 1 I I 1 I 1 I I Section 01610 Transportation and Handling 1.01 General The Contractor shall provide transportation of all equipment, materials, and products furnished under these Contract Documents to the site of the work. In addition, the Contractor shall provide preparation for shipment and storage, unloading, handling and rehandling, short-term storage, extended storage, storage facilities, maintenance and protection during storage, preparation for installation, and all other work and incidental items necessary or convenient to the Contractor . for the satisfactory prosecution and completion of the work. 1.02 Transportation A. All equipment shall be suitably boxed, crated, or otherwise protected during transportation. B. All equipment shall be shipped and delivered in the largest assembled sections practical or permitted by carrier .regulations to minimize the number of field connections. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the equipment is assembled and transported in such a manner so as to clear buildings, power lines, bridges, and similar structures encountered during shipment or delivery to the site of the work. D. Small items and appurtenances such as gauges, valves, switches, instruments, and probes which could be damaged during shipment shall be removed from the equipment prior to shipment and packaged and shipped separately. All openings shall be plugged or sealed to prevent the entrance of water or dirt. E. Temporary shipping braces and supports shall be painted orange or yellow for easy identification. 1.03 Handling A. All equipment, materials, and products shall be carefully handled to prevent damage or excessive deflections during unloading or transportation. All equipment, materials, and products damaged during transportation or . handling shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner prior to being incorporated into the work. B. Lifting and handling drawings and instructions furnished by the manufacturer or supplier shall be strictly followed. Eyebolts or lifting Lugs furnished on the equipment shall be used in handling the equipment. Shafts and operating mechanisms shall not be used as lifting points. Spreader bars or lifting beams shall be used when the distance between lifting points exceeds that permitted by 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0161 0 I I I I I I I .1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 I I I 1 Section 01620 Storage and Protection 1.01 General Equipment shall be received, inspected, unloaded, handled, stored, maintained, and protected by the Contr~ctor in a suitable location on or off site, if necessary, until such time as installation is required. 1.02 Storage A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing satisfactory storage facilities which are acceptable to the Engineer. In the event that satisfactory facilities cannot be provided on site, satisfactory warehouse acceptable to the Engineer will be provided by the Contractor for such time until the equipment, materials, and products can be accommodated at the site. B. Equipment; materials, and products which are stored in a satisfactory warehouse acceptable to the Engineer will be eligible for progress payments as though they had been delivered to the job site. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and protection of all equipment, materials, and products placed in storage and shall bear all costs of storage, preparation for transportation, transportation, rehandling, and preparation for installation. D. Equipment and products stored outdoors shall be supported above the ground on suitable wooden blocks or braces arranged to prevent excessive deflection or bending between supports. Items such as pipe, structural steel, and sheet construction products shall be stored with one end elevated to facilitate drainage.. E. Tarps and other coverings shall be supported above the stored equipment or materials on wooden strips to provide ventilation under the cover and minimize condensation. Tarps and covers shall be arranged to prevent ponding of water. F. Fuels shall be properly stored and handled in accordance with all applicable state and federal requirements. Fuels shall be stored and handled in a manner to minimize fire hazards and spills. Containment areas shall be provided for the storage and use of all fuels, oils, and hydraulic fluids. Contractor shall utilize good housekeeping practices at all times. The Contractor shall be responsible for all clean up and proper disposal of spills and contaminated soils. Any damages to or contamination of existing monitoring system shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractor to correct.. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01620 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I 1 I I I 01630 - 2 Substitutions and Options incorporate the other listed manufacturer's product in the work. This includes any architectural, structural, mechanical, piping, electrical, or other modifications required and the cost of additional engineering required to accommodate the product selected by the Bidder. The Contractor, after receiving the Notice to Proceed, shall submit shop drawings on the other listed manufacturer's product for the Engineer's review. If the manufacturer of this product is required to be named in the Bid, no deviation from that manufacturer named in the Bid is allowed unless directed by the Owner. 2. Whenever a product is specified with the term "equal to" preceding the list of approved manufacturers, in Divisions 2 through 16 of the Specifications, substitute products will be considered. It is the bidder's responsibility to verify that the substitute product will fit in the space allowed, perform the same functions, and have the same capabilities as the item specified. The substitute product shall not result in any additional costs to the Owner whether for accessory items; for architectural, structural, mechanical, piping, electrical or the other modifications to the work; or for engineering work required to accommodate the substitute product. The Contractor, after receiving notice to proceed, shall submit shop drawings on the substitute product for the Engineer's review. If the manufacturer of this product is required to be named in the Bid, no deviation from that manufacturer named in the Bid is allowed unless directed by the Owner. 3. Approval of the Engineer is dependent on determination that the product offered is essentially equal in function, performance, quality of manufacture, ease of maintenance, reliability, service life and other criteria to that on which the design is based and will require no major modifications to structures, electrical systems, control systems or piping systems. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01630 I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I 1 1 I I I 1 I 1 Section 01710 Cleanup Part 1 General 1.01 Description This section covers general cleaning which the Contractor shall be required to perform both during construction and before final acceptance of the project unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere in these specifications. 1.02 Hazard Control A. The Contractor shall store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. B. The Contractor shall prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. C. Burning or burying rubbish and waste materials on the site shall not be allowed. D. Disposal of volatile wastes into sanitary or storm sewers shall not be allowed. E. Disposal of all hazardous or volatile wastes shall be in accordance with all State and Federal requirements. F. All construction equipment and support vehicles shall be in good condition and shall not leak hydraulic oils, motor oils, or fuels, If equipment leaks such environmentally hazardous liquids, the equipment will be removed from the work area and repaired and all contaminated soils or materials shall be removed and properly disposed of in accordance with State and Federal requirements. 1.03 Disposal of Surplus Materials A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, specified or directed, the Contractor shall dispose of all surplus excavated materials and materials and equipment from demolition, legally off the site, and shall provide his own suitable, off-site spoil area, or on a site designated by the Owner. B. The Owner shall have the opportunity to inspect any equipment or materials removed prior to disposal by the Contractor. If said equipment and/or materials are determined to be salvageable by the Owner, the Contractor shall transport said equipment and material to a building or area designated by the Owner. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0171 0 I I I I I 1 I I 1 I 1 I I I 1 I I I I Section 01740 Warranties and Bonds Part 1 General 1.01 Project Maintenance and Warranty A. Maintain and keep in good repair the improvements covered by these drawings and specifications during the life of the Contract. B. Indemnify the Owner against any repairs which may become necessary to any part of the work performed and to items of equipment and systems procured for or furnished under this Contract, arising from defective workmanship or materials used therein, for a period of one year after acceptance of the work is received from EPD allowing the Owner to accept the work for operations. C. The Contractor shall not be obligated to make replacements which become necessary because of ordinary wear and tear, or as a result of improper operation or maintenance, or as a result of improper work or damage by another Contractor or the Owner, or to perform any work which is normally performed by a maintenance crew during operation. D. In the event of multiple failures of major consequences prior to the expiration of the one-year warranty described above, the affected unit shall be disassembled, inspected, and modified or replaced as necessary to prevent further occurrences. All related components which may have been damaged or rendered non- serviceable as a consequence of the failure shall be replaced. A new twelve-month warranty against defective or deficient design, workmanship, and materials shall commence on the day that the item is reassembled and placed back into operation. As used herein, multiple failures shall be interpreted to mean two or more successive failures of the same kind in the same item. or failures of the same kind in two or more items. Major failures may include, but are not limited to, cracked or broken housings, piping, or vessels, excessive deflections, bent or broken shafts, broken or chipped gear teeth, premature bearing failure, excessive wear, or excessive leakage around seals. Failures which are directly and clearly traceable to operator abuse, such as operations in conflict with published operating procedures, or improper maintenance, such as substitution of unauthorized replacement parts, use of incorrect lubricants or chemicals, flagrant over- or under-lubrication, and using maintenance procedures not conforming with published maintenance instructions, shall be exempted from the scope of the one-year warranty. Should multiple failures occur in a given time, all products of the same size and type shall be disassembled, inspected, modified or replaced, as necessary and rewarranted for one year. E. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required and shall make such repairs and removals or shall perform such work or reconstruction as may be made necessary by any structural . or functional defect or failure resulting from neglect, faulty workmanship or faulty 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC017 40 I I 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I Part 1 . General Section 02010 Subsurface Conditions 1.01 Description A. Soil boring logs are shown in the subsurface reports entitled "Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation, Proposed Augusta Landfill Structures, Deans Bridge Road Landfill", dated February 22, 2006 by Geotechnical & Environmental. Consultants, Inc and "Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation, Augusta Landfill Structures, Deans Bridge Road Landfill", dated September 15, 2006 by Geotechnical & Environmental Consultants, Inc. This information may be obtained upon request at the offices of Atlantic Coast Consulting, Inc. B. This soil investigation information is offered as an aid in bidding only and is not a part of the Contract Documents. The boring logs are available for the Contractor's information, but are not a warranty of subsurface conditions. The Owner, Engineer and geotechnical engineer assume no responsibility for any variation between materials encountered during construction and those indicated on the boring logs, nor for any variation between the location of the water table encountered and that indicated on the boring logs at the date borings were taken. C. Additional Investigation: The Contractor shall visit the site and become acquainted with site conditions. Prior to bidding, prospective Contractors may make their own site and subsurface investigations to satisfy themselves with site and subsurface conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining rights of ingress and egress to private property for site and subsurface investigation and shall assume all responsibility for any damage to property caused as a result of the Contractor's investigation. D. Location of Borings: Contractors shall be responsible for making their own determination of the location of the soil borings on this Project. ENDOF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0201 0 I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I I I I I I Section 02060 Demolition of Existing Facilities Part 1 General 1.01 Scope The work in this Section consists of furnishing all material and equipment and performing all labor necessary for demolishing and disposing of designated facilities indicated on the Drawings. 1.02 Submittals The Contractor shall submit a written request, to include a detailed demolition procedure, to the Owner for approval at least 10 days before demolition is started. The demolition procedure shall include a detailed description of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of work. The demolition procedures shall provide for safe conduct of work, protection of the property, which is to remain undisturbed and coordination with other work or operation which may be in progress. Part 2 Products (Not Used) Part 3 Execution 3.01 Demolition A. All material shall be removed as necessary for construction, or in any event, to finish grades as shown on the Drawings. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing all existing service connections to the buildings or site and permanently plugging the pipes where required in accordance with requirements of the utility companies concerned. C. The Contractor will be responsible for any damage caused to other structures, and shall be held liable for any and all repairs, replacement of parts or renovations required to restore any structure, portion of structure, equipment or items, not intended for demolition. The Contractor shall restore any damaged facilities to their condition prior to demolition provided the damage was result of the demolition. If the Contractor does not repair any such damage immediately, or if the repairs are not suitable to the Owner, the Owner reserves the right to have such repairs made by another party and deduct the cost of required repairs from money due Contractor. D. Dust-tight, weathertight partitions shall be erected to protect existing facilities from dust and weather while wrecking is in progress and until such time as closures have been made. Partitions may be constructed of wood and shall have a covering of tarred roofing felt on the weather side. E. All salvageable metal materials shall remain the property of the Owner and shall be cleaned and stored on the Owner's property as directed by the Owner. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02060 I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I I Part 1 General (1 )Section 02100 Site Preparation 1.01 Scope A. This Section described materials and equipment to be utilized and requirements for their use in preparing the work site for construction. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment and labor necessary to complete the work. B. Comply with applicable codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and laws of local, municipal, state or federal authorities having jurisdiction. 1.02 Clearing and Grubbing A. Within the limits shown on the Drawings, the site will be cleared and grubbed to prepare for construction. B. Clearing 1. All vegetarian such as trees, shrubs, brush, logs, upturned stumps and roots of down trees, and other similar items shall be removed and disposed of properly by the Contractor as specified below. Cultivated growth shall be removed and trees felled as necessary within the construction work site and as indicated. 2. Where the tree limb structure interferes with utility wires, or where the trees to be felled are in close proximity to utility wires, the tree shall be taken down in sections to eliminate the possibility of damage to the appropriate utility. 3. All buildings, fences, lumber piles, trash and obstructions, except utility poles shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Any work pertaining to utility poles shall comply with the requirements of the appropriate utility. 4. All fences adjoining any excavation or embankment that may be damaged or buried shall be carefully removed, stored and replaced. C. All stumps, roots, foundations and planking embedded in the ground shall be removed and disposed of properly by the Contractor as specified below. Piling and butts of utility poles shall be removed to a minimum depth of two feet below the limits of excavation for structures, trenches and roadways or two feet below finish grade, whichever is lower. 1.03 Preliminary Grading Before beginning construction, the Contractor shall grade the entire work site to conform, in general, to the finish elevations shown on the Drawings. The Drawings show both existing contour elevations and finished contour elevations. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC021 00 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02100 - 3 Site Preparation 3.02 Clearing A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of work. B. Remove trees and shrubs within the area to be cleared. C. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil. 3.03 Disposal of Refuse A. The refuse resulting from the clearing and grubbing operation shall be hauled to a disposal site secured by the Contractor and shall be disposed of in accordance with all requirements of federal, state, county and municipal regulations. No debris of any kind shall be deposited in any stream or body of water, or in any street or alley. No debris shall be deposited upon any private property except with written consent of the property owner. In no case shall any material be left on the Project, shoved onto abutting private properties, or be buried in embankments or trenches on the Project. B. When approved in writing by the Engineer and when authorized by the proper authorities, the Contractor may dispose of such refuse by burning on the site of the Project provided all requirements set forth by the authorities are met. The authorization to burn shall not relieve the Contractor in any way from damages which may result from Contractor's operations. On easements through private property, the Contractor shall not burn on the site. END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC021 00 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 02125 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Part 1 General 1.01 Scope A. The work specified in this Section consists of providing and maintaining temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation controls as shown on the Drawings. This Section also specifies the subsequent removal of temporary erosion and sedimentation controls. B. Temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation controls include grassing and. mulching of disturbed areas and structural barriers at those locations which will ensure that erosion during construction will be maintained within acceptable limits. Acceptable limits are as established by the Georgia Erosion and Sedimentation Control Act of 1975, as amended, Section 402 of the Federal Clean Water Act, and applicable codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and laws of local and municipal authorities having jurisdiction. C. Land disturbance activity shall not commence until the Land Disturbance Permit has been issued. D. Land disturbance permit(s) for on-site construction shall be obtained and paid for by the Owner and issued in the name of the Owner. E. The Notice of Intent for the NPDES Storm Water Discharge for Construction Activities shall be prepared by and paid for by the Owner and issued in the name of the Owner. All inspection, monitoring and reporting activities associated with this permit shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Notice of Termination shall be prepared and submitted by the Owner. 1.02 Submittals A. Submit product data in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340 of these Specifications. B. Prior to any construction activity, the Contractor shall submit, for the Engineer's approval, a schedule for the accomplishment of temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control work. No work shall be started until the erosion and sedimentation control schedule and methods of operation have been approved by the Engineer. 1.03 Quality Assurance A. The temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures shown on the Drawings are minimum requirements. Any additional erosion and sedimentation control measures required by the Contractor's means, methods, techniques and sequence of operation will be installed by the Contractor and will be paid for according to the unit price bid for each control measure as approved by the Engineer. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02125 I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I .02125-3 Erosion and Sedimentation Control replacement of washed-out or undermined rip rap and erosion control materials, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 6, All fines imposed for improper erosion and sedimentation control shall be paid by the Contractor. Part 2 Products 2.01 Sediment Barrier A. Silt Fence 1. Type A silt fence shall meet the requirements of Section 171 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, latest edition. 2. Type C silt fence is a combination of Type A silt fence fabric with woven wire reinforcement. Type C silt fence woven wire reinforcement shall meet the requirements of Section 171 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, latest edition. 3. Silt fence fabric shall be an approved product on the Georgia DOT Qualified Product List No. 36, latest edition. B. Stone Check Dams: Stone shall conform to the requirements of Section 805.01 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specification, latest edition, for Stone Dumped Rip Rap except the stone shall be 8-inches or less at the greatest dimension. C. Hay Bales: Hay bales shall be clean, seed-free cereal hay, rectangular in shape and contain five cubic feet or more of material. 2.02 Construction Exit Stone Use sound, tough; durable stone resistant to the action of air and water. Slabby or shaley pieces will not be acceptable. Aggregate size shall be in accordance with the National Stone Association Size R~2 (1.5 to 3.5-inch stone) or Type 3 rip rap stone conforming to Section 805.01 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. . 2.03 Rip Rap A. Stone Rip Rap: Use sound, tough, durable stones resistant to the action of air and water. Slabby or shaley pieces will not be acceptable. Unless shown or specified otherwise, stone rip rap shall be Type 1. 1. Type 1 Rip Rap: Rip rap size shall conform to Section 805.01 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specification for Type 1 Stone Dumped Rip Rap. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02125 - 5 Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 3.01 General A. Temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures shall prevent erosion and prevent sediment from exiting the site. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor's temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are inadequate, the Contractor shall provide additional maintenance for existing measures or additional devices to control erosion and sedimentation on the site at the unit prices shown in Section 00300. B. All erosion and sedimentation control devices and structures shall be inspected by the Contractor at feast once a week and immediately prior to each rainfall occurrence. Any device or structure found to be damaged will be repaired or replaced by the end of the day. C. All erosion and sedimentation control measures and devices shall be constructed and maintained as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein until adequate permanent disturbed area stabilization has been provided and accepted by the Engineer. Once adequate permanent stabilization has been provided and accepted by the Engineer, all temporary erosion and sedimentation control structures and devices shall be removed. 3.02 Sediment Control A. Construction Exit 1. Construction exit(s) shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. A construction exit shall be located at any point traffic will be leaving a disturbed area to a public right-of-way, street, alley, sidewalk, or parking area. 2. Placement of Construction Exit Material: The ground surface upon which the construction exit material is to be placed shall be prepared to a smooth condition free from obstructions, depressions or debris. . The plastic filter fabric shall be placed to provide a minimum number of overlaps and a minimum width of one foot of overlap at each joint. The stone shall be placed with its top elevation conforming to the surrounding roadway elevations. The stone shall be dropped no more than three feet during construction. 3. Construction Exit Maintenance: The Contractor shall regularly maintain the exit with the top dressing of stone to prevent tracking or flow of soil onto public rights-of-way and paved surfaces as directed by the Engineer. 4. Construction Exit Removal: Construction exit(s) shall be removed and properly disposed of whem the disturbed area has been properly stabilized, the tracking or . flow of soil onto public rights-of-way or paved surfaces has ceased and as directed by the Engineer. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 02125 - 7 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 3. Preparation of Foundations: The ground surface upon which the rip rap is to be placed shall be brought to the correct lines and grades before placement is commenced. Where filling of depressions is required, the new material shall be compacted with hand or mechanical tampers. Unless at creek banks or otherwise shown or specified, rip rap shall begin in a toe ditch constructed in original ground around the toe of the fill or the cut slope. The toe ditch shall be two feet deep in original ground, and the side next to the fill or cut shall have that same slope. After the rip rap is placed, the toe ditch shall be backfilled and the excess dirt disposed of properly on-site as directed by the Engineer. 4. Placement of Plastic Filter Fabric a. Plastic filter fabric shall be placed under all rip rap unless shown or specified otherwise.. b. Filter fabric shall not be placed under rip rap on stream or drainage ditch crossings. c. The surface to receive filter fabric shall be prepared to a smooth condition free from obstructions, depressions and debris. The filter fabric shall be installed with the long dimension running up the slope and shall be placed to provide a minimum number of overlaps. The fabric shall be placed to provide a minimum width of one foot of overlap at each joint. The fabric shall be placed so that the upstream strip overlaps the downstream strip. The fabric 'shall be anchored in place with securing pins of the type recommended by the fabric manufacturer. Pins shall be placed on or within 3-inches of the centerline of the overlap. The fabric shall be placed loosely to avoid stretching and tearing during placement of the stone. The fabric shall be protected at all times during construction from clogging due to clay, silts, chemicals or other contaminants. Contaminated fabric or fabric damaged during installation or during placement of rip rap shall be removed and replaced with uncontaminated and undamaged fabric at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Placement of Rip Rap: Rip rap shall be placed on a 6-inch layer of soil, crushed stone or sand overlaying the filter fabric. Rip rap shall be placed with its top elevation conforming with the finished grade or the natural existing slope of the stream bank and stream bottom. The stone shall be dropped no more than three feet during construction. a. Stone Rip Rap: Stone rip rap shall be placed to provide a uniform surface to the thickness shown on the Drawings. The thickness tolerance for the course shall be -3-inches and +6-inches. B. Grassing 1. Grassing shall meet the requirements of Section 700 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, latest edition, unless specified otherwise. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02125 I I 1 I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I I 1 Part 1 General Section 02140 Dewatering 1.01 Scope A. This Section shaU apply to all excavation, except trench excavation. B. Construct all permanent work in areas free from water. Design, construct and maintain all wells, pumps, vacuum systems, sumps, dikes, levees, cofferdams and diversion and drainage channels as necessary to maintain the areas free from water and to protect the areas to be occupied by permanent work from water damage~ Remove temporary works after they have served their purpose. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all temporary and permanent slopes, grades, foundations, materials and structures during the course of the Contract. Repair and replace all slopes, grades, foundations, materials and structures damaged by water, both surface and subsurface, to the lines, grades and conditions existing prior to the damage, at no additional cost to the Owner. Part 2 Products (Not Used) Part 3 Execution 3.01 Care of Water A. Except where the excavated materials are designated as materials for permanent work, material from required excavation may be used for dikes, levees, cofferdams and other temporary backfill. B. Furnish, install, maintain and operate necessary pumping and other equipment for dewatering the various parts of the work and for maintaining the foundation and other parts free from water as required for constructing each part of the work. C. Install all drainage ditches, sumps and pumps to control excessive seepage on excavated slopes, to drain isolated zones with perched water tables and to drain impervious surfaces at final excavation elevation. D. Dewater by means which will insure dry excavations; preserve final lines and grades, do not disturb or displace adjacent soil. E. All pumping and drainage shall be done with no damage to property or structures and without interference with the rights of the public, owners of private property, pedestrians, vehicular traffic or the work of other contractors, and in accordance with all pertinent laws, ordinances and regulations. F. Do not overload or obstruct existing drainage facilities. G. After they have served their purpose, remove all temporary protective work at a satisfactory time and in a satisfactory manner. All diversion channels and other 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02140 I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 I 'I 1 1 I I I Section 02200 Earthwork Part 1 General 1.01 Scope A. This Section includes earthwork and related operations, including, but not limited to, clearing and grubbing the construction site, dewatering, excavating all classes of material encountered, pumping, draining and handling of water encountered in the excavations, handling, storage, transportation and disposal of all excavated and unsuitable material, construction of fills and embankments, backfilling around structures and pipe, backfilling all trenches and pits, compacting, all sheeting, shoring and bracing, preparation of subgrades, surfacing and grading, and any other similar, incidental, or appurtenant earthwork operation which may be necessary to properly complete the work. Excavation and backfill of pipe trenches is described in Section 02225 of these Specifications. B. The Contractor shall provide all services, labor, materials and equipment required for all earthwork and related operations necessary or convenient to the Contractor for furnishing complete Work as shown on the Drawings or specified in these Contract Documents. 1.02 General A. The elevations shown on the Drawings as existing are taken from the best existing data and are intended to give reasonably accurate information about the existing elevations. They are not precise and the Contractor shall become satisfied as to the exact quantities of excavation and fill required. B. Earthwork operations shall be performed in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions being taken against all hazards. c.. All excavated and filled areas for structures,.trenches, fills, topsoil areas, embankments and channels shall be maintained by the Contractor in good condition at all times until final acceptance by the Owner. All damage caused by erosion or other construction operations shall be repaired by the Contractor using material of the same type as the damaged material. D. Earthwork within the rights-of-way of the Department of Transportation, the County Road Department and the respective cities shall be done in accordance with requirements and provisions of the permits issued by those agencies for the construction within their respective rights-of-way. Such requirements and provisions, where applicable, shall take precedence and supersede the provisions of these Specifications. E. The Contractor shall control grading in a manner to prevent surface water from running into excavations. Obstruction of surface drainage shall be avoided and means shall be provided whereby storm water can be uninterrupted in existing gutters, other surface drains or temporary drains. Free access must be provided to all fire hydrants and meters. . 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02200 I 1 I 1 I I 1 I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I 1 02200 - 3 Earthwork 3. Imported Fill Materials: All imported fill material shall meet the requirements of on-site fill material. 4. Sand Cushions and Sand Fill: Sand cushions and sand fill shall consist of a sand-gravel fill of such gradation that 100 percent will pass a 3/8-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent by weight is lost by washing. 5. Coarse Aggregate or Crushed Stone: Coarse aggregate or crushed stone shall conform to the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction of Road and Bridges, 800.01 for No. 57 Stone, Group II and shall have the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 2-inch 1-1/2-inch 100 1-inch 95 - 100 1/2-inch 25 - 60 NO.4 0-10 No.8 0-5 . 6. Fine Aggregate: All fine aggregate shall conform to the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction of Road and Bridges, 801.01 and shall have the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing No.4 100 No. 16 25 - 75 No. 100 0- 25 7. Pea Gravel: Pea gravel shall be clean, naturally rounded aggregate, 1/8 to 314-inch in diameter per ASTM C 33. 8. Top Soil: Dark organic weed free loam, free of muck. B. Sheeting, Bracing and Timbering: The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain all sheeting, bracing and timbering required to properly support trenches and other excavations in open cut and to prevent all movement of the soil, pavement, structures or utilities outside of the trench or pit. 1. General a. Cofferdams and bracing design, including computations, shall be prepared before commencing construction operations. Drawings and design 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02200 I I I I I I 1 I I 1 1 I I I 1 1 I I 1 02200 - 5 Earthwork Part 3 Execution 3.01 General A. Safety: Comply with local regulations and with the provisions of the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., Occupational Safety and Health Act and all other applicable safety regulations. B. Topsoil 1. Remove all topsoil to a depth at which subsoil is encountered, from all areas under buildings, pavements, and from all areas which are to be cut to lower grades or filled. 2. With the Engineer's approval, topsoil to be used for finish grading may be stored on the site. 3. Other topsoil may be used for fill in non-critical areas with approval of the Engineer. 4. Properly dispose of all excess topsoil on site at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Bracing and Sheeting 1. Furnish,' put in place, and maintain all sheeting, bracing and shoring as may be required to properly support the sides of all excavations and to prevent all movement of earth which could in any way injure the work, adjacent property or workers. 2. Properly support all excavations in locations indicated on the Drawings and where necessary to conform to all pertinent rules and regulations and these Specifications, even though such locations are not indicated on the Drawings. 3. Exercise care in the removal of sheeting, shoring, bracing and timbering to prevent collapse or caving of the excavation faces being supported and damage to the work and adjacent property. 4. Do not leave any sheeting or bracing in the trench or excavation after completion of the work, unless approved by the Engineer. D.. Obstructions 1. Remove and dispose of all trees, stumps, roots, boulders, sidewalks, driveways, pavement, pipes and the like, as required for the performance of the work. 2. Exercise care in excavating around catch basins, inlets and manholes so as not to disturb or damage these structures. 3. Avoid removing or loosening castings or pushing dirt into catch basins, inlets and 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02200 I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I I I I I I 02200 - 7 Earthwork 5. Do not disturb or damage the adjacent pavement. If the adjacent pavement is disturbed or damaged, remove and replace the damaged pavement. No additional payment will be made for removing and replacing damaged adjacent pavement. 6. Remove and replace sidewalks disturbed by construction for their full width and to the nearest undisturbed joint. 7. The Contractor may tunnel under curbs that are encountered. Remove and replace any curb disturbed by construction to the nearest undisturbed joint. 3.02 Excavation A. Method 1. All excavation shall be by open cut from the surface except as indicated on the Drawings. 2. All excavations for pipe appurtenances and structures shall be made in such manner and to such depth and width as will give ample room for building the structures and for bracing, sheeting and supporting the sides of the excavation, for pumping and draining groundwater and wastewater which may be encountered, and for the removal from the excavation of all materials excavated. 3. Take special care so that the soil below the bottom of the structure to be built is left undisturbed. B. Grades 1. Excavate to grades indicated on the Drawings. 2. Where excavation grades are not indicated on the Drawings, excavate as required to accommodate installation. C. Disposal of Excavated Material 1. Remove and properly dispose of all excavated material not needed to complete filling, backfilling and grading. 2. Dispose of excavated material on site at locations approved by the Engineer and in accordance with all requirements of federal, state, county and municipal regulations. No debris of any kind shall be deposited in any stream or body of water, or on any street or alley. No debris shall be deposited on any private property except by written consent of the property owner. In no case shall any material be shoved onto abutting private properties or be buried in embankments or trenches on the Project. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02200 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I 02200 - 9 Earthwork 5. If excess excavation is made or the material becomes disturbed so as to require removal below final subgrade elevations or beyond the prescribed limits, the resulting space shall be refilled with Class "C" concrete in accordance with Section 03050 of these Specifications. C. Excavation for Foundations: Footings and slabs on grades shall rest on undisturbed earth, rock or compacted materials to insure proper bearing. 1. Unsuitable Foundation Material a. Any material in the opinion of the Engineer which is unsuitable for foundation shall be removed and replaced with compacted crushed stone, or with compacted fill material as directed by the Engineer. Crushed stone shall meet the requirements of the Georgia Department of Transportation Specification 800.01 for No. 57 stone. b. No determination of unsuitability will be made until all requirements for dewatering are satisfactorily met. c. Payment for removal and replacement of unsuitable material shall be made at the unit price bid. 2. Foundation in Rock: Foundations for a structure shall be on similar materials. Should excavation for a foundation be partially in. rock, the Contractor shall undercut that portion of the rock 12-inches and bring the excavation to grade with compacted crushed stone. . 3. Pipe Trenches Beneath Structures a. Where piping or conduit passes beneath footings or slabs resting on grade, trenches shall be excavated to provide a minimum of 6-inches clearance from all surfaces of the pipe or conduit. The trench shall be backfilled to the base of the structure with concrete. b. No separate payment will be made for concrete backfill of trenches beneath structures. The cost of this work and all costs incidental to it shall be included in the price bid for the item to which the work pertains. . 4. Unauthorized Excavation a. Care shall be taken that excavation does not extend below bottom levels of footings or slabs on earth or rock. Should the excavation, through carelessness or neglect, be carried below such levels, the Contractor shall fill in the resulting excess excavation with concrete under footings and compacted crushed stone or other approved material under slabs. Crushed stone or gravel shall meet the Georgia Department of Transportation Specification 800.01 for No. 57 stone. Should excavation be carried beyond outside lines of footings such excess excavation shall be filled with concrete, or formwork shall be provided, as directed by the Engineer. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02200 I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I I I 1 02200 - 11 Earthwork 3. Pneumatic-tired rollers shall have not fewer than four pneumatic tired wheels which shall be of such size and ply that tire pressures can be maintained between 80 and 100 pounds per square inch for 25,000 pound wheel load during rolling operations. Unless otherwise required, rolling shall be done with tires inflated to 90 psi. The roller wheels shall be located abreast in a rigid steel frame. Each wheel shall be loaded with an individual weight box so that each wheel will bear an equal load when traversing uneven ground. The weight boxes shall be suitable for ballast loading such that the load per wheel shall be 25,000 pounds. The spacing of the wheels shall insure that the distance between the nearest edges of adjacent tires shall be not greater than one-half of the tire width of a single tire at the operating pressure for a 25,000 pound wheel load. The roller shall be operated no faster than 10 miles per hour. 4. Subgrade shall be proofrolled with six passes of the truck or roller. Depressions that develop during the proofrolling operation shall be filled with suitable material and those filled areas shall be proofrolled with six passes of the roller. If, after having been filled and proofrolled, the subgrade still contains depressions, the area shall be undercut to the full depth of the soft material or five feet whichever is less, backfilled, recompacted, and rolled to achieve a subgrade acceptable to the E;ngineer. 5. After the proofrolled subgrade has been accepted by the Engineer, the surface of the subgrade shall be finish rolled with a smooth steel wheel roller weighing not less than 10 tons. Finished surface of the subgrade shall be within a tolerance of 1/4-inch at every point. . 6. Conduits, pipes, culverts and underdrains shall be neither disturbed nor damaged by proofrolling operations. Rollers shall neither pass over, nor approach closer than five feet to, conduits, pipes, culverts and underdrains unless the tops of those products are deeper than three feet. C. Placement 1. Prior to placement of any material in embankments, the area within embankment limits shall be stripped of topsoil and all unsuitable. materials removed as in accordance with this Section. The area shall then be scarified to a depth of at least 6-inches. 2. Fill materials shall be placed in continuous approximately horizontal layers extending the full width of the embankment cross-section and the full dimension of the excavation where practical and having a net compacted thickness of not over 6-inches. 3. Fill materials shall be placed at optimum moisture content within practicable limits (not less than one percent below optimum). Optimum moisture shall be maintained by sprinkling the layers as placed or by allowing materials to dry before placement. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02200 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 02200 -13 Earthwork G. Moisture 1. All fill shall be compacted with the moisture content as established by the 98 percent intercept on the moisture density curves or the moisture content at the shrinkage limit, whichever is less. 2. If fill material is too wet, provide and operate approved means to assist the drying of the fill until suitable for compaction. 3. If fill material is too dry, provide and operate approved means to add moisture to the fill layers. 3.05 Backfilling A. Backfill carefully to restore the ground surface to its original condition. Dispose of excess material in accordance with this Section. B. Compact backfill underlying roadways, parking areas, sidewalks, structures, and buildings as specified in Article 3.04 (0) of this Section. C. Backfill for Pipe 1. Initial: Place initial backfill material carefully around the pipe above bedding in uniform 6-inch layers to a depth of at least 18-inches above the pipe bell. Compact each layer thoroughly with suitable hand tools. Do not disturb or damage the pipe. Backfill on both sides of the pipe simultaneously to prevent side pressures. Initial backfill material is earth material excavated from the trench which is clean and free of rock, organics, and other unsuitable material. If materials excavated from the trench are not suitable for use as initial backfill material, obtain suitable materials elsewhere. 2. Final: After initial backfill material. has been placed and compacted, backfill with general excavated material. Place backfill material in uniform layers and . thoroughly compact with heavy power tamping tools of the "Wacker" type. 3. Settlement: If trenches settle, re-fill and grade the surface to conform to the adjacent surfaces. 4. Additional Material a. Utilize excess material excavated from the trench if the material is suitable. No additional payment will be made for additional material when excavated materials are used. b. If excess excavated materials are not suitable, or if the quantity available is not sufficient, provide suitable additional fill material. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02200 I 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 I I. I I I 1 1 1 I I 3.07 02200 -15 Earthwork f. Backfilling against walls shall take place after all the concrete in the affected members has attained the specified strengths. 2. Materials: Backfill material placed against structures built-or encountered during the work of this Section shall be suitable fill material. No broken concrete, bricks or similar materials will be permitted as backfill. D. Treatment After Completion of Grading 1. After grading is completed, permit no further excavation, filling or grading, except with the approval of the Engineer. 2. Use all means necessary to prevent the erosion of freshly graded areas during construction and until such time as permanent drainage and erosion control measures have been installed. Surface Water Control A. Regulations and Permits: Obtain all necessary soil erosion control permits in accordance with the Georgia Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Act and all pertinent rules, laws, and regulations of all applicable federal, state, county and municipal regulatory agencies. B. Unfavorable Weather 1. Do not place, spread or roll any fill material during unfavorable weather conditions. 2. Do not resume operations until moisture content and fill density are satisfactory to the Engineer. C. Provide berms or channels to prevent flooding of subgrade. Promptly remove all water collected in depressions. D. Pumping and Drainage 1. Provide, maintain and use at all times during construction adequate means and devices to promptly remove and dispose of all water from every source entering the excavations or other parts of the work. 2. Oewater by means which will insure dry excavations, preserve final lines and grades, do not disturb or displace adjacent soil. 3. All pumping and drainage shall be done with no damage to property or structures and without interference with the rights of the public, owners of private property, pedestrians, vehicular traffic or the work of other contractors, and in accordance with all pertinent laws, ordinances and regulations. 4. Do not overload or obstruct existing drainage facilities. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02200 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I 1 1 I I I 1 I 1 Section 02225 Trench Excavation and Backfill Part 1 General 1.01 Scope A. The work under this Section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials and performing all operations in connection with the trench excavation and backfill required to install the pipelines shown on the Drawings and as specified. B. Excavation shall include the removal of any trees, stumps, brush, debris or other obstacles which remain after the clearing and grubbing operations, which may obstruct the work, and the excavation and removal of all earth, rock or other materials to the extent necessary to install the pipe and appurtenances in conformance with the lines . and grades shown on the Drawings and as specified. C. Backfill shall include the refilling and compaction of the fill in the trenches and excavations up to the surrounding ground surface or road grade at crossing. D. The pipe zone area of the trench is divided into five specific areas: 1. Foundation: The area beneath the bedding, sometimes also referenced to as trench stabilization. 2. Bedding: The area above the trench bottom (or foundation) and below the bottom of the barrel of the pipe. 3. Haunching: The area above the bottom of the barrel of the pipe up to a specified height above the bottom of the barrel of the pipe. 4. Initial Backfill: The area above the haunching material and below a plane 18-inches above the top of the barrel of the pipe. 5. Final Backfill: The area above a plane 18-inches above the top of the barrel of the pipe. E. The choice of method, means, techniques and equipment rests with the Contractor. The Contractor shall select the method and equipment for trench excavation and backfill depending upon the type of material to be excavated and backfilled, the depth of excavation, the amount of space available for operation of equipment, storage of excavated material, proximity of man-made improvements to be protected, available easement or right-of-way and prevailing practice in the area. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Density: All references to "maximum dry density" shall mean the maximum dry density defined by the "Maximum Density-Optimum Moisture Test", ASTM 0 698. Determination of the density of foundation, bedding, haunching, or backfill materials in place shall meet with the requirements of ASTM 0 1556, "Density of Soil In Place by the Sand Cone Method", ASTM 02937, "Density of Soil In Place by the Drive-Cylinder 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02225 I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I I I 1 02225 - 3 Trench Excavation and Backfill D. Filter Fabric 1. Filter fabric associated with bedding shall be a polypropylene woven fabric. The fabric shall be a high modulus type with good separation capabilities. Thefabric shall be inert to biological degradation and naturally occurring chemicals, alkalies and acids. 2. The fabric shall have an equivalent opening size (EOS or AOS) of 20 to 45. The fabric shall also conform to the minimum property values listed in the following table: Fabric Property Unit Test Method Minimum Value Grab Tensile Strength Ibs. ASTM 04632 200 Grab Tensile Elongation % ASTM 0 4632 30 (max.) Mullen Burst Strength psi ASTM 0 3786 400 Trapezoid Tear Strength Ibs. ASTM 0 4533 75 Puncture Strength Ibs. ASTM 0 3787 75 3. If ordered by the Engineer, the filter fabric manufacturer shall furnish the services of a competent factory representative to supervise and/or inspect the installation of pipe. This service will be furnished for a minimum of 10 days during initial pipe installation. 4. Filter fabric shall be Propex 2002, Contech C200 or Mirafi 500X. 2.03 Initial Backfill A. Initial backfill material shall be crushed stone or earth materials as specified for bedding and haunching materials. B. Earth materials utilized for initial backfill shall be suitable materials selected from materials excavated from the trench. Suitable materials shall be clean and free of rock larger than 2-inches at its largest dimension, organics, Cinders, stumps, limbs, frozen earth or mud, man-made wastes and other unsuitable materials. Should the material excavated from the trench be saturated, the saturated material may be used as earth material, provided it is allowed to dry properly and it is capable of meeting the specified compaction requirements. When necessary, initial backfill materials shall be moistened to facilitate compaction by tamping. If materials excavated from the trench are not suitable for use as initial backfill material, provide select material conforming to the requirements of this Section. . 2.04 Final Backfill Final backfill material shall be general excavated earth materials, shall not contain rock larger than 2-inches atits greatest diameter, cinders, stumps, limbs, man-made wastes and other unsuitable materials. If materials excavated from the trench are not suitable 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02225 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 I I 02225 - 5 Trench Excavation and Backfill over-excavation, intentional over-excavation necessitated by the size of the Contractor's tamping and compaction equipment, intentional over-excavation due to the size of the Contractor's excavation equipment, or other reasons beyond the control of the Engineer or Owner. . D. Depth 1. The trenches shall be excavated to the required depth or elevation which allow for the placement of the pipe and bedding to the thickness shown on the Drawings. 2. Water Mains and Force Mains a. Depth of Trenches: Excavate trenches to provide depths as shown on the Drawings. The depth of cover shall not exceed that as shown on the Drawings by more than two feet, without approval of the Engineer. b. Increase the depth of cover where specifically shown on the Drawings and where necessary to avoid interference with underground utilities and obstructions. 3. Where rock is encountered in trenches, excavate to the minimum depth which will provide clearance below the pipe barrel of 8-inches for pipe 21-inches in diameter and smaller and 12-inches for larger pipe, valves and manholes. Remove boulders and stones to provide a minimum of 6-inches clearance between the rock and any part of the pipe, manhole or accessory. E. Excavated Materials 1. Excavated materials shall be placed adjacent to the work to be used for backfilling as required. Topsoil shall be carefully separated and lastly placed in its original location. 2; Excavated material shall be placed sufficiently back from the edge of the excavation to prevent caving of the trench wall, to permit safe access along the trench and not cause any drainage problems. Excavated material shall be placed so as not to damage existing landscape features or man-made improvements. 3.02 Sheeting, Bracing, and Shoring A. Sheeting, bracing, and shoring shall be performed in the following instances: 1. Where sloping of the trench walls does not adequately protect persons within the trench from slides or cave-ins. 2. In caving ground. 3. In wet, saturated, flowing or otherwise unstable materials. The sides of all trenches and excavations shall be adequately sheeted, braced and shored. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02225 1 I I I I I 'I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I 02225 - 7 Trench Excavation and Backfill 3.04 Dewatering Excavations A. Dewater excavation continuously to maintain a water level two feet below the bottom of the trench. B. Control drainage in the vicinity of excavation so the ground surface is properly pitched to prevent water running into the excavation. C. There shall be sufficient pumping equipment, in good working order, available at all times, to remove any water that accumulates in excavations. Where the pipe line crosses natural drainage channels, the work shall be conducted in such a manner that unnecessary damage or delays in the prosecution of the work will be prevented. Provision shall be made for the satisfactory disposal of surface water to prevent damage to public or private property. D. In all cases, accumulated water in the trench shall be removed before placing bedding or haunching, laying pipe, placing concrete or backfilling. E. Where dewatering is performed by pumping the water from a sump, crushed stone shall be used as the medium for conducting the water to the sump. Sump depth shall be at least two feet below the bottom of the trench. Pumping equipment shall be of sufficient quantity and/or capacity to maintain the water level in the sump two feet below the bottom of the trench. Pumps shall be a type such that intermittent flows can be discharged. A standby pump shall be required in the event the operating pump or pumps clog or otherwise stop operation. F. Dewater by use of a well point system when pumping from sumps does not lower the water level two feet below the trench bottom. Where soil conditions dictate, the Contractor shall construct well points cased in sand wicks. The casing, 6 to 10-inches in diameter, shall be jetted into the ground, followed by the installation of the well point, filling casing with sand and withdrawing the casing. 3.05 Trench Foundation and Stabilization A. The bottom of the trench shall provide a foundation to support the pipe and its specified bedding. The trench bottom shall be graded to support the pipe and bedding uniformly throughout its length and width. B. If, after dewatering as specified above, the trench bottom is spongy, or if the trench bottom does not provide firm, stable footing and the material at the bottom of the trench will still not adequately support the pipe, the trench will be determined to be unsuitable and the Engineer shall then authorize payment for trench stabilization. C. Should the undisturbed material encountered at the trench bottom constitute, in the opinion of the Engineer, an unstable foundation for the pipe, the Contractor shall be required to remove such unstable material and fill the trench to the proper subgrade with crushed stone. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02225 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02225 - 9 Trench Excavation and Backfill shall then be carefully placed by hand and compacted to provide full support under and up to the centerline of the pipe. 3. Class "C" (Bedding Factor - 1.5): Excavate the bottom of the trench flat at a minimum depth as shown on the Drawings, below the bottom of the pipe barrel. Place and compact bedding material to the proper grade. Haunching material shall then be carefully placed by hand and compacted to provide full support under and up to a height of one-fourth the outside diameter of the pipe above the bottom of the pipe barrel. 4. HOPE Pipe: Excavate the bottom of the trench flat at a minimum depth as shown on the Drawings, below the bottom of the pipe barrel. Place and compact bedding material to the proper grade. Haunching material shall be carefully placed by hand and compacted to provide full support under and up to 18-inches over the top of the pipe for pipe 42-inches in diameter and larger, and 12-inches over the top of the pipe for pipe 36-inches in diameter and smaller. 5. Type 5: Excavate the bottom of the trench flat at a minimum depth as shown on the Drawings, below the bottom of the pipe barrel. Place and compact bedding material to the proper grade before installing pipe. After the pipe has been brought to the proper grade, haunching material shall be carefully placed by hand and compacted to the top of the pipe. E. Manholes: Excavate to a minimum of 12-inches below the planned elevation of the base of the manhole. Place and compact crushed stone bedding material to the required gn3de before constructing the manhole. F. Water and Force Mains 1. Ductile Iron Pipe a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified, utilize earth materials for bedding and haunching. Type 2, 3, 4 and 5 bedding shall be as detailed on the Drawings. b. Unless specified or shown otherwise, bedding shall meet the requirements for Type 2 Pipe Bedding. Unless specified or shown otherwise for restrained joint pipe and fittings, bedding shall meet the requirements for Type 3 Pipe Bedding. c. Where the depth of cover over the piping exceeds 4 feet, the pipe bedding . shall meet the requirements of Type 4 Pipe Bedding. Where the depth of cover over the piping exceeds 10 feet, the pipe bedding shall meet the requirements of Type 5 Pipe Bedding. d. Type 4 or Type 5 Pipe Bedding called for on the Drawings, specified or ordered by the Engineer, shall meet requirements for Type 4 or Type 5 Pipe Bedding, utilizing crushed stone bedding and haunching material. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02225 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02225 - 11 Trench Excavation and Backfill A. Where concrete encasement is shown on the Drawings, excavate the trench to provide a minimum of 6-inches clearance from the bell of the pipe. Lay the pipe to. line and grade on concrete blocks. In lieu of bedding, haunching and initial backfill, place concrete to the full width of the trench and to a height of not less than 6-inches above the pipe bell. Do not backfill the trench for a period of at least 24 hours after concrete is placed. B. For pipes under structures, provide concrete backfill as specified in Section 02200. 3.09 Final Backfill A. Backfill carefully to restore the ground surface to its original condition. B. The top 6-inches shall be topsoil obtained as specified in Article 3.01 of this Section. C. Excavated material which is unsuitable for backfilling, and excess material, shall be disposed of, at no additional cost to the Owner, in a manner approved by the Engineer. Surplus soil may be neatly distributed and spread over the site, if approved by the Engineer. If such spreading is allowed, the site shall be left in a clean and sightly condition and shall not affect pre-construction drainage patterns. Surplus rock from the trenching operations shall be removed from the site. D. If materials excavated from the trench are not suitable for use as backfill materials, provide select backfill material conforming to the requirements of this Section. E. After initial backfill material has been placed and compacted, backfill with final backfill material. Place backfill material in uniform layers, compacting each layer thoroughly as follows: 1. In 6-inch layers, if using light power tamping equipment, such as a "jumping jack". 2. In 12-inch layers, if using heavy tamping equipment, such as hammer with tamping feet. 3. In 24-inch layers, if using a hydra-hammer. F. Settlement: If trench settles, re-fill and grade the surface to conform to the adjacent surfaces. G. Final backfill shall be compacted to a minimum 90 percent of the maximum dry density, unless specified otherwise. 3.10 Backfill Under Roads Compact backfill underlying pavement and sidewalks, and backfill under dirt and gravel roads to a minimum 95 percent of the maximum dry density. . The top 12-inches shall be compacted to a minimum of 98 percent of the maximum dry density. 3.11 Backfill Along Restrained Joint Pipe 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02225 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02225 -13 Trench Excavation and Backfill E. Comply with applicable codes, ordinances, rules, regulations and laws of local, municipal, state or federal authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02225 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I SECTION 02361 Termite Control PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil treatment with termiticide. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood preservative treatment by pressure process. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Service Life of Soil Treatment: Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For termiticide. 1. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. B. Product Certificates: For termite control products, signed by product manufacturer. C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located. B. Regulatory Requirements: Form'ulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label. C. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from a single manufacturer for each product. 02/13/087 G003-106\XC02361 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2361-3 Termite Control PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and otherconditions affecting performance of termite control. 1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 02/13/087 G003-106\XC02361 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 02510 Asphalt Concrete Pavement Part 1 General 1.01 Scope The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to construct asphalt concrete pavements to the grades and cross-sections shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Use only materials which are furnished by a bulk asphalt concrete producer regularly engaged in production of hot-mix, hot-laid asphalt concrete. B. Comply with applicable requirements of Georgia Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges. 1.03 Submittals A. Certificates: Provide certificates stating that materials supplied comply with Specifications. Certificates shall be signed by the asphalt producer and the Contractor. B. Traffic paint manufacturer's application instructions and a description and other data relative to the Contractor's application equipment and methods shall be submitted to the Engil)eer for approval. 1.04 Conditions A. Weather Limitations 1. Apply bituminous prime and tack coats only when the ambient temperature in the shade has been at least 40 degrees F. 2. Do not conduct paving operations when surface is wet, frozen or contains excess of moisture which would prevent uniform distribution and required penetration. 3. Construct asphaltic courses only when atmospheric temperature in the shade is above 35 degrees F, when the underlying base is dry and when weather is not rainy. 4. Place base course when air temperature is above 35 degrees F and rising. No base course shall be placed on a frozen or muddy subgrade. B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades for each course during construction operations. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0251 0 .1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I 02510 - 3 Asphalt Concrete Paving 1. Notifying laboratory of conditions requiring testing. 2. Coordinating with laboratory for field testing. 3. Paying costs for additional testing performed beyond the scope of that required and for retesting where initial tests reveal non-conformance with specified requirements. 4. Paying the cost of overlays or pavement removal and replacement which does not comply with the specified testing limits. Part 2 Products' 2.01 Materials' A. Graded Aggregate Base Course: Graded aggregate base course shall be of uniform quality throughout and shall meet the requirements of Section 815.01 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. B. Asphalt Base Course: Black base course shall be of uniform quality throughout and shall meet the requirements of Section 828.2.03, 25 mm Superpave of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. C. Binder Course: Binder course shall be of uniform quality throughout and shall conform to the requirements of Section 828.2.03; 19 mm Superpave of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. D. Surface Course: Surface course shall be of uniform quality throughout and shall conform to the requirements of Section 828.2.03, 12 mm or 9.5 mm Superpave of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. E. Prime Coat: Prime coat shall conform to the requirements of Section 412 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. F. Tack coat sheill conform to the requirements of Section 413 of the Georgia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Surface Preparation A. Graded Aggregate Base Course 1. Check subgrade for conformity with elevations and section immediately before placing aggregate base material. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0251 0 I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I 02510 - 5 Asphalt Concrete Paving 4. Allow surfaces to dry until material is at condition of tackiness to receive pavement. 3.02 Equipment C. D. 3.03 A. B. C. D. A. Provide size and quantity. of equipment to complete the work specified within the Project time schedule. B. Bituminous pavers shall be self-propelled that spread hot asphalt concrete mixtures without tearing, shoving or gouging surfaces, and control pavement edges to true lines without use of stationary forms. Rolling equipment shall be self-propelled, steel-wheeled and pneumatic-tired rollers that can reverse direction without backlash. Provide rakes, lutes, shovels, tampers, smoothing irons, pavement cutters, portable heaters, and other miscellaneous small tools to complete the work specified. Asphaltic Concrete Placement Place asphalt concrete mix on prepared surface, spread and strike-off using paving machine. Spread mixture at a minimum temperature of 225 degrees F. Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand. Place each course at a thickness such that when compacteq it will conform to the indicated grade, cross-section, finish thickness, and density indicated. E. Pavement Placing 1. Unless otherwise directed, begin placing along centerline of areas to be paved on crowned section, and at high side of sections on one-way slope, and in direction of traffic flow. 2. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. 3. Complete base courses for a section before placing surface courses. 4. Place mixture in as continuous an operation as practical. F. Hand Placing 1. Spread, tamp, and finish mixture using hand tools in areas where machine spreading is not possible, as acceptable to Engineer. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0251 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I 02510 - 7 Asphalt Concrete Paving 3. Check crown, grade, and smoothness after breakdown rolling. 4. Repair displaced areas by loosening at once with lutes or rakes and filling, if required, with hot loose material before continuing rolling. H. Second Rolling 1. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot and in condition for compaction. 2. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. I. Finish Rolling 1. Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. 2. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained specified density. J. Patching 1. Remove and replace defective areas. 2. Cut-out and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. 3. Compact by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. 4. Remove deficient areas for full depth of course. 5. Cut sides perpendicular and parallel to direction of traffic with edges vertical. 6. Apply tack coat to exposed surfaces before placing new asphalt concrete mixture. 3.05 Cleaning and Protection A. Cleaning: After completion of paving operations, clean surfaces of excess or spilled asphalt materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Protection 1. After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on asphalt concrete pavement until it has cooled and hardened, and in no case no sooner than six hours. 2. Provide barricades and warning devices as required to protect pavement and the general public. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0251 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I I Section 02666 Piping Testing and Acceptance Part 1 General 1.01 Scope A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to perform tests of gravity pipelines and perform integrity and leakage tests of pressure and vacuum piping. B. The testing requirements covered under this Section shall apply to all piping systems covered under Sections 02700 and 02745 of these Specifications. 1.02 Submittals Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 01340 of these Specifications and shall include a description of the testing procedures to be employed and the report form to be furnished. Part 2 Products 2.01 Test Mediums The Owner will provide the necessary water required for testing the Work. The Contractor shall furnish all other. test mediums. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, necessary piping and required labor to transport water from its source to the test location for use in testing. 2.02 Test Equipment The Contractor shall furnish all labor and equipment, including required pumps with regulated bypass meters and gauges, for conducting of the piping tests. Part 3 Execution 3.01 General A. The entire length of all pressurized piping and gravity lines shall be field tested for tightness by a test as described in this Section. B. The timing and sequence of testing shall be scheduled by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a minimum of 24 hours notice prior to the start of any test. All tests must be observed by the Engineer. C. The Contractor shall repair any leaks discovered during the initial filling of the piping and during the testing sequence. All known and visible leaks shall be repaired, whether or not the leakage rate is within allowable limits. 06/19/08 G003-106\XC02601 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 02666 - 3 Piping Testing and Acceptance D. Pressure Pipelines 1. All sections of pipeline subject to internal pressure shall be pressure tested in accordance with AWWA C600. A section of line will be considered ready for testing after completion of all thrust restraint and backfilling. 2. Each segment of pipeline between line valves shall be tested individually. 3. Test Preparation a. Flush pipeline section thoroughly at flow velocities greater than 2.5 feet per second, adequate to remove debris from pipe and valve seats. Partially operate valves and hydrants to clean out seats. Provide correctly sized temporary outlets in number adequate to achieve flushing velocities. b. Provide temporary blocking, bulkheads, flanges and plugs as necessary, to assure all new pipe, valves, and appurtenances will be pressure tested. c. Before applying test pressure, air shall be completely expelled from the pipeline and all appurtenances. Unless permanent air vents are in place, insert temporary corporation stops at highpoints to expel air as line is filled with water. d. Fill pipeline slowly with water. Provide a suitable pump with an accurate water meter to pump the line to the. specified pressure. Differential pressure at valves and hydrants shall equal the maximum possible, but shall not exceed manufacturer's pressure rating. Where necessary, provide temporary back pressure to meet the differential pressure restrictions. e. Valves and hydrants shall not be operated in either the opening or closing direction at differential pressures above their rated pressure. 4. The test pressure shall be measured at the lowest point in the test segment and shall be maintained for a minimum of two hours. Test piping in accordance with the minimum test pressures shown below: Pipe Designation Pipe Size, inches Test Pressure, psi HOPE 2,4 100 pvc 2,6 100 5. The test pressure shall not vary by more than 5 psi for the test duration. Should the pressure drop more than 5 psi at any time during the test period, the pressure shall be restored to the specified test pressure. Provide an accurate pressure gage with graduation not less than 5 psi. 6. Leakage: Leakage shall be defined as the quantity of water that must be pumped into the test section equal to the sum of the water, to maintain pressure 06/19/08 G003-106\XC02601 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02666 - 5 Piping Testing and Acceptance 3.06 Final Acceptance A. No pipeline installation shall be accepted until all known and visible leaks have been repaired, whether or not the leakage is within the maximum allowable limits. B. The Contractor will certify that all required tests have been successfully completed before the Work is accepted. END OF SECTION 06/19/08 G003-106\XC02601 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part 1 1.01 1.02 Section 02700 Landfill Piping Systems General Scope This work shall consist of the construction of landfill piping systems in accordance with these Specifications. Piping systems shall be constructed at locations shown on the Drawings and in reasonably close conformity to the lines and grades indicated thereon, or as directed by the Engineer. The work shall include all necessary excavation and backfill together with such work and materials as may be necessary to make connections with other drainage structures as shown on the Drawings. Submittals A. All submittals shall be clearly marked as to what is to be provided. Submittals not so marked will be returned. The Contractor shall submit: 1. Product data with the following information on each of the pipe types provided: a. Indicate compliance with applicable ASTM standard. b. Unit weight. c. Wall thickness. d. Diameter. e. Physical dimensions. f. Method of jointing with instructions. g. Nominal pipe joint lengths. h. Recommended bedding and installation details. i. Instructions and tables or information on strength of each pipe type versus bury conditions of depth and traffic loadings. 2. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance. The Engineer requires certified lab data from the manufacturer to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification and Engineer, at his own expense, may take random samples for testing by an independent laboratory. 3. Pipe work in structures shall be detailed by the Contractor to conform to the general arrangement shown on the plans and to fit the equipment to be provided. Shop drawings of pipe layout and equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer and approved prior to installation. 04/18/08 G003-106\XC02700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 02700 - 3 Landfill Piping Systems 2.03 Valves A. PVC Ball Valves: Ball valves 1/2 to 2-inches shall be constructed of polyvinyl chloride. The valves shall be true union design or flanged (as shown on the Drawings), with two-way blocking capability. The valves shall have Teflon seats backed with viton and the seals shall be viton. The valves shall be rated up to 150 psi at 120 degrees F. The valves shall be manufactured by Asahi/America, Inc. or Hayward. B. PVC Butterfly Valves: PVC butterfly valves shall be of the lined body design and designed to seal bubble-tight with only the liner and disc as wetted parts. The disc shall have double viton O-rings on the top and bottom trunnions made of the same material as the valve liner. The liner shall be molded and formed around the body functioning as a gasket on each side of the valve. The stem shall be stainless steel and have engagement over the full length of the disc. Chain operators shall be provided where greater than 5'-0" A.F.F. Butterfly valves shall be flanged, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, and be manufactured by Asahi/America, Inc. or Hayward. C. PVC V-Check Valves: V-check valve shall be constructed of polyvinyl chloride. The valve shall have a viton O-ring cap seal and shall allow for easy c1eanout. The valve shall be manufactured by Hayward. Ends shall be flanged unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. D. PVC Globe Valves: PVC globe valves shall be one piece construction with a Cv range of 0.0003 to 150. Seal shall be viton and valve shall be rated up to 150 psi at 120 degrees F. The valve shall be manufactured by Asahi/America or Hayward. E. PVC Gate Valves: PVC gate valves shall be constructed of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC. The plug shall be a tapered cylindrical design of CPVC with EPDM seals. Valve shall have flanged end connections conforming to ANSI B 16.1, Class 125. Valves shall be equal to ASAHI/America. 2.04 Crushed Stone Crushed stone shall meet the requirements of Georgia Department of Transportation Specification 800.01 for NO.4 stone. 2.05 Geotextile Filter Fabric Geotextile filter fabric shall meet the requirements of Section 02778 of these Specifications. 2.06 HDPE Manholes and Structures A. The structures shall be made of high density, high molecular weight polyethylene pipe material meeting the requirements of Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34, as defined in ASTM 0 1248 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials. B. Material shall be joined by the extrusion weld method or the butt fusion method in strict 04/18/08 G003-106\XC02700 I I I I I I I I I I I "',1 I I I I I I I I 02700 - 5 Landfill Piping Systems 3.03 Laying and Pipe Installation A. General 1. Proper implements, tools and facilities shall be provided for the safe performance of the work. All pipe and fittings shall be lowered carefully into the trench by means of slings, ropes or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to piping materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall piping materials be dropped or dumped into the trench. 2. All pipe, fittings, and other appurtenances shall be examined carefully for damage and other defects immediately before installation. Defective materials shall be marked and held for inspection by the Engineer, who may prescribe corrective repairs or reject the materials. 3. All lumps, blisters and excess coating shall be removed from the socket and plain ends of each pipe, and the outside of the plain end and the inside of the bell shall be wiped clean and dry and free from dirt, sand, grit or any foreign materials before the pipe is laid. No pipe containing dirt shall be laid. 4. Foreign material shall be prevented from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the trench. No debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe at any time. 5. . As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the joint shall be assembled and the pipe brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material. . 6. Applying pressure to the top of the pipe, such as with a backhoe bucket, to lower the pipe to the proper elevation or grade, shall not be permitted. 7. After the pipe has been laid and approved, the backfilling shall be carefully done so that the pipe will not become displaced. The backfilling around the pipe shall be with the gravel specified. Unless otherwise designated on the Drawings or by special provision, the backfilling shall be 6-inches on each side of the pipe and 6-inches over the pipe. 8. Lateral and other connections shall be made where indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 9. Expediting of Work: Excavate, lay the pipe, and backfill as closely together as possible. Do not leave unjointed pipe in the trench overnight. Backfill and compact the trench as soon as possible after laying and jointing is completed. Cover the exposed end of the installed pipe each day at the close of work and at all other times when work is not in progress. If necessary to backfill over the end of an uncompleted pipe or accessory, close the end with a suitable plug, either push-on, mechanical joint, restrained joint or as approved by the Engineer. 10. Joint Assembly: Push-on, mechanical and flange joints shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 04/18/08 G003-106\XC02700 .- I I I. I I I I 1 I. I I I I I I I I I 02700 - 7 Landfill Piping Systems dimensions when required by over excavation. 3.06 Inspection and Testing All piping and manholes shall be tested in accordance with Section 02666. 3.07 Cleaning A. All excess or unsuitable material shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer. Final cleaning up shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 01710 of these Specifications. B. The Contractor shall clean by flushing with water all HOPE structures. Structures shall be flushed until completely free of debris. The Contractor shall recover and remove all debris from system and dispose of in an environmentally safe manner. END OF SECTION 04/18/08 G003-106\XC02700 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 Section 02720 Storm Sewers and Pipe Culverts Part 1 General 1.01 Scope The work covered in this Section shall include the furnishing and laying of precast concrete pipe or corrugated metal pipe with fittings as called for on the Drawings and specified, including trench excavation and backfill. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Each length of pipe, each fitting and special fitting shall be inspected by an independent commercial testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer prior to delivery. Each joint of pipe and each special shall be stenciled or otherwise clearly and legibly marked with the laboratory's mark of acceptance. B. Each pipe shall be clearly marked as required by the governing ASTM standard specifications to show its class or gauge, date of manufacture, and the name or trademark of the manufacturer. Elliptical reinforced concrete pipe shall be clearly marked top and bottom and the minor axis clearly noted on the interior surface of the pipe. C. Any pipe or specials which have been broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged before or after delivery or which have failed to meet the required tests shall be removed from the site and shall not be used therein. . Part 2 Products 2.01 Pipe A. Pipe and special fittings shall be furnished in sizes, types and classes at the locations shown on the Drawings, and/or specified herein. B. All pipe and special fittings shall. be of all new materials which have not been previously used. 2.02 High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) A. Pipe and Fittings: High-density polyethylene (HOPE) pipe shall meet the requirements of MSHTO M 294M, Type S. All fittings shall be factory fabricated. No field fabrication of fittings will be permitted. B. Joints: Joints for pipe and fittings shall be of the bell and spigot type with a confined gasket meeting the requirements of ASTM 0 3212. The gasket shall comply with the physical non-pressure requirements of ASTM F 477. G. Acceptance: Acceptance will be on the basis of the Engineer's inspection and the manufacturer's written. certification that the pipe was manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable standards. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02720 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 02720 - 3 Storm Sewers and Pipe Culverts collapse of trench walls so that a higher class of bedding is required, the increased cost of the same shall be borne by the Contractor. If the bearing value of the subgrade is determined by the Engineer to be inadequate for a particular class of bedding, the Contractor shall substitute a higher class of bedding as directed by the Engineer. G. HDPE Bedding shall be in accordance with Section 02225 of these Specifications. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Excavation Excavation shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Sections 02200 and/or 02225 of these Specifications. 3.02 Pipe Laying - Concrete Pipe A. Immediately prior to laying the pipe, all projections or irregularities which will prevent the joints from closing properly shall be removed. B. Concrete pipe shall be laid true to line and grade on a bed which is uniformly firm throughout its entire length. If material in the bottom of the excavation is of such character as to cause unequal settlement along the length of the storm sewer or culvert, the material shall be removed below the grade given, to such depth as ordered and shall be backfilled with granular bedding material and thoroughly tamped or otherwise compacted to ensure an unyielding foundation. Pipe shall not be laid upon frozen ground. C. Pipe, unless otherwise provided or directed by the Engineer, shall be laid beginning at the lower end and with the bells or receiving ends upgrade. The spigot or tongue end shall be inserted into hub or receiving end as far as the construction of the pipe will permit. D. The pipe shall be protected from water during placing and until the mortar in the joints has thoroughly set. E. For mortar joints, the pipe ends shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted with water before the joint is made. Stiff mortar shall then be placed in the lower half of the bell or groove of the pipe section already laid and on the upper half of the spigot or tongue of . the section to be laid. The two pipe sections shall then be tightly jointed with their inner surfaces flush and even. Pipe with mortar joints shall not be placed when the temperature is below 40 degrees F. F. After each section of the pipe is laid and uniformly matched and the sections have been fitted as closely as the construction of the pipe will permit, the joint shall be entirely filled and packed with a stiff cement mortar, one part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts sand by volume. Sufficient additional mortar shall be used to form a bead around the joint. The joint on the inside of the pipe shall be filled with similar mortar and finished smooth and even with the adjacent sections of pipe. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02720 I I I I I I I I I I I I. I I I I I I 1 02720 - 5 Storm Sewers and Pipe Culverts B. The bedding for the pipe must be laid in a dry trench, and any water encountered in ditches, springs, etc. shall be considered a necessary part of construction and shall be handled by pumping, ditching or any other method satisfactory to the Engineer. 3.05 Existing Utilities All existing sewers, water lines, gas lines, underground conduits, telephone lines, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, pavements, electric lines or other utilities or structures in the vicinity of the work shall be carefully protected by the Contractor from damage at all times. Where it is necessary for the proper accomplishment of the work to repair, remove and/or replace any such utility, the work shall be done as directed by the Engineer. No separate payment shall be made for removing and replacing and/or repairing damaged existing sewers, water, gas, electric, or telephone lines, or conduits or other utilities, culverts, drains, or similar existing services or structures that are to remain in service. The removal, replacement and/or repair of these items shall be paid for in the unit price bid by the Contractor on other items of work. Similar repair and replacement of sidewalks, curbs, gutters and pavements are provided elsewhere herein. 3.06 Cleaning After completing each section of the storm sewer or culvert, the Contractor shall remove all debris and construction materials and equipment from the site, grade and smooth over the surface on both sides of the line and leave the entire right-of-way in a clean, neat and serviceable condition in accordance.with the requirements of Section 01710 of these Specifications. 3.07 Seeding All ground areas that are disturbed during construction of the storm sewer or culvert shall be prepared and seeded in accordance with the requirements of Section 02933 of these Specifications. No separate payment shall be made for seeding or seeding preparation, but shall be included in the unit prices bid for other items of work done under this Section. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC02720 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 02730 Sewers and Accessories Part 1 General 1.01 Scope A. This Section describes products to be incorporated into sewers and accessories and requirements for the installation and use of these items. Furnish all products and perform all labor necessary to fulfill the requirements of these Specifications. B. Supply all products and perform all work in accordance with applicable American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM), American Water Works Association (AWWA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), or other recognized standards. Latest revisions of all standards are applicable. 1.02 Qualifications If requested by the Engineer, submit evidence that manufacturers have consistently produced products of satisfactory quality and performance for a period of at least two yea rs. 1.03 Submittals Complete shop drawings and engineering data, including shop drawings, shall be submitted to the Engineer. 1.04 Transportation and Handling A. Unloading: Furnish equipment and facilities for unloading, handling, distributing and storing pipe, fittings, valves and accessories. Make equipment available at all times for use in unloading. Do not drop or dump materials. Any materials dropped or dumped will be subject to rejection without additional justification. B. Handling: Handle pipe, fittings, valves and accessories carefully to prevent shock or damage. Handle pipe by rolling on skids, forklift, or front loader. Do not use material damaged in handling. 1.05 Storage and Protection A. Store all pipe which cannot be distributed along the route. Make arrangements for the use of suitable storage areas. B. Stored materials shall be kept safe from damage. The interior of all pipe, fittings and other appurtenances shall be kept free from dirt or foreign matter at all times. 09/19/08 G003-1 06\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02730 - 3 Sewers and Accessories C. Fittings: Fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 3034. PVC compound shall be 12454B or 12454C as specified in ASTM D 1784. Fittings shall be molded in one-piece with no solvent welded joints. Minimum socket depths shall be as specified in ASTM D 3034, Table 2. D. Joints: Joints for pipe and fittings shall be of the integral bell and spigot type with a confined elastomeric gasket having the capability of absorbing expansion and contraction without leakage, when tested in accordance with ASTM 0 3212. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477. The joint system shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be identical for pipe and fittings. E. Manhole Connections: The sewer shall be connected to manholes utilizing a standard pipe section. F. Acceptance: Acceptance will be on the basis of the Engineer's inspection and the manufacturer's written certification that the pipe and fittings were manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable standards. 2.02 Infiltrator Chambers A. Infiltrator Chamber shall be 16 inches high and 34 inches wide interlocking units. Infiltrator Chambers shall be Quick 4 High Capacity Chamber or approved equivalent. B. Any alternative chamber proposed shall be approved by the Georgia Department of Human Resources Division of Public Health and have an equal or better equivalency factor. 2.03 Detection Tape A. Detection tape shall be composed of a solid aluminum foil encased in a protective plastic jacket. Tapes shall be color coded in accordance with APWA color codes with the following legends: Sanitary Sewerage Systems, Safety Green, "Caution: Sewer Line Buried Below". Colors may be solid or striped. Tape shall be permanently printed with no surface printing allowed. Tape width shall be minimum 3-inches. Detection tape shall be equal to Lineguard Type III Detectable or Allen Systems Detectatape. 2.04 Tracer Wire A. Tracer wire shall be a #12 gauge single strain copper wire. B. The tracer wire shall be installed directly above the pipe and secured to the pipe with tape or other approved method. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02730-5 Sewers and Accessories D. Rubber Boots: Provide preformed rubber boots and fasteners equal to those manufactured by Kor-N-Seal or Press Seal Gasket Corporation. 2.07 Concrete A. Concrete shall have a compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi, with not less than 5.5 bags of cement per cubic yard and a slump between 3 and 5-inches. For jOb mixed concrete, submit the concrete mix design for approval by the Engineer. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C 94. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 12.08 Aerobic Treatment Unit A. Aerobic Treatment Unit (ATU) shall be model # AS1500 EZ as manufactured by Ecological Tanks, Inc. The tank shall be fiberglass with polyethylene clarifier and polyethylene compressor housing. The compressor shall be HiBlow model HP200. Unit shall include all internal piping and airlines. Manufacturer provided control panel shall be NEMA 4X with audible and visual alarms for high water level and low air pressure. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Existing Utilities and Obstructions A. The Drawings indicate utilities or obstructions that are known to exist according to the best information available to the Owner. The Contractor shall call the Utilities Protection Center (UPC) (800-282-7411) as required by Georgia law (Code Section 25-9-1 through 25-9-13) and all utilities, agencies or departments that own and/or operate utilities in the vicinity of the construction work site, at least 72 hours (three business days) prior to construction, to verify the location of the existing utilities. B. Existing Utility Location: The following steps shall be exercised to avoid interruption of existing utility service. 1. Provide the required notice to the utility owners and allow them to locate their facilities according to Georgia law. Field utility locations are valid for only ten days after original notice. The Contractor shall ensure, at the time of any excavation, that a valid utility location exists at the point of excavation. 2. Expose the faCility to verify its true location and grade for a distance of at least 200 feet in advance of pipeline construction to verify its true location and grade. Repair, or have repaired, any damage to utilities resulting from locating or exposing their true location. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02730 - 7 Sewers and Accessories 2. Where the sewer crosses over a water main, the water main shall be encased in concrete to the first joint in each direction. 3. No water main shall be permitted to pass through or come in contact with any part of a manhole. 3.02 Construction Along Highways, Streets and Roadways A. Install pipe lines and appurtenances along highways, streets and roadways in accordance with the applicable regulations of, and permits issued by, Augusta - Richmond County with reference to construction operations, safety, traffic control, road maintenance and repair. B. Traffic Control 1. The Contractor shall: provide, erect and maintain all necessary barricades; suitable and sufficient lights and other traffic control devices; . provide qualified flagmen where necessary to direct traffic; take all necessary precautions for the protection of the work and the safety of the public. 2. Construction traffic control devices and their installation shall be in accordance with the current Manual On Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways. 3. Placement and removal of construction traffic control devices shall be coordinated with Augusta - Richmond County a minimum of 48 hours in advance of the activity. 4. Placement of construction traffic control devices shall be scheduled ahead of associated construction activities. Construction time in street right-of-way shall be conducted to minimize the length of time traffic is disrupted. Construction traffic control devices shall be removed immediately following their useful purpose. Traffic control devices used intermittently, such as "Flagmen Ahead", shall be removed and replaced when needed. 5. Existing traffic control devices within the construction work zone shall be protected from damage. Traffic control devices requiring temporary relocation shall be located as near as possible to their original vertical and horizontal locations. Original locations shall be measured from reference points and recorded in a log prior to relocation. Temporary locations shall provide the same visibility to affected traffic as the original location. Relocated traffic control devices shall be reinstalled in their original locations as soon as practical following construction. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02730-9 Sewers and Accessories improvements; subdivision and other signs within the right-of-way and easement. The Contractor shall take extreme care in moving landscape features and promptly re-establishing these features. G. Maintaining Highways, Streets, Roadways and Driveways 1. Maintain streets, highways, roadways and driveways in suitable condition for movement of traffic until completion and final acceptance of the work. 2. During the time period between pavement removal and completing permanent pavement replacement, maintain highways, streets and roadways by the use of steel running plates. The edges of running plates shall have asphalt placed around their periphery to minimize vehicular impact. The backfill above the pipe shall be compacted, as specified elsewhere up to the existing pavement surface to provide support for the steel running plates. 3. Furnish a road grader or front-end loader for maintaining highways, streets, and roadways. Make the grader or front-end loader available at all times. 4. Immediately repair all driveways that are cut or damaged. Maintain them in a suitable condition for use until completion and final acceptance of the work. 3.03 Pipe Distribution A. Pipe shall be distributed and placed in such a manner that will not interfere with traffic. B. No street or roadway may be closed for unloading of pipe without first obtaining permission from the proper authorities. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain proper warning signs and obstruction lights for the protection of traffic along highways, streets and roadways upon which pipe is distributed. C. No distributed pipe shall be placed inside drainage ditches. D. Distributed pipe shall be placed as far as possible from the roadway pavement, but no closer than five feet from the roadway pavement, as measured edge-to-edge. 3.04 Location and Grade A. The Drawings show the alignment and grade of the sewer and the position of manholes and other appurtenances. The slope shown on the profile and/or called for in the Specifications is the slope of the invert of the pipe. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02730-11 Sewers and Accessories 2. Maintain a transit, level and accessories on the job to layout angles and ensure that deflection allowances are not exceeded. 3. The Contractor shall check the invert elevation at each manhole and the pipe invert elevation at least three times daily, start, mid-day and end of day. Elevations shall be checked more frequently if more than 100 feet of pipe is installed in a day or if the pipe is being constructed at minimum slope. 4. The Contractor shall check the horizontal alignment of the sewer at the same schedule as for invert elevations. D. Expediting of Work: Excavate, lay the pipe, and backfill as closely together as possible. Do not leave unjointed pipe in the trench overnight. Backfill and compact the trench as soon as possible after laying and jointing is completed. Cover the exposed end of the installed pipe each day at the close of work and at all other times when work is not in progress. If necessary to backfill over the end of an uncompleted pipe or accessory, close the end with a suitable plug, either push-on, mechanical joint, restrained joint or as approved by the Engineer. E. Joint Assembly 1. Push-on, mechanical, flange and restrained type joints shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Each restrained joint shall be inspected by the Contractor to ensure that it has been "homed" 100 percent. 3. The Contractor shall internally inspect each pipe joint to insure proper assembly for pipe 24-inches in diameter and larger after the pipe has been brought to final alignment. F. Cutting Pipe 1. Cut PVC pipe using a suitable saw. 2. Remove all burrs and smooth the end before jointing. 3. The Contractor shall cut the pipe and bevel the end, as necessary, to provide the correct length of pipe necessary for installing the fittings, valves, accessories and closure pieces in the correct location. Only push-on or mechanical joint pipe shall be cut. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02730 - 13 Sewers and Accessories E. Inverts: Form channels as shown on the Drawings, rounded, and troweled smooth. Maintain consistent grade through the invert. F. Top Elevations: Build manholes outside of paved areas to i8-inches above finished grade unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. Build manholes in paved areas to existing grades. G. Drop Connections: Manholes requiring drop connections are shown on the Drawings. Construct drop connections of the same materials as the upstream sewer and in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. H. Frames and Covers: Unless frame and cover is at grade, the frame shall be cast into the cone section. I. Seal all manhole joints and lift holes, both inside and out, with grout. Between precast sections, this is in addition to joint sealant. J. Invert Elevations: The invert elevations shown on the Drawings shall be for the invert at the centerline of the precast concrete manhole. Prior to setting the laser or other vertical alignment control system for the sewer upstream of the manhole, the Contractor shall verify the elevation of the sewer installed at the manhole. Should the elevation differ from that shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall take the following corrective action: i. If the sewer is laid at negative grade, the Contractor shall remove and reinstall the sewer at the correct grade at no additional cost to the Owner. 2. If the sewer is laid at a grade less than that shown on the Drawings, thus reducing the sewer's capacity, the Owner may require the sewer to be removed and relaid at the correct grade at no additional cost to the Owner. As a minimum, the grade to the next upstream manhole shall be adjusted such that the next upstream manhole shall be set at the correct elevation. 3. If the sewer is laid at a grade greater than that shown on the Drawings, and if the Contractor can show that there are no conflicts with upstream existing utilities or obstructions, the Contractor shall adjust the grade of the next upstream manhole such that the next upstream manhole shall be set at the correct elevation. If such an adjustment, in the Engineer's opinion, is substantial, the grade adjustment shall be spread over multiple sections of the sewer. If such an adjustment, in the Owner's opinion, significantly reduces the sewer's capacity, the Owner may require the Contractor to remove and relay that portion of the sewer laid at the improper grade. K. Manholes shall be constructed such that their walls are plumb. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02730 - 15 Sewers and Accessories with suitable bulkheads having provisions for the release of air while the test section is being filled with water. c. During the test period, which shall extend over a period of three days, water shall be introduced into the riser pipe from measured containers at such intervals as are necessary to maintain the water level at the top of the riser pipe. The total volume of water added during the test period shall not exceed that specified for infiltration. 3. Deflection Test a. Test PVC gravity sewer for excessive deflection by passing a mandrel through the pipe. Deflection of the pipe shall not exceed the following: Nominal Maximum Pipe Diameter Allowable Deflection ~ 12-inches 5% 15 to 30-inches 4% > 30-inches 3% b. The mandrel size shall be based upon the maximum possible inside diameter for the type of pipe being tested, taking into account the allowable manufacturing tolerances of the pipe. The mandrel shall have an odd number of legs, or vanes, with a quantity of such equal to or greater than nine. The legs of the mandrel shall be permanently attached to the mandrel. A mandrel with variable sizes shall not be allowed. The mandrel shall be constructed of steel aluminum or other material approved by the Engineer, and shall have sufficient rigidity so the legs of the mandrel will not deform when pulling through a pipe. The mandrel dimensions shall be checked by the Engineer before use by the Contractor. c. Excavate and install properly any section of pipe not passing this test. Re-test until results are satisfactory. d. This test shall be performed within the first 30 days of installation and during final inspection, at the completion of this contract. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.09 02730 -17 Sewers and Accessories line to test pressure at the end of the test. Leakage shall be the total cumulative amount measured on a water meter. b. The Owner assumes no responsibility for leakage occurring through existing valves. 6. Test Results: No test section shall be accepted if the leakage exceeds the limits determined by the following formula: L = SO (P)o.s 133,200 Where: L S o p = allowable leakage, in gallons per hour length of pipe tested, in feet nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch (gauge) = = = As determined under Section 4 of AWWA C600. If the pipe section being tested contains lengths of various pipe diameters, the allowable leakage shall be the sum of the computed leakage for each diameter. The leakage test shall be repeated until the test section is accepted. All visible leaks shall be repaired regardless of leakage test results. 7. Completion: After a pipeline section has been accepted, relieve test pressure. Record type, size and location of all outlets on record drawings. Protection and Restoration Of Work Area A. General: Return all items and all areas disturbed, directly or indirectly by work under these Specifications, to their original condition or better, as quickly as possible after work is started. 1. The Contractor shall plan, coordinate, and prosecute the work such that disruption to personal property and business is held to a practical minimum. 2. All construction areas abutting lawns and yards of residential or commercial property shall be restored promptly. Backfilling of underground facilities, ditches, and disturbed areas shall be accomplished on a daily basis as work is completed. Finishing, dressing, and grassing shall be accomplished immediately thereafter, as a continuous operation within each area being constructed and with emphasis placed on completing each individual yard or business frontage. Care shall be taken to provide positive drainage to avoid ponding or concentration of runoff. 09/19/08 G003-106\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02730 - 19 Sewers and Accessories 3. The Contractor shall provide temporary culverts or other drainage structures, as necessary, to permit the free migration of water between portions of a swamp, wetland or stream which may be temporarily divided by construction. 4. The Contractor shall not spread, discharge or dump any fuel oil, gasoline, pesticide, or any other pollutant to adjacent swamps or wetlands. END OF SECTION 09/19/08 G003-106\XC02730 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 02745 High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) Part 1 General 1.01 Scope This Section covers the materials and the installation of all HOPE leachate piping. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Polyethylene piping and fittings shall be manufactured to conform to industry standards. Dimensions and workmanship shall be as specified by ASTM F 714. Failure of the Engineer to condemn materials on preliminary inspection shall not be grounds for acceptance if future defects are found. B. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that which is generated in the manufacturer's own plant from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogenous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identifiable in color, density, and other physical properties throughout. C. The Engineer requires certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance data. Additionally, test results from the manufacturer's testing which show the pipe does not meet appropriate ASTM standards of manufacturer's representation, will be cause for rejection of the pipe represented by the testing. These tests include density and other measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM 0 3350, 10.1.9. 1.03 Applicable Publications and Standards A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM Publications) ASTM 0256 Test Methods For Impact Resistance of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials ASTM 0638 Test Method For Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM 0696 Test Method For Coefficient of Line at Thermal Expansion of Plastics ASTM 0746 Test Method For Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers By Impact ASTM 0 1238 Test Method For Flow Rates of Thermoplastics By Extrusion Plastometer ASTM 0 1248 Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials ASTM 0 1505 Test Method For Density of Plastics By The Density-Gradient Technique 04/18/08 G003'-1 06\XC02745 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 02745 - 3 High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HOPE) Part 2 Products 2.01 Pipe Schedule 2.02 Function SDR Minimum Pipe Length Diameter, inches Type Leachate Pipe - Solid 17 40 Feet, Smooth Wall 2 Polyethylene Leachate Pipe - Solid 11 40 Feet, Smooth Wall 4 Polyethylene Perforated and Non-Perforated Polyethylene (PE) Pipe A. Pipe and Fittings Resin: The pipe supplied under this Section shall be high performance, very high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe. The fittings supplied under this Section shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. B. Resin physical properties shall be equivalent to those described in the typical physical properties sheet as follows: Typical Physical Properties Property Test Method Unit Value Density ASTM D 1505 gmslcc 0.955 Environmental Stress Cracking Resistance Conditions A, B & C ASTM D 1693 OF, hours >5,000 Compressed Ring, OF ASTM F 1248 OF, hours >3,500 Ultimate Tensile Strength, Type IV Specimen ASTM D 638 psi 5,000 (2"/min.) Yield Tensile Strength, Type IV Specimen ASTM D 638 psi 3,200 (2"/min.) Elongation at Break, Type IV Specimen ASTM D 638 % >600 (2"/min.) Impact Strength, Specimen Thickness 0.125" ASTM D 256 ft.l bs .finch >12 Vicat Softening Temperature ASTM D 1525 OF 257 Brittleness Temperature ASTM D 746 OF <-180 Flexural Modulus ASTM D 3350 psi 125,000 Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D 638 psi 110,000 Hardness ASTM D 2240 Shore D 65 Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion ASTM D 696 in.fin.foF Molded Specimen 8.3 x 10-5 04/18/08 G003-1 06\XC02745 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I 02745 - 5 High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HOPE) recommendations and the requirements of these Specifications. B. Perforations shall be constructed by the manufacturer as detailed in the Drawings no field perforating will be allowed. Perforated leachate pipe shall be laid in the trench as detailed on the Drawings. The Engineer shall be allowed to review the perforated leachate pipe prior to backfill and prior to acceptance for payment. C. The pipe interior shall be kept clean before and after laying. Pipe shall be kept clean before installation by proper storage and handling. After installation by proper storage and handling, pipe shall be encapsulated in geotextile fabric and covered with stone. Any open pipe ends shall be plugged and covered with clean fabric. D. Force mains shall be layed on a positive grade to minimize the number of air release manholes. The minimum cover on the force main shall be four feet. 3.02 Handling of Pipe Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching and gouging of the pipe. Polyethylene pipe shall be protected from direct sunlight. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking shall be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of polyethylene pipe shall be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 3.03 Repair of Damaged Sections Polyethylene Pipe (HOPE): Sections of polyethylene pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10 percent of the wall thickness of the pipe shall be removed. New polyethylene pipe section shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. It is the Engineer's intent to reduce the number of joints. The Engineer shall reject pipe installations, where in the Engineer's opinion, installation methodology of Contractor does not meet this objective. 3.04 Pipe Joining A. Perforated and Non-Perforated Leachate Pipe (HOPE): Sections of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by qualified persons and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures shall be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment and fusion pressures. B. HOPE flanges shall be provided where HOPE pipe joins PVC pipe or fittings. Stainless steel backup rings, bolts and nuts shall be used to connect the flanges. 3.05 Handling of Fused Pipe Fused segments of polyethylene pipe shall be handled so as to avoid damage to the 04/18/08 G003-1 06\XC02745 I I I I I I I I I I I- I I I I I I I I Section 03050 Concrete Site Work Part 1 General 1.01 Scope A. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete pavement and other miscellaneous concrete as shown and indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section, complete. All concrete within the buildings and foundations as detailed on "S" drawings shall be in accordance with Section 03300 B. All formwork, reinforcing, sleeves, inserts, piping, hangers, anchors, frames, and other items to be built into the concrete work shall be correctly positioned, secured and inspected by the Contractor and Engineer prior to placing concrete. 1.02 Submittals Submit concrete design mix and shop drawings on reinforcing, admixtures, waterstops and curing compound for the Engineer's review prior to any work. 1.03 Storage and Protection All materials shall be stored and protected in accordance with the requirements of Section 01620 of these Specifications. 1.04 Quality Assurance All concrete work shall be in accordance with the provisions of the American Concrete Institute's "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI 318), unless specified or noted otherwise. Part 2 Products 2.01 Materials and Construction A. Materials for use in concrete work including admixtures, aggregates, cement, form material, reinforcing and water shall be in accordance with the following: 1. Cement: All cement shall be Type I and meet the requirements of ASTM C 150. One bag of Portland cement shall be considered to weigh 94 pounds. 2. Aggregates: Aggregates shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. 3. Water: Mixing water for concrete shall be fresh, clean and potable. 4. Admixtures: For each 100 pounds of cement the following amount of admixture shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations: a. For air temperatures below 70 degrees F, provide 3 to 6 ounces of Master Builder's Pozzolith 344-N (or 122-N) or 2 ounces of Sika Chemical 02/13/08 G003-106\XC03050 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03050 - 3 Concrete Site Work 7. Waterstops: In expansion joints and in construction joints not shown as expansion joints, waterstops shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and shall incorporate a galvanized steel wire along both edges which shall be used to secure the waterstop in position during concrete placement. The waterstop shall be sized as noted on the Drawings. Waterstop shall be equal to Wirestop CR-9380 or Burke. The waterstop shall extend the entire length of the joint and all splices shall be heat welded and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 8. Non-Shrink Grout a. All grout shall be non-metallic, non-shrink type. Cement shall be Type III. Grout shall meet the following requirements: Criteria Test Method Result Workability ASTM C 191 Initial set time not less than 60 minutes Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 One day - 3,000 psi (restrained condition) Shrinkage ASTM C 827 No shrinkage after and CRD 621 placement or shrinkage after set b. The Contractor shall furnish independent laboratory test results as evidence of full compliance with these requirements. c. Grout shall be equal to Five Star Grout, manufactured by U.S. Grout Corporation or Burke, and shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the recommendations of ACI and the grout manufacturer's published recommendations. d. The Contractor shall provide the services of a technical representative of the grout manufacturer to instruct the Contractor's personnel and insure compliance with the grout manufacturer's recommendations. 9. Standard Grout: Grout which is required by the Drawings or Specifications and is not otherwise specified shall be composed of one part of cement and three parts of sand. Grout shall have a maximum water/cement ratio of 5.0 U.S. gallons per 94 pound bag of cement. 10. Epoxy Bonding Compound: Epoxy bonding compound shall be 100 percent solids with a minimum bond strength of 2,100 psi at 14 days. Epoxy bonding compound shall be equal to Sikadur Hi-Mod. 11. Expansion Joint Filler: Joint filler shall be a preformed type meeting the requirements of ASTM 0 1751. 04/18/08 G003-106\XC03050 I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I I I 3.03 3.04 03050 - 5 Concrete Site Work Placing A. Before concrete is placed, steel forms shall be uniformly coated with form oil and wood forms shall be thoroughly wetted. B. Concrete shall be placed to avoid the segregation or separation of aggregates, and displacement of reinforcing. Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely more than four feet. C. All concrete shall be placed in daylight; the placing of concrete in any portion of the work shall not be begun if such work cannot be completed during daylight. D. Concrete shall not be placed when the atmospheric temperature is below 40 degrees F. If after placing concrete the temperature drops below 40 degrees F, the Contractor shall enclose, heat and protect the work in a manner to keep the air surrounding the fresh concrete at a temperature of not less than 45 degrees F for a period of five days after concrete is placed. E. Concrete shall be compacted by the use of mechanical internal vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading. Vibrating shall not be used to transport concrete within forms. Internal vibrators shall maintain a speed of at least 5,000 impulses per minute when submerged in concrete. F. Keys shall be formed in all construction joints as indicated on the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer. G. Waterstops shall be used where shown on the Drawings and in all joints buried or submerged on one side and exposed on the other. Finishing A. All exterior concrete surfaces shall be finished to 12-inches below finish grade. Interior concrete surfaces within buildings, and other such surfaces exposed to view shall be finished. B. The interior of basins shall be finished to a level not less than 12-inches below overflow level. Concrete not exposed to view, therefore not specified to be finished, shall have rough edges tooled off and shall be pointed and spot finished to fill irregularities. 1. Vertical Surfaces a. When concrete has set sufficiently to permit, forms and form ties shall be carefully removed. All depressions resulting from removal of form ties and all other holes and rough places shall be thoroughly wetted with water and pointed with sand cement grout. b. After pointed surfaces have set sufficiently to permit, all surfaces specified to be finished shall be kept wetted with water and rubbed with a carborundum stone of medium fineness or other equally good abrasive, to 04/18/08 G003-106\XC03050 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I 3.07 3.08 03050 - 7 Concrete Site Work 4. Slump Tests: At least two slump tests shall be made on each day that concrete is placed. One slump test shall be made at the time cylinders are made for compression tests. Tests shall meet ASTM C 143. 5. Pavement Thickness: When requested by the Engineer, inspect cores of the pavement to determine the average thickness. If the average thickness exceeds the allowable variation below, additional cores shall be made at the Contractor's expense to determine the area of deficient thickness. a. Concrete Pavement: 2: 1/4-inch. 6. Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of the concrete pavement for smoothness using a 10 foot straightedge. Intervals of tests shall be as directed by the Engineer. Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following: a. Concrete Pavement: 1/8-inch in 10 feet. 7. Test Results: The laboratory shall send one copy of all reports to the Engineer, one copy to the Contractor and one to the ready mix plant. Concrete test reports shall include slump tests and state where the concrete was used in the structure. Imperfect or Damaged Work Defective or damaged work, or any work damaged before final acceptance, shall be satisfactorily removed and replaced in accordance with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Removal and replacement of concrete work shall be done in such a manner that the strength of the structure will not be impaired. All testing required to verify compliance with the Specifications and ACI Code shall be paid for by the Contractor. All removing and replacing of concrete is subject to inspection by the Engineer. Cleaning Upon completion of the work, all forms, equipment, protective coverings and rubbish resulting therefrom shall be removed from the premises. Finished surfaces shall be left in a condition satisfactory to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 04/18/08 G003-106\XC03050 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all cast-in-place concrete, complete, in place, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein and required for the complete installation. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following: 1 . Foundations and footings. 2. Slabs-on-grade. 3. Fill for steel deck. 4. Foundation walls. 5. Load-bearing building walls. 6. Building frame members. 7. Equipment pads and bases. 8. Fill for steel pan stairs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Architect. C. Shop drawings for Concrete Reinforcement: 1. Shop drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect and review action received prior to fabrication. When corrections are required, copies will be returned noting such. Drawings shall then be corrected and resubmitted until final review action is received. Coordination of shop 02113/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03300 - 3 Cast-in-Place Concrete coordination with other trades. Reviews do not authorize any changes involving additional cost unless stated in separate letter or change order. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 311-88, "Guide for Concrete Inspection." 3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 4. ACI 304-89, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete." 5. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Concrete Testing Service: 1. All testing services specified in this section of these specifications shall be performed by a recognized, independent laboratory approved by the Architect. 2. All expenses of the testing agency shall be borne by the Contractor. 3. The Contractor shall furnish to the testing agency samples of all proposed material to be used which requires testing. 4. Testing agency shall check and review proposed materials to be used for compliance with these specifications, perform all testing in accordance with referenced standards and provide all reports. 5. Contractor shall furnish all project specifications, testing material, mill reports, design mixes and cylinders, and shall notify laboratory of concrete pouring schedules so as not to delay progress of the work. 6. No material or mixes shall be used on project unless approved by the Architect. 7. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect, at anytime during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all times. Retesting of rejected material and installed work, shall be provided at the Contractor's expense. C. Tests for Concrete Materials: 1. Portland cement shall be sampled and tested to determine the properties in accordance with ASTM C 150-92. 2. Aggregates shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 33- 92 (normal weight). 02/13/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.3 03300 - 5 Cast-in-Place Concrete E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs-on-grade, including thickened slab areas, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2). 3. For foundations, support reinforcing in bottom at footings with whole concrete bricks at 4'-0" on center. CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: 1. Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: 1. Comply with ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 2. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect. 4. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts, iron sulphide, pyrite, marcasite or ochre which can cause strains on exposed concrete surfaces. 5. Dune sand, bank run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. 6. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, as follows: a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank run gravel is not permitted. c. Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depths of slabs nor three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing 02113/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03300 - 7 Cast-in-Place Concrete sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.0336 inch thick (22 gage) with bent tab anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. D. Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell-type or centerbulb-type waterstops at construction joints and other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints. E. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: 1 . Comply with Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work , include, but are not limited to, the following: a. The Burke Co. b. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc. d. Progress Unlimited. e. Schlegel Corp. f. Vinylex Corp. F. Slab on Grade Floor Joint Forms: 1. Interior spaces: 24 ga., pre-shaped keyed type galvanized steel joint forms and stakes. Galvanizing shall be hot-dipped conforming to ASTM A 446-89 Grade E Steel G90 coating class. 2. Exterior spaces: Wood or metal removable tongue and groove joint forms. G. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 pounds of fluosilicates per gallon. H. Sand Fill: Clean, manufactured or natural sand. I. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM 1315, 30% solids content minimum, Type 1, Class A. J. Vapor Barrier: Provide vapor barrier that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to ASTM E 1745, as follows: 1 . Polyethylene sheet not less than 6 mils thick, meeting ASTM E 1745, Class C. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 03300 - 9 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1. Formed Concrete: 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; 564 Ibs. cement per cubic yard, minimum; Air-entrained. 2. Foundations: 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; (non-air-entrained). 3. Slabs on Grade: 3000-psi, 4000-psi, and 6000-psi 28-day compressive strengths according to requirements on drawings; (air-entrained). 4. Concrete Masonry Fill: 2500-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 4 inches. 2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 4 inches. 3. Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site- verified 2-to-3-inch slump concrete. 4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches. E. Lightweight Structural Concrete: Lightweight aggregate and concrete shall conform to ASTM C 330. Proportion mix to produce concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days and a calculated equilibrium unit weight of 110 pcf plus or minus 3 pcf as determined by ASTM C 567. Concrete slump at the point of placement shall be the minimum necessary for efficient mixing, placing, and finishing. Maximum slump shall be 6 inches for pumped concrete and 5 inches elsewhere. Air entrain concrete exposed to weather according to ACI 301 requirements. F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work. No water shall be added to concrete mix at job site unless approved by Architect. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C). . C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water-cement ratios below 0.50. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I -I I I I I I - I I 1 03300 - 11 Cast-in-Place Concrete PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS A. General: 1. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits: 2. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 3. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal. D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 03300 - 13 Cast-in-Place Concrete 3.5 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. E. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's printed instructions. F. Construction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: 1. Construction joints for slab-on-grade (floor joints) shall be tongue and groove key type wood or steel joint form. Prefabricated metal floor joint forms shall be installed as per manufacturer's instructions. 2. All floor joints to be removed shall be painted on one side with grease or mastic to prevent bond. 3. Galvanized steel interior floor joint forms may be set to permit simultaneous pouring of concrete on both sides. Metal form to be left in place. G. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1 . Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.6 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. 02113/08 G003-106\XC03300 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 03300 - 15 Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate. E. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section. 2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 3. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 4. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. H. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. 02113/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 03300 - 17 Cast-in- Place Concrete standard portland cement and white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. 3. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and where indicated. 1. After placing slabs, finish surface to tolerances of F(F) 15 (floor flatness) and F(L) 13 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.. B. Float Finish: 1. Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated. 2. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: 1 . Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03300 -19 Cast-in-Place Concrete surplus hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water. H. F(L) and F(F) Exceptions: 1 . F(L) tolerances and testing specified herein shall not be applicable to formed elevated concrete slab surfaces. 2. F(L) and F(F) tolerances and testing specified shall not be applicable to surfaces within two feet of any floor joints, pre-positioned embedments, or any types of full-depth penetrations in accordance with ASTM E-1155. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. D. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels, bond beams and vertically reinforced cells where indicated on the drawings or as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. All masonry voids to be kept clean of mortar fins or obstructions to ensure complete filling of designated cells. E. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in safety inserts and accessories as shown on drawings. Screen, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces. 3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation- control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. 02113/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03300 - 21 Cast-in-Place Concrete 3.13 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. General: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory construction, and as specified. B. Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures four stories or less, unless otherwise permitted. C. Extend shoring at least three floors under floor or roof being placed for structures over four stories. Shore floor directly under floor or roof being placed, so that loads from construction above will transfer directly to these shores. Space shoring in stories below this level in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members where no reinforcing steel is provided. Extend shores beyond minimums to ensure proper distribution of loads throughout structure. D. Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support work without excessive stress or deflection. E. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, or longer, if required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. 3.14 REMOVING FORMS A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg. F (10 deg. C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days or until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.15 REUSING FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, 02113/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03300 - 23 Cast-in-Place Concrete low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect. 5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 314-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Arch itect. 3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Contractor will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03300 - 25 Cast-in-Place Concrete D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. END OF SECTION 03300 02/13/08 G003-106\XC03300 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 04810 Unit Masonry PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 9. Cavity-wall insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. C. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Exposed Decorative concrete masonry units. 2. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. 3. Accessories embedded in masonry. 02/13/087 GOO3-106\XC04810 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 04810-3 Unit Masonry a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in exterior wall mockup. . b. Include Type A window components matching placement in building wall mockup, excluding glass. c. Include through-wall flashing at base of wall, and window sill. d. Include CMU back-up veneer anchors, flashing, and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup. e. Include concrete spread footing for mock-up same type scheduled for building. 2. Erect mockups adjacent and parallel to scale building exterior wall. 3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. F. Pre installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in anenclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 02/13/087 G003-1 06\XC0481 0 I I I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I 04810-5 Unit Masonry 2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. Architect will determine extent of defects allowed in mock- up and pre-installation conference. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, hea(jers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners including window jambs and sills where drywall furring is not scheduled for interior CMU work unless otherwise indicated. B. Integral Water Repellent: Pr9vide units made with integral water repellent for CMU at exterior back-up wall and veneer only. 1. Int~gral Water Repellept: Liquid polymeric, integra! water-repellent admixture that does not reduce fl~xural bong strel19th. Units mad~ with integral water repellent, when test~d as a. wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. a. Products: 1) 2) 3) Agdiment Incorporated; Block Plus W-'10. Grace Construction Products, a unit ofW. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheopel. C. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Weight Classification: Lightweight. 2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 12" nominal; 11 5/8" actual b. 8" nominal; 7 5/8" actual c. 6" nominal; 5 5/8" actual d. 4" nominal; 3 5/8" actual 4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. 02113/087 G003-106\XC04810 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 04810-7 Unit Masonry G. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. 1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Products: a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: 1) 2) 3) 4) Capital Materials Corporation; Riverton Portland Cement Lime Custom Color. Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime. Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement. H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. J. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. . Products: a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA. K. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. c. Master Builders, Inc.; Color Cure Mortar Admix or Rheomix Rheopel. L. Water: Potable. 02/13/087 G003-106\XC04810 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 04810-9 Unit Masonry 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. a. Products: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier-44. . Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt Thru-Wall Flashing. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. B. Adhesives, Primers, Termination Mastic and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with . ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). C. WeepNent Products: Use the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from cotton, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes. Use only for weeps. D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Configuration: Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings. 2. Products: 02/13/087 G003-106\XC04810 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 04810-11 Unit Masonry 4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S or N. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated below: 1 . Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 140. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 02/13/087 G003-1 06\XC0481 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I 04810-13 Unit Masonry 6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. 7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 8. All masonry openings to be constructed so as to not vary by more than % inch horizontally. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than~half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 8-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 8-inches. ,Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal8-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of eMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into .grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. . 2. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 02/13/087 G003-1 06\XC0481 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 04810-15 Unit Masonry 1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry. 2. Seal joints with tape or sealant in compliance with manufacturer recommendations. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 8 inches beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement and is to apply to veneer anchors. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T -shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and otherspecial conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.8 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 02/13/087 G003-106\XC04810 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I 04810-17 Unit Masonry C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1 . Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible. 3. Space weep holes formed from wicking material 16 inches o.c. and at 8" from corners and ends of openings in wall. 4. Extend wicking material 18" along base of cavity wall just beyond adjacent weep hole. 5. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set. E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities directly above weep material and flashing to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACIS30.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI S30.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height., . 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections. 1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 2. Do not extend veneer masonry higher than 4 feet vertically without veneer section being visually inspected for all veneer anchors being installed. 02/13/087 G003-1 06\XC0481 0 I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I 1 I I I 04810-19 Unit Masonry 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and non masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 7. After all masonry has been cleaned and accepted by Architect and thoroughly dry, apply clear acrylic sealer according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. END OF SECTION 04810 02113/087 G003-106\XC04810 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I 1 I I I I ,ii>.... -- -.l "- Contract n"ocuments and DetailedSpecifieations , for Deans Bridge RoadMSW Landfill Maintenance Facility \ Volume 2 of. 2 Augusta-Richmond County Commission Counell Betty Beard Joe Jackson Corey Johnson Jerry Brigham Joe Bowles Jimmy Smith Alvfu Mason J.R. Ratney . Calviri R()llan~ Sr. Don A. Grantham Mayor DekeS. Copenhaver REVISED SEPTEMBER 15, 2008 (TO INCORPORAtE ADDENDA ITEMS) -. Bid Item.#OS.157 ;0,-",,',..-.:: Deans Bridge itoadMSW Earidfi11.... Mainrenance.Facility. ..... . -' .",' ~.~". ... ....... . . ..' .", _, -C._'. ,'. " ....." ,:0... ',' _',_ . nidOpenmg:.. 812612008.~f3:()O):j;m;$30().OO.... "-- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I . DEANS BRIDGE ROAD MSW LANDFILL. MAINTENANCE FACILITY AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I NOTICE "All addenda items for Specifications and Drawings issued prior to the date of Bid opening have been incorporated into these Contract Documents. II A "(1)" directly left of Specification Section number on the title page of a section indicates that section has been replaced or added by addendum. A "1,, in the text of a Specification Section indicates that an addendum item has been incorporated. Atlantic Coast Consulting, Inc. 630 Colonial Park Drive, Suite 110 Roswell, Georgia 30075 (770) 594-5998 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 0001 0 Table of Contents SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME 1 OF 2 Section Title Division 0 - Bidding and Contract Requirements 00020 00100 00300 00410 00413 00414 00420 00481 00500 00550 00610 00620 00697 00698 00699 00700 00800 Invitation to Bid Instructions to Bidders Bid Bid Bond Partnership Certificate Corporate Certificate Statement of Qualifications Noncollusion Affidavit of Subcontractor Contract Pre-Award Oath Performance Bond Payment Bond Notice of Award Notice to Proceed Certificate of Owner's Attorney General Conditions Supplementary Conditions Division 1 - General Requirements 01010 01011 01016 01025 01026 01041 01051 01055 01060 01070 01080 01201 01202 01310 01320 01340 01500 01510 01540 01562 01590 01610 Summary of Work Unique Requirements Occupancy Measurement and Payment Schedule of Values Coordination of Work Grades, Lines and Levels Construction Staking Regulatory Requirements Abbreviations, Symbols, Trade Names, and Materials Applicable Codes and Standards Preconstruction Conference Progress Meetings Construction Schedules Construction Videos and Photographs Shop Drawings) Product Data, and Samples Construction Facilities Temporary Utilities Job Site Security Dust Control Field Offices Transportation and Handling 06/19/08 G003-106\XC00010 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00010 - 3 Table of Contents Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07841 07920 Penetration Fireproofing Joint Sealants Division 8 - Doors and Windows 08110 08210 08331 08410 08710 08800 08830 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors Overhead Coiling Doors Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts Finish Hardware Glazing Mirrors Division 9 - Finishes 09220 09260 09310 09511 09651 09671 09680 09912 Portland Cement Plastering Gypsum Board Assemblies Ceramic Tile Acoustical Panel Ceilings Resilient Tile Resinous Flooring Carpet Painting Division 10 - Specialties 10101 10155 10200 10505 10522 10801 Visual Display Surfaces Toilet Compartments Louvers and Vents Metal Lockers Fire Protection Specialties Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories Division 12 - Furnishings 12491 Horizontal Louver Blinds Division 13 - Special Construction 13125 Metal Building Systems Division 15 - Mechanical 15010 15140 15190 15242 15260 General Requirements Supports, Anchors, and Sleeves Identification of Piping Vibration Isolation Piping Insulation 06/19/08 G003-106\XC00010 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C-0.2 C-0.3 C-1.0 C-2.0 C-3.0 C-3.1 C-4.0 C-4.1 C-4.2 C-4.3 C-5.0 C-5.1 C-5.2 C-5.3 C-5.4 A-O.O A-0.1 A-0.2 A-0.3 A-1.0 A-1.1 A-1.2 A-2.0 A-3.0 A-3.1 A-4.0 A-5.0 A-5.1 A-5.2 A-5.3 A-6.0 LS-1 .0 LS-1.1 S-1 .OA S-1.0B S-1.1 S-1.2 S-2.1 S-3.1 S-4.1 S-4.2 E-2.1 E-2.2 E-2.3 E-3.1 E-3.2 LP-2.1 M-2.1 M-2.2 M-3.1 00010-5 Table of Contents Overall Site Plan Existing Conditions Plan Grading and Drainage Plan Site and Utility Plan Storm Drain Profiles Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Profiles Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution Control Plan Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution Control BMP Notes Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution Control CMP Notes Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution Control Details Miscellaneous Details Miscellaneous Details Miscellaneous Details Miscellaneous Details Miscellaneous Details General Information Door, Window and Louver Types Door and Window Details Wall Types Maintenance Building - First Floor Plan Maintenance Building - Second Floor Plan Maintenance Building - Roof Plan Maintenance Building - Exterior Elevations Maintenance Building - Enlarged Plans Maintenance Building - Stair Sections Maintenance Building - Reflected Ceiling Plan Maintenance Building - Wall Sections Maintenance Building - Wall Sections Maintenance Building - Wall Sections Maintenance Building - Plan Details Maintenance Building - Interior Elevations Maintenance Building - First Floor Life Safety Plan Maintenance Building - Second Floor Life Safety Plan Maintenance Building - Structural Notes Maintenance Building - Structural Notes Maintenance Building - Foundation Plan Maintenance Building - Foundation Sections Maintenance Building - Mezzanine Framing Plan Maintenance Building - Column & Foundation Schedules Maintenance Building - Typical Details Maintenance Building - Typical Details First Floor Plan - Power First Floor Plan - Lighting Second Floor Plan - Power and Lighting Details and Schedules - Power Details and Schedules - Lighting Lightning Protection Plan First Floor Plan - HV AC Second Floor Plan - HV AC Details and Schedules - HVAC 06/19/08 8003-1 06\XC0001 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05120 Structural Steel PART 1 - GENERAL . 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel. B. Approval by the Owner or his representative of shop drawings prepared by the fabricator indicates the fabricator has correctly interpreted the contract requirements. Approval does not relieve the fabricator of the responsibility for accuracy of detailed dimensions on shop drawings nor the general fit-up of parts to be assembled in the field. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Work: Miscellaneous Metal Steel Joists 1.3 SUMMARY B. C. D. 1.4 A. B. A. This Section includes fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on drawings including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical connections, and types of steel required. Structural steel is that work defined in American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on drawings. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5. Refer to Division 3 for anchor rod installation in concrete, Division 4 for anchor rod installation in masonry. SUBMITTALS General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Product data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications (including specified standards). 02/13/08 G003-106XC05120 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05120 - 3 Structural Steel 1. Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated: 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary." 4. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections. 5. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 6. ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use." B. Fabrication and Erection Qualifications: 1. Fabricator and erector must have a minimum of five years experience with a proven record of satisfactory work. 2. Fabricator and erector must have had work of similar type of construction to be considered as "satisfactory work". 3. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether the fabricator and erector satisfactorily meets these requirements. 4. "Steel Fabricator" and "Steel Erector" shall be an organized steel company engaged in this type of work. 5. If any fabricator or steel erector is doubtful as to whether he meets these requirements, he may submit information to the Architect at least 1 0 days before the bid opening in order to qualify. C. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Qualification" requirements. 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility and shall be at no cost to the Owner. D. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not.relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. E. Design of Members and Connections: 02113/08 G003-106XC05120 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05120-5 Structural Steel H. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: 1 . Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 2. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying with ASTM A 325. 3. Where indicated as galvanized, provide units that are zinc coated, either mechanically deposited complying with ASTM B 695, Class 50, or hot-dip galvanized complying with ASTM A 153. I. Direct Tension Indicators: 1. ASTM F 959, type .as required. 2. Use on all A325 and A490 bolts. J. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. K. Structural Steel Primer Paint: SSPC - Paint 11. L. Nonmetallic. Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: 1. Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining product containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with CE-CRD-C621. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide parabolic camber in structural members where indicated. 2. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. B. Connections: 1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except unfinished bolts may be used for temporary bracing to facilitate erection. Bolts through 4" wide beam flanges shall be 5/8" diameter. Other bolts shall be 3/4" diameter. 3. Unless indicated or detailed otherwise on plans, all connections shall be detailed and designed by the fabricator under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Georgia. Connections shall be designed as unrestrained flexible connections described as type 02/13/08 G003-106XC05120 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05120 - 7 Structural Steel 1. Provide holes for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded nut welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 3. All loose plates, bolts and inserts between the structural steel and work of other trades are to be furnished by the fabricator and set by other trades. 4. All loose lintels to be furnished by the fabricator and set by other trades. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. General: 1. Shop-paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2 inches of embedded areas only. 2. Do not paint surfaces to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction- type connections. 3. Do not paint surfaces scheduled to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. 4. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning." 2. SP-2 "Hand-Tool Cleaning." 3. SP-3 "Power-Tool Cleaning." 4. SP-6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 5. SP-7 "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning." C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. D. Painting: Provide a two-coat, shop-applied paint system complying with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Paint System Guide No. 7.00. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such 02/13/08 G003-106XC05120 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05120 - 9 Structural Steel 2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. 3. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. . 5. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. F. Field Assembly: 1. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 2. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. 3. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. G. Erection Bolts: 1. On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. 2. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. I. Touch-Up Painting: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. 2. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 3.2 QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. 02/13/08 G003-106XC05120 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05120-11 Structural Steel 1. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. 2. Perform visual inspection of all welds. 3. Perform tests of tension and moment resisting welds using one of the following procedures: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomJ:>lete fusion or penetration not acceptable. c. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality leveI12-2T." d. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. END OF SECTION 05120 02113/08 G003-106XC05120 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05220 Steel Joists PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED The extent of steel joists is shown on the drawings, including basic layout and type of joists. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Work: Structural Steel Miscellaneous Metal 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel joists and joist girders for floor and roof framing. Types of joists required include the following: 1 . K-Series Open Web Steel Joists. B. Refer to Division 3 Sections for installation of anchors set in concrete. C. Refer to Division 4 Sections for installation of anchors set in masonry. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data and installation instructions for each type of joist and accessories. 1. Include manufacturer's certification that joists comply with SJI "Specifications." . C. Shop Drawings, Steel Joists: 1. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of joist units, special connections, jointing and accessories. Include the mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists and bridging. 2. Shop drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect and review action received prior to fabrication. When corrections are required, copies shall be returned noting such corrections. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05220 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05220 - 3 Steel Joists C. Extended End: Provide extended ends on joists where indicated, complying with SJI"Specifications" and load tables. D. Ceiling Extension: Provide ceiling extensions in areas having ceilings attached directly to joist bottom chord. Provide either an extended bottom chord element or a separate unit, to suit manufacturer's standards, of sufficient strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. E. Top Chord Extension: Provide top chord extensions ("S" type) on joists where indicated, complying with SJI "Specifications" and load tables. F. Bridging: Provide horizontal or diagonal type bridging for joists and joist girders, complying with SJI "Specifications." 1. Provide bridging anchors for ends of bridging lines terminating at walls or beams. G. End Anchorage: Provide end anchorages, including steel bearing plates, to secure joists to adjacent construction, complying with SJI"Specifications." H. Header Units: Provide header units to support tail joists at openings in floor or . roof system not framed with steel shapes. I. Shop Painting: Remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories before application of shop paint. 1. Apply one shop coat of steel prime paint to joists and accessories, by spraying, dipping, or other method to provide a continuous dry paint film thickness of not less than 0.50 mil. J. Sloped Joists: Where roof joists slopes exceed %" in 1'-0", joist manufacturer shall increase member sizes to include effects of increase and/or decrease in member loads and spans. K. Lateral Support: 1 . Joists shall be designed to receive lateral bracing only at locations and spacings specified for deck fasteners or for angle, channel bulb tee or other steel purlins or sub-purlins. L. Joists supporting roofs shall be designed for a net wind uplift of 20 Ibs. per square foot. Provide additional lines of bridging as required by joist manufacturer. . 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05220 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I I I SECTION 05310 Steel Deck PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel deck units for floor applications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of decking and accessories. a. Provide test data for mechanical fasteners used in lieu of welding for fastening deck to supporting structures. 2. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage details, and conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing, and other accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. American Welding Society (AWS), 01.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 3. Steel Deck Institute (SOl), "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks." B. Qualification of Field Welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding operators in accordance with "Welder Qualification" procedures of AWS. 1. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. Owner will bear expense of removing and replacing portions of decking for testing purposes if welds are found to be satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and replace with new acceptable work. 02113/08 G003-106\XC05310 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1 I I I I 05310 - 3 Steel Deck 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush, telescoped, or nested 2-inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and width as indicated. B. Non-Composite Steel Form Deck: Provide fluted sections of metal deck as permanent forms for reinforced concrete slabs. C. Metal Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates for end-abutting floor deck units of not less than same thickness as decking. Form to match contour of deck units and approximately 6 inches wide. D. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for cell raceways and openings between decking and other construction, of not less than O.045-inch min. (18 gage) sheet steel. Form to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's . recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein. B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being . permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. C. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. D. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or deflection. E. Do not place deck units on concrete supporting structure until concrete has cured and is dry. F. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. G. Do not use floor deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured. H. Fastening Deck Units: 1. Fasten floor deck units to steel supporting members by nominal 5/8- inch puddle welds or elongated welds of equal strength, spaced not more than 12 inches o.c. with a minimum of two welds per unit at each support. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0531 0 I I I I I I I I I ",-. I I, I I I I I I I I SECTION 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISl's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." E. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings." 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05400 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.3 A. 2.4 05400-3 Cold Formed Metal Framing EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: r. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch. 2. Flange Width: 2 inches. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: C. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch. b. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for 1-story structures and 1 inch plus twice the design gap for other applications. 2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0677 inch. D. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure. FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Anchor clips. 4. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 5. Joist hangers and end closures. 6. Hole reinforcing plates. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05400 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05400-5 Cold Formed Metal Framing C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTAllATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISl's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-Iine joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05400 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05400~ 7 Cold Formed Metal Framing 1. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 2. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated .on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1 . Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. . 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05400 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05400 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05450 Pre-Engineered Light Gauge Steel Truss Frames PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes all work and supplementary items required to complete the proper installation of the pre-engineered light gauge roof trusses as shown on the Contract Documents and specified herein including headers, outriggers, supplemental rafters and incidental framing for a complete assembly within the extent shown on the drawings. B. Pre-engineered light gauge steel trusses include planar structural units consisting of welded, screwed or bolted connected members which are fabricated, cut and assembled prior to delivery or at the job site. C. Types of prefabricated trusses include: 1. Gable-shaped trusses 2. Monopitch trusses 3. Irregular shaped trusses 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Structural Steel: Section 05120. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of material procurement, referred to thereafter by basic designation only form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by reference thereto. 1. American Iron and Steel Institute: a. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. American Society of Testing Materials: a. ASTM A 446: "Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality." Grade A, Fy = 33 ksi: 18 gauge and lighter Grade D, Fy = 50 ksi: 16 gauge and heavier 02113/08 G003-106\XC05450 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05450 - 3 Pre-Engineered Light Gauge Steel Truss Frames B. Time fabrication and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING COMPONENTS A. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, framing shapes and components for pre-engineered light gauge prefabricated steel trusses shall be as manufactured or recommended by United States Gypsum Company or approved equal. B. Design, analysis and computation of section properties shall be in conformance with the Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members of the American Iron and Steel Institute. C. All galvanized structural members shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A 446-89, Grade A (minimum yield of 33 ksi) for 18 gauge steel or lighter and ASTM A 446-89, Grade D (minimum yield of 50 psi) for 16 gauge or heavier. D. All steel members shall be galvanized with a G60 coating minimum. 2.2 FASTENERS A. Framing components shall be field or shop fabricated and joined to one another by means of welding or through the use of screws as recommended by the component provider. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Visually examine and verify that receiving surfaces of the substructure have no apparent defects or errors which would result in substandard workmanship. Additionally, the following items shall be installed and inspected prior to roof truss installation. 1. Conditions of Surfaces. a. Exterior bearing plates: i. Properly positioned within Bond Beam. ii. Installed so as to allow complete and adequate contact with truss connection member. b. Interior bearing plates: 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05450 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.4 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 05450 - 5 Pre-Engineered Light Gauge Steel Truss Frames zinc content paint capable of providing an equal or greater degree of protection than the original G-60 galvanized coating. ERECTION Prefabricated trusses shall be braced against racking. Lifting of trusses shall be done so as to not cause local distortion in any member. All light gauge steel framing shall be erected by approved methods using equipment of adequate capacity to safely perform the work. The contractor is responsible for checking the dimensions and assuring the fit of all members and trusses before erection begins. All work shall be erected plumb and level and to dimensions, spacings indicated on the drawings. Components shall be of the size and spacing shown on the approved shop drawings. Provide web stiffeners and reinforcement at reaction points where required by analysis or to suit details. Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not to damage truss members. H. Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed. I. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated. J. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design spacing, withstand live and dead loads, and comply with other indicated requirements. K. Do not cut or remove truss members. END OF SECTION 05450 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05450 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05500 Metal Fabrications PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. . 3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 4. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. 5. Metal bollards. 6. Metal downspout boots. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing." 3. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs." 4. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05500 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 A. 8. 2.3 A. 8. c. 2.4 A. 05500-3 Metal Fabrications FERROUS METALS C. D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and 8ars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. E. NONFERROUS METALS Aluminum Castings: ASTM 826/8 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 8ronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and 8ars: ASTM 8 36/8 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper). Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM 8 151/8 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500. FASTENERS B. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM 8 633, Class FelZn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. Steel 80lts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. Stainless-Steel 80lts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1 2. Anchor 8olts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. C. D. 1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized. E. F. G. H. I. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. Machine Screws: ASME 818.6.3. Lag 801ts: ASME 818.2.1. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME 818.6.1. Plain Washers: Round, ASME 818.22.1. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05500 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.6 A. 05500-5 Metal Fabrications G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. H. FABRICATION, GENERAL B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05500 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05500-7 Metal Fabrications 2.12 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.13 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05500 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05500-9 Metal Fabrications B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05500 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05510 Metal Stairs PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. 2. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings. 3. Division 06 Section" Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 4. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for metal backing for anchoring railings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 1. Prefilled metal-pan stair treads. 2. Paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. A WS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05510 I I I I I I I I II I I I I I I I I I I D. E. F. 2.4 A. 2.5 05510-3 Metal Stairs C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 Ib/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. D. E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. F. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials (at maintenance building stair only). FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts,c1ips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05510 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I . 05510-5 Metal Stairs a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with smooth soffits. 2.7 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Interior Stairs Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05510 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes steel pipe and tube railings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 2. Division 06 Section" Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 3. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for metal backing for anchoring railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 Ibf/ ft. applied vertically downward. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05521 I I I. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05521-3 Pipe and Tube Railings B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn). B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated . or required by structural loads. 2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: 1. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. Brackets attaching railing to wall surfaces shall be type that has concealed fastener. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05521 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 05521-5 Pipe and Tube Railings G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. . 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. Form changes in direction as follows: I. J. 1. By inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. K. L. M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. N. 1 . At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged. 1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings. O. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05521 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.3 A. 3.4 A. 3.5 A. 3.6 A. 3.7 05521-7 Pipe and Tube Railings 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. . C. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. RAILING CONNECTIONS B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post. ANCHORING POSTS Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete. ANCHORING RAILING ENDS Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends. . ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. B. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed gypsum board partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 02/13/08 G003-106\XC05521 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 06105 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include Division 06 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC06150 I I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I 06105-3 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated. items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. . 2. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B. Identify fire-retard ant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking ottesting and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof construction. 3. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No.2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of mixed southern pine; SPIB. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC06150 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 06105-5 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code. 4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code. 5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in SBCCl's Standard Building Code. 6. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 7. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC06150 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. 4. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 5. Closet and utility shelving. 6. Shop finishing of interior woodwork. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For panel products high-pressure decorative laminate adhesive for bonding plastic laminate solid-surfacing material fire-retard ant-treated materials cabinet hardware and accessories. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures faucets soap dispensers and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC06402 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 06402-3 Interior Architectural Woodwork 1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.'7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations offraming, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2:1 MATERIALS 02/13/08 G003-106\XC06402 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 A. 06402-5 Interior Architectural Woodwork 3. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Legend. FIRE-RETARDANT - TREA TED MATERIALS General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified. B. 1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire-Retardant- Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type: 1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. 2. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. 5. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials. C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 Ibf, respectively. 2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi; modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 Ibf, respectively. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC06402 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.4 A. 2.5 A. 06402-7 Interior Architectural Woodwork I. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A 156.9. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. C. D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement PV A Urea formaldehyde Resorcinol. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. FABRICATION, GENERAL B. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch. E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC06402 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.8 A. S. 06402-9 Interior Architectural Woodwork D. 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: PVC tape, O.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. . Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, O.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: F. 1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations in Finish Legend and Schedule. G. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. PLASTIC-LAMI NATE COUNTERTOPS High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Schedule and Legend. C. D. E. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC06402 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 06402-11 Interior Architectural Woodwork 1. AWl Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane. 2. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 3. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 5. Color: Match approved flush wood door stain. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backprim ing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Fire-Retardant- Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC06402 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1 I I I SECTION 07841 Penetration Fireproofing PART 1 . GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general prOVIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire walls fire partitions fire barriers and smoke barriers. 2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T -Rated Systems: Forthe following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. 3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers, provide Provide through-penetration firestop . 02/13/08 G003-106\XC07841 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.5 07841-3 Penetration Fireproofing 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Product Certificates: For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product manufacturer. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. C. Source.Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 02/13/08 G003-106\XC07841 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 2.3 07841-5 Penetration Fireproofing 5. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance . Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Collars. 3. Steel sleeves. FILL MATERIALS A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials. B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to' concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC07841 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 07841-7 Penetration Fireproofing B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. . B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07841 02/13/08 G003-106\XC07841 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07920 Joint Sealants PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints in exterior stucco systems. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors ... and windows. e. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces. f. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slab&. b. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: . a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. g. Other joints as indicated. 4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring. 02113/08 GOO3-106\XC07920 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 07920-3 Joint Sealants B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint- Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC07920 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~ I I I 07920-5 Joint Sealants 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues. capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC07920 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 07920-7 Joint Sealants 3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant ES-1: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. Vulkem 116; Mameco International. b. Vulkem 230; Mameco International. c. Sikaflex - 1a; Sika Corporation. d. NP 1; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25 4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. . a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Coated glass, aluminum coated with a high- performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, and wood. 6. Applications: All exterior joints except glazing and horizontal traffic bearing joints. B. Single-Component Pourable Urethane Sealant ES-2: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Products: Provide one of the following: a. Chem-Calk 950; Bostik Inc. b. Vulkem 45; Mameco International. c. Vulkem Nova 300 SSL; Mameco International. d. NR-201; Pecora Corpo(ation. e. Flexiprene PSI-951; Polymeric Systems, Inc. f. SL 1; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use[s] Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use 0 Joint Substrates: aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, and stone. 6. Applications: Exterior sidewalk and building to walk joints. C. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant ES-3: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in- 02113/08 G003-1 06\XCO 7920 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08110 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes standard hollow metal doors and frames. 8. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. 2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 3. Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 4. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. 8. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SOl A250.8. C. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. 1.4 SU8MITT ALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes. 8. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 02113/08 G003-106\XC08110 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08110-3 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Habersham Metal Products Company. 6. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 7. Kewanee Corporation (The). 8. Mesker Door Inc. 9. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll~Rand company. 10. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold~Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 (ZF120) G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 02113/08 G003-1 06\XC0811 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.4 A. 08110-5 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted O.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Tolerances: Comply with SD1117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SOl A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SOl A250.4 for physical performance level: . 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SOl A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SOl A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES B. General: Comply with ANSI/SOl A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. C. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as knocked down face welded full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. D. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: O.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 02/13/08 GOO3-106\XC08110 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.9 A. 08110-7 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames FABRICATION B. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. . Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SOl 117 ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astraga/s: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk, fJat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0811 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08110-9 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.10 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SOl A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINA liON A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. O. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARA liON A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 02113/08 G003-106\XC08110 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.4 A. 08110-11 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105 UBC Standard 7-2. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1 . Secure stops with countersunk f1at- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0811 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08210 Flush Wood Doors PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for requirements for veneers from the same flitches for both flush wood doors and wood paneling. 2. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size. and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic-laminate door faces and factory-finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. Finish 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08210 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08210-3 Flush Wood Doors 1 .7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Marlite. 5. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 6. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 7. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 8. Vancouver Door Company. 9. VT Industries Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. D. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. 02/13108 G003-106\XC08210 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08210-5 Flush Wood Doors 9. Blueprint Match: Where indicated, provide doors with faces produced from same flitches as adjacent wood paneling and arranged to provide blueprint match with wood paneling. Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork." 10. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Applied wood edges of same species as faces and covering edges of crossbands. 11. Core: Structural composite lumber. 12. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 13. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 8. Metal Louvers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Louvers Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek company. c. Hiawatha Incorporated. d. L & L Louvers, Inc. e. LL Building Products, Inc.; a division of GAF Materials Corporation. f. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a Mestek company. g. McGill Architectural Products. 2. Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V. 3. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, factory primed for paint finish. C. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Louvers Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek company. c. Hiawatha Incorporated. d. L & L Louvers, Inc. e. LL Building Products, Inc.; a division of GAF Materials Corporation. f. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; a Mestek company. g. McGill Architectural Products. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08210 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08210-7 Flush Wood Doors B. Finish doors at factory. C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish. D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished. E. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match Graham / ASSA Abloy #600 wheat. 4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08210 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of manually and electric-motor-operated overhead coiling doors: 1. Insulated service doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying. 3. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 Ibf/sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and outward. B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000 cycles and for 10 cycles per day. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the following: 1 . Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08331 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.3 08331-3 Overhead Coiling Doors 1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc"'coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel (SS) sheet; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (2275) coating designation. a. Minimum Base-Metal (Uncoated) Thickness: 0.0209 inch (0.55 mm). b. Flat profile slats. 2. Insulation: Fill slat with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane-foam-type thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within metal slat faces. . 3. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal curtain slat. B. Endlocks and Windlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. C. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm) thick; galvanized, stainless-steel, or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats. 1. Astragal: Provide a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene; for placement between angles or fitted to shape, as a cushion bumper for interior door. Curtain Jamb Guides for Service Doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) thick galvanized steel sections complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks. D. HOODS AND ACCESSORIES A. Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and provide fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Fabricate hoods for steel doors of minimum 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 2. 1 Deleted 3. Shape: Round. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC08331 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.5 08331-5 Overhead Coiling Doors E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycle requirements specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. B. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging chain and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc. Door-Operator Type: Provide wall-, hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft-type door operator unit consisting of electric motor, belt-reduction drive, and chain and sprocket secondary drive. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors complying with NEMA MG 1; with overload protection; sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps (0.2 m/s) and not more than 1 fps (0.3 m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. F. G. 1. Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type. 2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building electrical system. 4. Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. H. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1. Provide interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08331 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08331-7 Overhead Coiling Doors 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm-connected fire-release system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors. END OF SECTION 08331 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08331 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08410 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior and interior aluminum-framed storefronts. a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 2. Exterior and interior manual-swing aluminum doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section. 2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this Section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 1 . Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 02/13/08 GOO3-1 06\XC0841 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.4 A. 08410-3 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure. but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). H. Water Penetration Under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). 1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1 No uncontrolled water penetrating systems or appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and cannot damqge adjacent materials or finishes is not considered water leakage. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.92 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503. I. J. K. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having minimum STC 32 according to ASTM E 413 and an OITC 26 according to ASTM E 1332, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 90. . SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. 1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified profeSSional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the system to the exterior. 3. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 02/13/08 GOO3-1 06\XC0841 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08410-5 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts 1. 7 WARRANTY A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements of that deteriorate as defined in the Section within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components to function properly. 2. Warranty period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systems is based on YKKAP America products Yes 45F-I, 500 entrances. Subjectto compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. . 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM 8 209 (ASTM 8 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM 8 308/8 308M. B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 02/13/08 G003.106\xC08410 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.5 2.6 A. 08410-7 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts DOORS A.. Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors, for manual swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1 - 3/4 inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125 inch thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: As indicated wide stile; 5 inch nominal width. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide non removable glazing stops on outside of door. DOOR HARDWARE General: Provide heavy-duty units in sizes and types recommended by entrance system and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. B. 1. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 30 Ibf (133 N) required to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) required to open door to . minimum required width. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 Ibf (22.2 N). Scheduled Door Hardware: C. 1. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products listed for each door unless noted otherwise complying with standards referenced in this Article and with requirements for description, quality, type, and function. Pivot Hinges: 1. Standard: BHMA A 156.4, Grade 1. Match door finish. 2. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf. D. Locking Devices, General: Do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 1. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) required to release latch. 02/13/08 GOO3-1 06\XC0841 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.8 A. 8. 08410-9 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-rriil (O.762-mm) thickness per coat. c. Pre-Finished Metal Trim: Minimum 0.094 inch thick aluminum trim used to finish transitions in framing not furnished by manufacturer. Attachment of trim shall be made with no exposed fasteners. FABRICATION C. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1 . Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system. D. E. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. 1 . At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. F. G. 02113/08 G003-106\XC08410 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 0841 0-11 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure. 2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. I. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 ~eet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Entrances: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 1. For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch measured to the leading door edge. END OF SECTION 08410 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08410 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08710 Finish Hardware PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsIons of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,. apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work under this section comprises of providing hardware specified in this Section and noted on the drawings for a complete and operational system. For any door or opening not mentioned in the following, provide hardware of the same type as a similar opening. 1. Including but not limited to: a. Hinges-Pivots b. Flush bolts c. Locksets and Cylinders d. Exit Devices and Mullions e. Push/Pull Plates f. Closers g. Kick/Mop and Protection Plates h. Stops, Wall Bumpers, O.H. Controls and Silencers i. Thresholds. Sweeps and Weatherstrips j. Miscellaneous Trim and Accessories B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06402 - Architectural Casework 2. Section 08110 - Hollow Metal Work 3. Section 08210 - Wood Doors 4. Section 08331 - Coil Doors 5. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 6. Division 16 - Electrical 1.4 REFERENCES A. Applicable publications: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. B. State and Local Codes, including the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 02113/08 G003-106\XC08710 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.6 A. 08710-3 Finish Hardware C. Coordination Schedule for Electrified Hardware: Produce a separate hardware schedule aside from the complete hardware schedule that contains headings with electrified hardware. Use same heading numbers as used in overall hardware schedule. After each heading include Wiring Schematic for each hardware item in the hardware set and wiring diagrams (riser, elevation and point to point). Provide copies of electric hardware schedule to each installer, security contractor and Division 16 contractor whose scope of work is impacted by electrified hardware. D. Monitoring: Including but not limited to, Monitor Strikes, Latch bolt monitors, Door status switches, door position switches. Wire normally closed. Certification of Compliance: Submit information necessary to indicate compliance with these specifications as required. E. F. Templates: Deliver templates for finish hardware items to the door and frame supplier within three [3] working days after receipt of approved schedule. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturers Requirements: Repair or replace damaged or defective materials prior to shipment. Repaired products to meet OEM (Original Manufacturers Equipment) standards. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with office and warehousing facilities that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project. Supplier to be a factory direct authorized distributor for hardware products supplied under this section. C. Field Verification: Field verify existing doors and frames receiving hardware. Verify hardware is compatible with the existing door/frame preparation, reinforcements and existing conditions. Advise Architect in writing of any incompatibility issues, including but not limited to, items that will not operate properly, are improperfor conditions, or will not remain permanently anchored. Resolve these issues not less than ten days prior to bid. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ADA, State Codes, Local Codes, NFPA 80, NFPA101 and NFPA 252 in providing hardware for fire rated openings. E. Product Standards: BHMAlANSI A156. 1. Hinges, Mortise Locks and Latches, Closers, Thresholds, Trim, Finishes and other miscellaneous hardware: Complying with requirements of ANSI A 156 standards for quality, construction, performance and operation applicable for specified hardware. Current edition of each ANSI Standard is considered the standard for reference based on project bid date. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08710 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08710-5 Finish Hardware PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide ADA compliant hardware in fully functional hardware sets and systems that operate and function to meet code, manufacturer, system and hardware set requirements. Including but not limited to drop plates, glass bead shim kits, vertical rod extensions, mounting brackets, wall magnet extension sets, anchors, fasteners, cylinders, cores, trim rings, collars, cams, tail pieces, wiring diagrams (elevation/riser/point to point), power supplies, product variants, fasteners and options as required for proper installation and operation of hardware. Provide fire rated hardware at rated openings. 2.2 FASTENERS A. Furnish with hardware with appropriate necessary screws, bolts and other fasteners of suitable size and type to anchor hardware in position for a long life under hard use. Install hardware with fasteners furnished by the hardware manufacturer. USE ONLY MANUFACTURER FURNISHED FASTENERS. USE OF ANY OTHER FASTENERS WILL VOID LABEL AND WARRANTY. TEK SCREWS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. B. Furnish fasteners where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts and other anchors according to the material to which the hardware is to be applied and the recommendation of the hardware manufacturer. MOUNT EXIT DEVICES, DOOR CLOSERS AND O.H. CONTROLS WITH THRU BOLTS (TB or SNB) TO WOOD AND HOLLOW METAL DOORS. Provide template machine screws for installation of exit devices, closers and overhead controls on plastic laminate, FRP and aluminum doors. Cast thresholds to have cast on anchors. Provide extruded thresholds with stainless steel screws and lead expansion shields. C. Design of anchors to harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. 2.3 HINGES A. Butt Hinges: Hinges to conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2000 Buts and Hinges. Provide five-knuckle, button tip, template butts with non-rising loose pins. Provide non-removable (NRP) and Safety Studs (SSF) for exterior out-swing doors as shown. Exterior out-swing doors to have hinges of stainless steel or non-ferrous brass or bronze, as shown. Hinge pin and fasteners to be of same material and finish as hinge leafs. Where stainless steel or brass or bronze hinges are specified provide resistant bearings. Interior doors to have wrought steel hinges, polished and plated to match the specified finish. Provide wide throw hinges where required to clear casing and/or trim and to allow doors with magnetic hold opens to hold open a 900 or 1800 parallel to wall as detailed on drawings. Provide three [3] hinges for doors up to 90 inches in height and one [1] additional hinge for every 30 inches or fraction there of above 90 inches. Provide hinges 4 %" in height for doors up to 36" in width and 5" in height for doors over 36" in width. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08710 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.5 2.6 2.7 08710-7 Finish Hardware the lock case apart. Lock case to be 12ga. Lock front to be 1/8" thick. Locks to meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI A 156.13, 1000 Series, Operational Grade 1. D. E. Provide lock functions as listed in the individual hardware sets, no exceptions. TRIM A. B. Provide trim for locks and latches as manufactured by lock/latch manufacturer. Tactile Warning: Milled or knurled. Abrasive tactile warning methods are not acceptable. KEYING AND CYLINDERS A. Locksets and cylinders to be Grandmasterkeyed, Masterkeyed and Construction Masterkeyed into a new Sargent Signature Key system and Keyed alike in sets as required. Key system to be compatible with key system on existing scale building. B. Permanent keying to be handled between the Owner, the Architect and the Lock Supplier. C. Provide the following: 1. Six [5] Grand Master Keys each system. 2. Six [5] Master Keys each system. 3. Three [2] change keys per cylinder or lockset. The lock supplier to deliver permanent keys directly to the owner. A receipt signed by the Owner will evidence this delivery. D. E. Cylinders: Provide cylinders with optional trim rings, tail pieces and cams as required for proper installation. Keys: Stamp each change key with its corresponding space number. F. EXIT DEVICES A. Exit devices and trim to be of one manufacturer as hereafter listed and in the hardware sets for continuity of design and consideration of the warranty. Exit devices to be "UL" listed for life safety. Exit devices for labeled fire doors to have "UL" labelfor"FIRE EXIT HARDWARE". Exit devices are to be mounted with thru bolts. Devices to conform to NFPA-80, NFPA-101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements. Lever and pull plate type trim to be thru bolted to the lock stile 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC0871 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.11 08710-9 Finish Hardware a. Kick Plates: .050" thick, 10" high x 2" LOW (Less than Door Width). Adjust width as required where used with edge guards and edge guard continuous hinges. Adjust height as required to accommodate bottom rail dimensions. b. Mop Plates: .050" thick, 4" high x 1" LOW (Less than Door Width). Adjust width as required where used with edge guards and edge guard continuous hinges. c. Armor Plates: .050" thick, 31" high x 2" LOW (Less than Door Width). Adjust width as required where used with edge guards and edge guard continuous hinges. d. Push Plates: .050" thick, 8" wide x 16" high. Adjust width and height as required where narrow stile doors are used. e. Pull Plates: Plate .050" thick, 4" wide x 16" high. Pull: 8" C to C X 1" diameter round 'pull. Pull to be solid stock. Hollow or wrought pulls are not acceptable. Provide concealed mounting. 2. Wall Stops: Provide cast wall stops with appropriate anchor for wall condition. Acceptable manufacturers: Burns, McKinney, Trimco. 3. D.H. Stops & Holders: Provide thru bolt fasteners for surface mounted stops and holders. Acceptable manufacturers: Rixson, Corbin Russwin, Sargent. 4. Lock Guards: Provide stainless steel lock guards (latch protectors) minimum 14 gage with frame stud and carriage or thru bolts. ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE A. General: Provide hardware in compliance with A156.31.2001 Electrified Strikes and Activators, A156.29.2001 Exit Locks and Alarms, A156.25.2002 Electrified Locking Devices, A 156.23.1999 Recom mended Practices for Electromagnetic Locks, and A 156.15.2001 Closer Holder Release Devices. B. Acceptable products subject to compliance: 1. Surface Mounted Electromagnetic Locks: Folger Adam, Sargent, Securitron. 2. Concealed Electromagnetic Locks: Securitron. 3. Magnetic Holders: Provide extensions as required for door to hold open parallel to wall. HES, Rixon, Sargent. 4. Power Supplies: Provide power supply (model with accessories and quantity) as recommended by manufacturer of load for optimal product performance. Where proprietary power supplies are used and require connection to line voltage coordinate with Division 16 and include additional cost in bid to cover added expens~: HES, Precision, Sargent, Securitron, Yale, Corbin Russwin, Von Duprin. 5. M.D.V./Power Controller: Provide power controller for each solenoid or coil operated load. Including but not limited to Electric Locks, Electrified Lever Trim, Electric Strikes, Electric Exit Hardware: HES 2005 Smart Pac II. 6. Electric Strikes: HES, Folger Adam, Securitron. 7. Door Position Switches: Mount switches with screws. 02/13/08 GOO3-1 06\XC0871 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 7. Zero 2.13 FIRE AND SMOKE SEALS 08710-11 Finish Hardware A. Seals for fire are provided under section 08110 and 08210. 2.14 SILENCERS A. Provide punch in silencers of pneumatic design for mounting to metal door frames. Silencers to meet the requirements of ANSI A156.16. Provide 3 each silencers for single doors and 2 each silencers for pairs of doors. Do not provide silencers for doors with weather seals or fire/smoke seals that mount on the stop face where silencers are mounted. 2.15 KEY CABINET A. Provide key cabinet with hinged panel and pin tumbler lock in a surface mount wall unit. Key cabinet to have a two tag type system with a key loan register for the tracking of signed out keys. Size cabinet to hold keys for other locks in facility (freezers, fire alarms, machines, bleachers, etc..) and allow for 50% expansion of approved key system. Hardware supplier to set up key cabinet, tag, mount and inventory keys. B. Acceptable manufacturers and products: 1 . T el-Kee 2.16 FINISHES A. Hardware finish in general to be US26D, dull chrome or US32D, satin stainless steel or as shown in hardware sets. B. Finishes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Exterior Butt Hinges: Exterior Continuous Hinges: Interior Hinges: Exit Devices: Closers: Flat Goods: Protection Plates: Push Plates and Pulls: Thresholds and Weather Stripping 02113/08 G003-1 06\XC0871 0 US32D/630 ALUM US26D/652 US32D/630 Alum Paint/689 US32D/630 US32D/630 US32D/630 Mill I I 08710-13 Finish Hardware I 3.4 HARDWARE SETS I SET #01 Doors: M02, M04, M17, M42, M45, M47, M49, M55, M56 I Each door to receive: 3 Hinges TA27144 1/2 X 41/2 260 MC I 1 Lockset 10 8205 LNJ 260 SA 1 Wall Stop WS02 US32D MC 3 Door Silencers S1M MC I SET #02 Doors: M20, M21, M58 Each door to receive: I 3 Hinges T4A37864 1/2 X 4 1/2 260 MC 1 Lockset 108237 LNJ 260 SA I 1 Closer 351 P9 EN SA 1 Kickplate K50 10/1 X 2/1 LOW US32D MC 1 Wall Stop WS02 US32D MC I 1 Smoke Seal MCKS88 MW SET #03 I Doorn:M03,M14,M19,M43 Each door to receive: 3 Hinges TA27144 1/2 X 4 1/2 260 MC I 1 Lockset 10 8204 LNJ 260 SA 1 Wall Stop WS02 US32D MC 3 Door Silencers S1M MC I SET #04 Doors: A28, A29, A41, M18 Each door to receive: I 3 Hinges TA23144 1/2 X 4 1/2 320 MC 1 Privacy Set 8265 LNJ 260 SA 1 Mop plate KP50 6" x 1" LOW US32D MC I 1 Wall Stop WS02 US32D MC 3 Door Silencers S1M MC I SET #05 Doors: A15, A17 Each door to receive: I 3 Hinges T4A37864 1/2 X 41/2 260 MC 1 Door Pull DP603 US32D MC 1 Push Plate P053 US32D MC 1 Closer 351 0 EN SA I 1 Kickplate K50 10" x 2/1 LOW US32D MC 1 Mop plate KP50 6/1 x 1/1 LOW US32D MC I 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08710 I I 08710-15 Finish Hardware I 1 Wall Stop WS02 US32D MC 3 Door Silencers S1M MC I SET #11 Doors: M11 I Each door to receive: 3 Hinges TA23144 1/2 X 4 1/2 320 MC 1 Privacy Set 8265 LNJ 320 SA I 1 Mop plate KP50 6" x 1" LOW US32D MC 1 Kickplate KP50 6" x 2" LOW US32D MC 1 Wall Stop WS02 US32D MC I 3 Door Silencers S1M MC SET #12 I Doors: M08, M52 Each pair to receive: 6 Hinges TA23144 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 320 MC 2 Flush Bolt FB01M US26D MC I 1 Lockset 10 8245 LNJ 260 SA 2 Overhead Holder 590 series 260 SA 1 Dust Proof Strike DPS1 US32D MC I 1 Th reshold Mck177 AV MW 1 Set Weatherstrip MCK303 A V head x jambs MW I SET #13 Doors: M07 Each door to receive: I 3 Hinges TA23144 1/2 X 41/2 NRP 320 MC 1 Lockset 10 8245 LNJ 26D SA 1 Overhead Holder 590 series 260 SA 1 Set Weatherstrip MCK303 A V head x jambs MW I 1 Threshold MCK177 AV MW SET #14 I Doors: M05, M23, M24, M25, M31, M35, M41, M51 Each door to receive: 3 Hinges TA2314 41/2 X 41/2 NRP 320 MC I 1 Keypad Lock 10 G1-8278 PKJ 260 SA 1 Closer 351 CPS EN SA 1 Kickplate K50 10" x 2" LOW US32D MC I 1 Weatherseal Gasket 82-0500 SA 1 Set Weatherstrip MCK303 A V head x jambs MW 1 Threshold MCK2005 A V LAR MW I SET #15 Doors: MOO I Each door to receive: 1 Keypad Lock 10 G1-8278 PKJ 260 NOTE: All other hardware is by door supplier. I 02/13/08 GOO3-1 06\XC0871 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08800 Glazing PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general prOVISIons of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Glazed entrances. 3. Interior borrowed lites. 4. Storefront framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" and "Aluminum Storefront and Entrances" for structural-sealant glazing requirements. 2. Division 08 Section "Mirrors." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence offailure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 02113/08 GOO3-106\XC08800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.5 A. B. 1.6 A. 08800-3 Glazing 1. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 2. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. SUBMITTALS C. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for glass. 1. Each color of tinted float glass. 2. Each type of patterned glass. 3. Ceramic-coated spandrel glass. 4. Wired glass. 5. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: 1. Tinted float glass. 2. Coated float glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Glazing gaskets. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. E. F. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. 02113/08 GOO3-106\XC08800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08800-5 Glazing manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). 4. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated. C. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified. 02113/08 GO03-106\XC08800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.3 A. 2.4 A. 08800-7 Glazing 5. Any material indicated above. GLAZING TAPES Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 1 00 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometerhardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. E. F. 02113/08 G003-106\XC08800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08800-9 Glazing FULLY TEMPERED FLOAT GLASS Designation Type 3 Description Clear, fully tempered, float glass Thickness 1/4" Class Class 1 (clear), Kind FT (fully tempered) Performance Characteristics Visible Light Transmittance Summer Daytime U-Value Shad in Coefficient 88-90 percent 1 .02 - 1 .13 0.98 - 1.00 Winter Night time U-Value Outdoor Visible Reflectance 1~09-1.10 8 ercent maximum CLEAR POLISHED WIRE GLASS Designation Type 3 Description Clear, fully tempered, float glass Thickness 1/4" Class Class 1 (clear), Kind FT (fully tempered) Performance Characteristics Visible Light Transmittance Summer Daytime U-Value Shadin Coefficient 88-90 percent 1.02 - 1.13 0.98 - 1.00 Winter Night time U-Value Outdoor Visible Reflectance 1.09-1.10 8 ereent maximum TINTED, INSULATED, GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET Designation Type 2 Description Tinted, insulated glass unit Outer Lite Fully tempered, monolithic tinted float glass Thickness 1/4" Class Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and light reflecting on surface #2), Kind FT (fully tempered). Color Blue (Basis of Design: Viracon Azuria VE-55 Air Space 1/4" hermetically sealed, dehydrated Sealing System Deal seal, primary and secondary sealants: Polyisobutytene and silicone Spacer Manufacturer's standard metal Specifications Dessicant: Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction Inner Lite Clear, heat-strengthened monolithic float glass Class Class 1 (clear), Kind HS (heat-strengthened) Thickness 1/4" Total Unit Thickness: 3/4" Performance Characteristics Visible Light Transmittance 36 percent Summer Daytime U-Value 0.29 Winter Night time U-Value 0.31 Shading Coefficient 0.26 Outdoor Visible Reflectance 9 percent Solar Heat Gain Coefficient 0.22 Indoor Visible Reflectance 16 percent Relative Heat Gain 56 02113/08 GOO3-106\XC08800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.4 A. 08800*11 Glazing G. demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. J. TAPE GLAZING B. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. C. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. G. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. H. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC08800 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08830 Mirrors PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section, 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors. 1. Tempered glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing. B. Related Sections include Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and spandrel lites. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, .edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. 2. Mirror mastic. 3. Mirror hardware. B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work. c. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, signed by product manufacturer. 02/13/088 G003-106\XC08830 , I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 08830-3 Mirrors 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below: 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 .. PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mirrors by one of the following: 1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. Gardner Glass Products. 3. Gilded Mirrors, Inc. 4. Guardian Industries Corp. 5. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. 6. Lenoir Mirror Company. 7. Messer Industries, Inc. 8. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. 9. Sunshine Mirror. 10. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. 11. WP America, Inc.; Binswanger Mirror Products. 12. Walker Glass Co., Ltd. 2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS A. Tempered Clear Glass Mirrors: Comply with ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, for blemish requirements in annealed float glass before silver coating is applied, for coating requirements, and with other requirements not affected by tempering process; and comply with ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied. 1. Nominal Thickness: 4.0 mm 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 02/13/088 G003-106\XC08830 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 9220 Portland Cement Plastering PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general prOVISions of the Contract, including General ~nd Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes moisture barrier, vapor barrier and proprietary exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) and finish system (Sto Powerwall NexT) over metal lath. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed with exterior portland cement plaster (stucco). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, provide manufacturer's specification guidelines for system installation. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared colored finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), and prepared on rigid backing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09220 I I I I I I 2.3 A. I B. I I I I ~ I I I I I I I I 09220-3 Portland Cement Plastering a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). b. Dale/lncor. c. Unimast, Inc. 2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self furring. a. Weight: 3.4 Ib/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m). ACCESSORIES General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Accessories: 1 . Manufacturers: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). b. Dalellncor. c. Unimast, Inc. 2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 5. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc. a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing masonry corners. 6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc; one-piece-type, folded pair of - unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 8. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 9. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4-to-5/8-inch (6.34-to-16-mm) wide; with perforated flanges. 02/13/08 G003.106\xC09220 I Ii I I. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09220-5 Portland Cement Plastering 1. Products: a. StoSilco Flex 1.0. 2.. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of color selections. 2.8 PLASTER MIXES A. Sto Powerwall @ Stucco (SBCCI PST & ESI Report No. 9838B): Mix 200 Ibs of sand to an 80 Ib b~g of Sto Powerwall Stucco and 4 to 6.5 gallons (15-25 L) of clean water. Add 1/2 to 2/3 of the required water, 1/2 of the sand, and one bag of Sto Powerwall Stucco in a paddle type mortar mixer. Then add the rest of the sand and sufficient water to achieve a uniform mix of workable consistency. Mix for 3 to 5 minutes after materials are in the mixer. Stucco material can be retempered once in the first hour after mixing. Avoid retempering after the first hour and discard material older than 1.5 hours. Keep mix ratio consistent from batch to batch and mix each batch separately. Use only the amount of water necessary for a workable mix. Use of excess water is detrimental to performance. . B. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coats; comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. 3~3 AIRI MOISTURE BARRIER INSTALLATION: A. Install manufacturer's required glass fiber reinforcing mesh over all seams and perimeter wall openings within gypsum substrate, followed by moisture barrier per manufacturer's written instructions. B. Vapor Barrier Installation: After moisture barrier work is complete, cover entire wall surface with vapor barrier. 02/13/08 GOO3-106\XC09220 I I, I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09220-7 Portland Cement Plastering B. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to pre-mixed finish coat according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from doorframes, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 09220 02/13/08 G003.106\xC09220 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Exterior gypsum board panels for exterior walls, ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Non-load-bearing steel framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for non-load-bearing steel framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. . 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 02/13/08 GOO3-106\XC09260 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09260-3 Gypsum Board Assemblies a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). b. Size: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41.3 by 41.3 mm). C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange, with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (2180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm). D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (2180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) 2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (2180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 8. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.7 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated on drawings. C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track. D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) 2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. 02/13/08 GOO3-106\XC09260 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09260-5 Gypsum Board Assemblies 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2.7 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where edge of wall board terminates into dissimilar materials. c. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated on drawings. 2.8 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide acoustical sealant for exposed and concealed joints: 1. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. 02/13/08 GOO3-106\XC09260 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09260-7 Gypsum Board Assemblies 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use proprietary deflection track at top of wall scheduled to underside of structure. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Secure angle hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 02113/08 GOO3-106\XC09260 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09260-9 Gypsum Board Assemblies 1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Construction: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner . track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. H. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) 600 mm o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.C. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring' members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit. 4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 1 O-inch (250-mm) staples fabricated from 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter, tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member. 3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 02/13/08 GOO3-106\XC09260 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09260-11 Gypsum Board Assemblies M. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. I nstall acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. N. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications. O. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c. 3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. . 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09260 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09260-13 Gypsum Board Assemblies 3. Level 4: At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply two additional separate coats of the joint compound over flat joints. Apply one additional coat of the joint compound over interior angles. Apply three separate coats of the joint compound over fastener heads and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. This drywall finish is to be applied to all spaces scheduled to receive exposed gypsum wallboard, excluding those spaces listed under Level 5 finish. 4. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. Apply this finish at the following spaces only: Vestibule 101, Lobby A 102, Conf/Classroom A 139 and Director A 143. E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to requirements within Portland cement plaster spec where scheduled. F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect 10 days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation. 2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings: a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. c. Installation of air-duct systems. d. Installation of air devices. e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing. f. Installation of ceiling support framing. END OF SECTION 09260 02113/08 GOO3-106\XC09260 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09310 Ceramic Tile PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsIons of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Unglazed porcelain tile. 2. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 3. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated. B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499). C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A 137.1. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. 02/13/08 GOO3-1 06\XC0931 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09310-3 Ceramic Tile D. Store liquid latexes in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below to Using Agency that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article. 02113/08 GOO3-1 06\XC0931 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.5 A. 2.6 A. 09310-5 Ceramic Tile 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS Manufacturers: 1. Bonsai, W. R., Company. 2. Custom Building Products. 3. LA TlcRETE International Inc. 4. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. B. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A 108.1 A and as specified below: 1. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part. or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A 118.4, consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site. Organic Adhesive (Thin Set): ANSI A1361, Type I, prepackaged. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated. 1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. a. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and wider. All joints to be 1/4" wide. C. D. E. ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS General: Provide manufacturer1s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 02113/08 G003-1 06\XC0931 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09310-7 Ceramic Tile 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A 108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A1 08 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. Verify that floor substrates do not vary in flatness by a maximum of 1/4 inch in 10'-0". 02113/08 G003-106\XC09310 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.4 A. 3.5 A. 09310-9 Ceramic Tile H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A1 08.10. 2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A 108.6. FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TeA installation methods and ANSI A 108 Series of tile installation standards. B. 1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A 108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm). Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be.exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer togrout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. c. D. E. CLEANING AND PROTECTING Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09310 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceilings consisting of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. 6-inch- ((150-mm-)) square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2. Set of 12-inch- ((300-mm-)) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09511 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 A. 2.3 A. 09511-3 Acoustical Panel Ceilings ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each produ~t type. 1. APC-1: For use as indicated in finish schedule. a. Finish: White, factory applied, washable finish. b. Size: 2' x 2'. c. Edge: Tegular beveled edge. d. Sound Transmission Class: CSTc 35-39. e. Match: Armstrong "Cirrus" angled tegular #584. f. Suspension System: SS-1 g. ASTM E1264 Classification: Type III, Form 1, Pattern E1 h. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2) The Celotex Corporation. 3) USG Interiors, Inc. 2. APC-2: For use as indicated in Finish Schedule a. Finish: White, factory applied, washable finish b. Size: 2' x 2' c. Edge: Square d. Sound Transmission Class: 35 e. Match: Armstrong Cortega Square lay-in #770 f. Suspension System: SS-1 g. ASTM E1264 Classification: Type III, Form 2, Pattern CD h. Manufacturers: 1) Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2) The celotex Corporation. 3) USG Interiors, Inc. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct- hung metal suspension. systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufactureris standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09511 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09511-5 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 2.4 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one ofthe following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. PL Acoustical Sealant; Chemrex, Inc., Contech Brands. b. Ac-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. c. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. 1. Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." . 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09511 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09511-7 Acoustical Panel Ceilings with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet ( (3 mm in 3.6 m)). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3.4 CLEANING & EXTRA STOCK A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. B. Document delivery of extra stock to Owner at location as directed by Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 09511 02/13/08 GOO3-106\XC09511 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09651 Resilient Tile PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition tile (VeT). 2. Resilient wall base and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. 1. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color and pattern required. D. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method ind icated by an independent testing agency acceptable to State Fire Marshal's Office. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store tiles on flat surfaces. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09651 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09651-3 Resilient Tile 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Congoleum Corporation 3. Mannington Mills, Inc. 4. Tarkett Inc. B. Class: 2 (through-pattern tile) C. Wearing Surface: Smooth D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) E. Size: 12 by 12 inches F. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE RB1 A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Johnsonite 3. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 4. Mondo Rubber International, Inc: 5. Roppe Corporation B. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid) D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe) E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch F. Height: 4 inches G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. H. Outside Corners: Job formed I. Inside Corners: Job formed. J. Surface: Smooth. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09651 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09651-5 Resilient Tile E. Material: Rubber. F. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated above by reference to Manufacturer's standard designations. 2.7 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair Tread Nose Filler: Two part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nozing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09651 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09651-7 Resilient Tile F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. I nstall wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair tread nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09651 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09671 Resinous Flooring PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes resinous flooring systems with epoxy body coat(s). 1. Application Method: Troweled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required. C. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches ( (150 mm)) square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project. D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. E. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring component. F. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component, signed by manufacturer. G. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who is experienced in applying resinous flooring systems similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to resinous flooring manufacturer. Applicator must submit a list of a minimum of 5 completed projects of similar size and complexity to this work. 1 . Engage an installer who employs only persons trained and approved by resinous flooring manufacturer for applying resinous flooring systems indicated. 2. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09671 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09671-3 Resinous Flooring 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application. No coatings will be Applied when substrate temperatures are below 50 degrees and the surface temperature must be 5 degrees above the dew point. B. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application. C. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not less than 24 hours after application, unless manufacturer recommends a longer period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESINOUS FLOORING 09671.A A. Products specified herein are manufactured by the Tnemec Company Inc, and are specified as a standard of quality. B. 1Equivalent material manufactured by Crossfield Products Corp, Stonehard (Stoneshield SL T) and Dur-A-Flex Inc and Key Resin Company may be submitted for approval by the architect. Request for substitution shall include manufacturer's literature for each product giving the name, generic type, solids by volume and recommended dry film thickness. No request for substitution shall be considered that would decrease film thickness or offer a change in generic type of coating specified. Manufacturer's certified test reports showing that the substitute product (s) equal or exceed the ASTM performance of the specified products as outlined as the standard of quality. C. System Characteristics: 1. Color and Pattern: As indicated by product designation listed above in Finish Schedule. 2. Wearing Surface: Manufacturer's standard orange-peel texture with a low gloss finish. 3. Integral Cove Base: 4 inches high. 4. Overall System Thickness: 1/8 inch. D. System Components: Manufacturer's standard components that are compatible with each other and as follows: 1. System A (RSI designation in Finish Legend) - Tnemec Series 237/237/237/287 or Equal a. Primer Coats: Tnemec Series 2370r Equal 1) Resin: Modified Polyamine Epoxy. 2) Formulation Description: 100 percent solids. 3) Application Method: Squeegee and backrolled 4) Thickness of Coats: 6.0 - 8.0 mils dry 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC09671 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.2 A. 09671-5 Resinous Flooring c. 1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows: a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup. 2. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. 3. Verify that concrete substrates are dry. a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with application only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor- emission rate of 31b ofwater/1 000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg ofwater/92.9 sq. m) of slab in 24 hours. b. If the moisture content exceeds 3 pounds per 1,000 sq. ft. in a 24 hr period, The Koester VAP 1 2000 system must be applied per manufacturers instructions prior to the application of the resinous coating system. 4. Verify that concrete substrates have neutral Ph and that resinous flooring will adhere to them. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions. D. Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations. APPLICATION General: Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated. B. 1. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes. 3. At substrate expansion and isolation joints, provide joint in resinous flooring to comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners. C. Apply troweled or screeded body coat(s) in thickness indicated for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids. When cured, sand to remove trowel marks and roughness. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09671 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09680 Carpet PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet, carpet cushion, and installation. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements relating to this Section: 1. Division 3 Sections for curing compounds and other concrete treatments compatibility with carpet and carpet cushion adhesives. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for materials and installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract . and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of carpet material, and installation accessory specified. Submit manufacturer's printed data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response characteristics. Submit methods of installation for each type of substrate. C. Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used"for the Work. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material type, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and carpet schedule. Submit the following: 1. 12-inch square samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 12-inch samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. D. Maintenance data for carpet to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including manufacturer's recommended frequency for maintaining carpet. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. Include cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09680 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09680-3 Carpet PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products specified and scheduled in Finish Legend Architect will allow for a custom match of carpet scheduled by another manufacturer. The scheduled product establishes color, pattern and aesthetic qualities. The acceptance of products other than scheduled product requires compliance with carpet construction and aesthetic qualities judged solely by the Architect and is final. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete-Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by the carpet manufacturer. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit productsand subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified in this Section and those of the carpet manufacturer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet ( (6 mm in 3 m)), noncumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09680 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09912 Painting PART 1. - GENERAL ~ .- 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. Where drawings indicate "exposed" structure, overhead structure and all items attached shall remain natural or unpainted. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork. b. Acoustical wall panels and suspension system. c. Toilet enclosures. d. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. e. Light fixtures. f. Prefinished doors. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Furred areas. b. Ceiling plenums. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09912 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. 1.5 A. 09912-3 Painting application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.. B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit 3 samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete Unit Masonry: 4-by-8-inch100-by-200-mm). Samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. b. Ferrous Metal: 4-inch- (1 OO-mm-) square Samples of flat metal and .6-inch- (150-mm-) long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish. Mock Ups: As defined in Quality Assurance. QUALITY ASSURANCE Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09912 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 A. 2.3 A. 09912-5 Painting B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado). 3. lei Paint Stores, Inc. (Dulux Paint). 4. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 5. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 6. Tnemec PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL B. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. C. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Legend. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated-high-performance latex block fillers. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No. 285: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.1 mils (0.206 mm). 2. Coronado; 946-11 Super Kote 5000 Commercial Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.4 mils (0.214 mm). 3. Dulux Paint; Bloxfil 4000-1000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 to 14.5 mils (0.178 to 0.368 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 to 12.5 mils (0.152 to 0.318 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils (0.203 mm). 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09912 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09912-7 Painting B. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 Speed Hide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Masonry Primer B28W300: Applied. at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). Interior Concrete Block Filler for Epoxy Coating: Acrylic or epoxy block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer as sufficient to fill pores. C. 1. lei: Bloxfil 4000 Interior / Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler. 2. PPG: 97-68X Series Aquapon Polyamide-Epoxy Block Filler. '3. S-W: Epoxy Ester Masonry Filler Sealer B61W2 Series. 4. Tnemec: Series 130 Envirofill Waterborne Cementitious Acrylic. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primerforinterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). 3. Dulux Paint; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; Prep Rite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). D. Interior Gypsum Board Primer for Epoxy: Factory formulated primer / sealer: 1. lei/Devoe: DR50801 at a day film thickness of 1.4 mils. 2. S-W: PrepRite 200 Latex Primer at a day film thickness of 1.4 mils. 3. Tremec: Series S1-792 PVA Sealer at a day film thickness of 1.0 to 2.0 mils. E. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied ata dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. Dulux Paint; 4130-6130 Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 02113/08 G003-106\XC09912 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09912-9 Painting 2.8 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 2. Coronado; 28 Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Flat Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm). 3. Dulux Paint; 1200-XXXX Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall & Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). B. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274: Applied at a dry film thickness of not I~ss than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 2. Coronado; 30-Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Eggshell Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 3. Dulux Paint; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series Speed Hide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.25 mils (0.032 mm). 5. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041. mm). C. Interior Semi-Gloss 'Epoxy Finish on Drywall: 1. lei/Devoe: DP25U9XX as a dry wilm thicknes per coat of 2.9 mils. 2. S-W: Series B70 and B60V15 Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy as a dry film thickness per coat of 2.5 to 3.0 mils. 3. Tnemec: Series 113 or 114 H.B. Tnemec Tufcoat at a dry film thickness of 3.0 to 5.0 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. PDCA P4. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09912 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.3 A. 09912-11 Painting 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 10/NACE NO.2. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. APPLICATION General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. . Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings on these items, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09912 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.4 A. 3.5 09912-13 Painting F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 6. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory,;primed finish for field painting. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and boxes attached to walls 2. Equipment supports. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. G. H. I. J. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. CLEANING Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09912 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 09912-15 Painting 2., Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. (This system typical all interior gypsum wallboard assemblies scheduled to receive paint, unless noted otherwise.) a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 3. Moderate Environment (Semi Gloss Finish): Two finish coats over a primer.(this system typical at drywall column furring and drywall ceilings exposed at Maintenance Building. a. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended primer. b. Finish Coat: Semi gloss epoxy. C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over all exposed ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over all exposed interior zinc-coated metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. END OF SECTION 09912 02/13/08 G003-106\XC09912 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 10101 Visual Display Surfaces PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Markerboards. 2. Tackboards. 3. Visual display conference units. B. Related Sections include Division 6, Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking concealed in wall to support display surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Tackboard: Framed or unframed tackable surface. B. Visual Display Boards: Chalkboards, markerboards, and tackboards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1 . Show location of panel joints. 2. Include sections of typical trim members. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated and as follows: 1. Actual sections of porcelain-enamel face sheet tack assembly. 2. Fabric swatches of vinyl-fabric-faced tack assemblies. 3. Samples of accessories involving color selection. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display surface through one source from a single manufacturer. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC10101 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 A. H. 2.3 A. 10101-3 Visual Display Surfaces MATERIALS, GENERAL Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: ASTM A 424, enameling-grade steel, uncoated thickness indicated; with exposed face and edges coated with primer, 1.7-to-2.5-mil- (0.043-to-0.064-mm-) thick ground coat, and color cover coat; and concealed face coated with primer and 1.7-to-2.5-mil- (0.043-to-0.064-mm-) thick ground coat. 1. Matte-Finish Cover Coat: Low reflective; chalk wipes clean with dry cloth or standard eraser. Minimum 2.0-to-2.5-mil- (0.051-to-0.064-mm-) thick cover coat. Cover and ground coats shall be fused to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures but not less than 1250 deg F (677 deg C). B. a. Product: PolyVision Corporation; p3 ceramicsteel Chalkboard. Melamine: Thermallyfused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. C. D. E. F. G. Hardboard: AHA A 135.4, tempered. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. Cork Sheet: MS MIL-C-15116-C, Type II. Vinyl Fabric: FS CCC-W-408, Type II, burlap weave; weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd. (440 g/sq. m); with flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063. CHALKBOARD ASSEMBLIES Porcelain-Enamel Chalkboard Assembly: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated chalkboard assembly of 3-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.021-inch- (0 .53-mm-) thick, porcelain-enamel - face sheet with matte finish. 1. Manufacturers: a. A-1 Visual Systems. b. AARCO Products, Inc. c. ADP/Lemco, Inc. d. Bangor Cork Company, Inc. e. Best-Rite Manufacturing. f. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc. g. Ghent Manufacturing Inc. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC10101 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10101-5 Visual Display Surfaces 1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard snap-on trim with no visible screws or exposed joints. B. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous. 1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures. C. Map Rail: Provide the following accessories: 1. Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork approximately 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. 2. End Stops: Located at each end of map rail. 3. Map Hooks: Two map hooks for every 48 inches (1220 mm) of map rail or fraction thereof. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive. B. Visual Display Boards: Field assemble visual display boards, unless otherwise indicated. C. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum. Miter corners to neat, hairline closure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for visual display surfaces. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove dirt, scaling paint, projections, and depressions that will affect smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC1 0101 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10101-7 Visual Display Surfaces 4. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Height: 48 inches 6. Mounting: Wall. 7. Mounting Height: 72" to top AFF. B. Tackboard 10101.C: assembled. 1. Tack Surface: Vinyl-fabric-faced tack assembly. 2. Edges: Concealed by trim. 3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height: 48 inches. 5. Mounting: Wall. 6. Mounting Height: 72" to top of AFF. C. Visual Display Conference Unit 10101.8: 1. Cabinet Material: Solid or veneered Honduras mahogany with stained finish to match doors. 2. Fixed Rear Panel: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly. a. Color: White. 3. Inside Surface of Doors: Vinyl-fabric-faced tack assembly. 4. Corners: Square. 5. Accessories: a. Flip-chart pad clamp. 6. Width: 48 inches (1219 mm). 7. Height: 48 inches (1219 mm). 8. Mounting Height: 72" to top of AFF. END OF SECTION 10101 02/13/08 G003-106\XC10101 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 10155 Toilet Compartments PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid-polymer units for overhead braced and floor anchored toilet enclosures. B. Related Sections include Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. C. Related Section include Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports used for attaching ceiling hung units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC1 0155 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 2.3 10155-3 Toilet Com partments ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. FABRICATION A. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage. (At Maintenance Building only). B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (61 O-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for com"partments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Provide on each standard door and out-swing door. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC1 0155 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 10200 Louvers and Vents PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. 2. Wall vents (brick vents). B. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for building wall vents (brick vents) into masonry. 2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors. 3. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; Le., the axes of the blades are horizontal. C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be consid~red to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures indicated below: 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC1 0200 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10200-3 Louvers and Vents 2. AWS 01.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." C. SMACNAStandard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTMB221 (ASTMB221M),Alloy6063-T5, T-52,orT6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 4. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. E. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC 10200 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.4 A. 10200-5 Louvers and Vents c. Airolite Company, LLC (The). d. All-Lite Architectural Products. e. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. f. Construction Specialties, Inc. g. Greenheck Fan Corporation. h. Nystrom Building Products. i. Reliable Products, Inc. j. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. 2. Louver Depth: 4 inches (125 mm). 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.03 mm). 4. Mullion Type: Concealed . 5. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 8.3 sq. ft. (0.77 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch- (1220-mm-) high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 950 fpm. c. Air Performance: Not more than 0.1 O-inch wg (25-Pa) static pressure drop at 550-fpm (2.8-m/s) free-area exhaust intake velocity. 6. Size: As indicated on drawings. LOUVER SCREENS General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2.. Screening Type: Insect screening. B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 2. Finish: Mill finish unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh, 0.012-inch (0.30-mm) wire. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC 1 0200 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10200-7 Louvers and Vents 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.9 STAINLESS-STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Repair sheet finish by grinding and polishing irregularities, weld spatter, scratches, and forming marks to match surrounding finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. 02113/08 G003-1 06\XC 10200 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 10505 Metal Lockers PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Knocked-down, quiet metal lockers. 2. Locker benches. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Uncoated Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Indicated as the minimum thicknesses. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker and bench. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show sloping tops filler panels and other accessories. 2. Include locker identification system. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For metal lockers and locker benches, in manufacturer's standard sizes. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of metal locker manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC10505 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 0505-3 Metal Lockers 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware. 2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. 3. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type and finish installed: a. Locks. b. Identification plates. c. Hooks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B, suitable for exposed applications. B. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type exposed bolt heads, and self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC10505 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 0505-5 Metal Lockers 1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches (381 mm) wide; welded to inner face of doors. 2. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors. 3. Sound-Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard, designed to stiffen doors and reduce sound levels when doors are closed, of die-formed metal with full perimeter flange and sound-dampening material; welded to inner face of doors. 4. Door Style: Unperforated panel. a. Concealed Vents: Slotted perforations in top and bottom horizontal return flanges of doors. F. Hinges: Self-closing; welded to door and attached to door frame with not less than 2 factory-installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, 5 or 7 knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2 inches (51 mm) high. Provide not less than 3 hinges for each door more than 42 inches (1067 mm) high. 2. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel continuous hinge. 3. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel continuous or knuckle type. G. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking device does not protrude beyond face of door; pry resistant. 1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with built-in combination locks, built-in key locks, or padlocks; positive automatic and prelocking. a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches (1219 mm) and higher with 3 latch hooks and doors less than 48 inches (1219 mm) high with 2 latch hooks; fabricated from minimum 0.0966-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick steel; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook. b. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard rattle-free latching mechanism and moving components isolated with vinyl or nylon to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism. Built-in Combination Locks: Key-controlled, three-number dialing combination locks; capable of at least five combination changes made automatically with a control key. 1. Bolt Operation: Automatically locking spring bolt. H. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC1 0505 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.6 1 0505-7 Metal Lockers A. General: Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp; with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. 1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for. a complete installation. B. Unit Principle: Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers for nominal assembly at Project site using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets. Factory weld frame members together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated. D. E. F. Coat Rods: Fabricated from 1-inch- (25-mm-) diameter steel; chrome finished. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates; with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch (9 mm) high. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practicable, without visible fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers. G. H. 1. Sloped top corner fillers, mitered. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. I. 1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends. STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Use manufacturer's standard methods. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC10505 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 0505-9 Metal Lockers 5. Attach sloping top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. 6. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers. D. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide not less than 2 pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to undersides of bench tops, and anchor bases to floor. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. B. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. . Do not permit metal locker use during construction. C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by metal locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10505 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC 1 0505 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 10522 Fire Protection Specialties PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers. 3. Fire-protection accessories. 1 .3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of cabinet finish indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide extinguishers listed and labeled by FM. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate Contract are accommodated. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC10522 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10522-3 Fire Protection Specialties 1. Semirecessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated. D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame . overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). a. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch64-mm backbend depth. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel sheet. F. Door Material: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet. G. Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard tempered float glass, ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Class 1 (clear). H. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, vertical duo panel with frame. I. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Provide minimum 1/2-inch-13-mm- thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails, and hollow-metal design. J. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets. 2. Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets. B. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to wall surface. 2. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door. 02113/08 GOO3-1 06\XC1 0522 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10522-5 Fire Protection Specialties PART 3 . EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets are to be installed. C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb. 3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 10522 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC1 0522 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I , SECTION 10801 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Public-use shower room accessories. 3. Private-use bathroom accessories. 4. Custodial accessories. B. Related Sections include Division 08 Section "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC1 0801 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10801-3 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Capacity: 9- or 10-inch- (228- or 254-mm-) diameter rolls. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No.4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. 6. Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at front. D. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser 10801.J: 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Minimum Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold towels. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, NO.4 finish (satin). 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. 5. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front. E. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle 10801.A: 1. Description: Combination unitfordispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 2. Mounting: Recessed with projecting receptacle. a. Designed for nominal4-inch (100-mm) wall depth. 3. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. 4. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 12 gal. (45.4 L). 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No.4 finish (satin). 6. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner. 7. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment. Liquid-Soap Dispenser 10801.H: F. 1. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 2. Mounting: Deck mounted on vanity. 3. Capacity: 20 oz. (mL). 4. Materials: Stainless steel valve/stem with 6" long spout and clear plastic reservoir G. Grab Bar 10801.B: 1. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 2. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No.4, satin finish. 3. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 4. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. H. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit 10801.F and 10801.G: 1. Mounting: Partition mounted, dual access and Surface mounted. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC10801 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.5 A. 2.6 A. 10801-5 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories B. 4. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO) Toilet Tissue Dispenser 10801.E: C. 1. Description: Double-roll dispenser. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- (114- or 127 -mm-) diameter tissue rolls. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No.4 finish (satin). Towel Bar 10801.M: 1. Description: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) square tube with rectangular end brackets. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Length: 24 inches (610 mm). 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No.4 finish (satin). CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by . one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. Mop and Broom Holder 10801.0: 1. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 2. Length: 36 inches (914 mm). 3. Hooks: Three. 4. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No.4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel. . b. Rod: Approximately1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter stainless steel. FABRICATION General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC10801 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 12491 Horizontal Louver Blinds PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the mini-blinds with aluminum louver slats manually operated and battery powered tilt. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Miniblind: Venetian blind with nominal 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide louver slat. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of horizontal louver blinds. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each colored component of each type of horizontal louver blind indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, prepared on Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Louver Slat: Not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. 2. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide by 24 inches (600 mm) long. 3. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical 02/13/08 G003-106\XC12491 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 12491-3 Horizontal Louver Blinds B. a. Slat Spacing: Not less than every 19.5 mm for 15.7 slats or more per foot (19.5 mm). 2. Nominal Slat Thickness: Not less than 0.006 inch (0.15 mm). 3. Slat Finish: One color as indicated. a. Ionized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. HeadrailNalance: Decorative, integrated headrail/valance not requiring a separate valance or end brackets for finished appearance; formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends; capacity for one blind per headrail. 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of louver slats. C. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, sealed with plastic or metal capped ends top contoured to match crowned shape of louver slat; with enclosed and protected ladders and tapes to prevent their contact with sill. Maximum Light Blocking Blinds: Designed for eliminating all visible light gaps if slats are tilted closed; with tight tape spacing indicated and slats with minimal-sized rout holes for ladders hidden and placed near back edge for maximum slat overlap; with head rail and bottom rail extended and formed for . light-tight joints between rail and adjacent slats or construction. Tilt Control: Consisting of enclosed worm gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing over rotation, and linkage rod, for the following operation: D. E. F. 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand. 2. Length of Tilt Control: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level. 3. Tilt: Two-direction, positive stop or lock out limited at an angle of 75 degrees from zero-degree horizontal, both directions. Lift Operation: Manual, top-locking cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind in either fully opened or fully closed position only and is equipped with a ring pull not more than 4 inches (100 mm) long. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Right side and left side of headrail, respectively unless otherwise indicated~ G. H. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term louver sag. 1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch (25 mm) or Less: Braided string. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings, mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. I. 02113/08 G003-106\XC12491 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I' 12491-5 Horizontal Louver Blinds PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND INSTAllATION A. Install blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located as indicated on drawings. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware, if any. B. Head Mounted: Install headrail at location shown on drawings. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. ' 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 WINDOW TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Place manual operated blinds at the following spaces having exterior window types to fully cover interior opening: 1. All types A windows Maintenance building. END OF SECTION 12491 02/13/08 G003-106\XC12491 I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 13125 Metal Building Systems PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated sets of mutually dependent components including structural framing, roof panels, wall panels, soffit panels and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete foundations, slabs, and anchor-bolt installation. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for exterior and load-bearing walls fabricated from concrete masonry units. 3. Division 07 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for factory-formed metal roof panels at entry structure. 4. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." 5. Division 08 Section "Overhead Coiling Doors." 6. Division 08 Section "Aluminum Storefront and Entrances." 7. Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for metal louvers. 8. Division 09 painting Sections for finish painting of shop-primed structural framing. . 9. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for installing gypsum board as part of metal panel assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Bay: Dimension between main frames measured normal to frame (at centerline of frame) for interior bays, and dimension from centerline of first interior main frame measured normal to end wall (outside face of end-wall girt) for end bays. B. Building Length: Dimension of the building measured perpendicular to main framing from end wall to end wall (outside face of girt to outside face of girt). C. Building Width: Dimension of the building measured parallel to main framing from sidewall to sidewall (outside face of girt to outside face of girt). D. Clear Span: Distance between supports of beams, girders, or trusses (measured from lowest level of connecting area of a column and a ratter frame or knee). E. Eave Height: Vertical dimension from finished floor to eave (the line along the sidewall formed by intersection of the planes of the roof and wall). 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-3 Metal Building Systems effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. B. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal panel assemblies with the following maximum U-factors and minimum R-values for opaque elements when tested according to ASTM C 1363 or ASTM C 518: 1. Metal Roof Panel Assemblies: R-Value: 30 2. Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: R-Value: 19 C. Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 LIs per sq. m) of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative test-pressure difference of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). D. Air Infiltration for Metal Wall Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 LIs per sq. m) of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). E. Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86 Ibf/sq. ft. (137 Pa). F. Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12 Ibf/sq. ft. (575 Pa). G. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of the following metal building system components: 1. Structural-framing system. 2. Metal roof panels. 3. Metal wall panels. 4. Translucent panels. 5. Insulation and vapor retarders. 6. Flashing and trim. 7. Accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-5 Metal Building Systems 1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: a. Name and location of Project. b. Order number. c. Name of manufacturer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. f. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. g. Governing building code and year of edition. . h. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes). i. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code. j. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors. k. AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC-Certified Manufacturer. F. Welding certificates. G. Erector Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erector complies with requirements. H. Manufacturer Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products comply with requirements. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer and member of MBMA. 1. AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and produces metal building systems and components in an AISC-Certified Facility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-7 Metal Building Systems 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness and with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit metal panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 8. Field Measurements: 1. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Established Dimensions for Metal Panels: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal panels without field measurements, or allow for field trimming metal panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions. 1.1 0 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and with foundations required for 1 0 ton girder crane. B. Coordinate installation of equipment supports and roof penetrations, which are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." C. Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supports and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. D. Coordinate steel design with steel layout for 10 ton girder crane. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-9 Metal Building Systems 2.2 STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B or C, structural tubing. F. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1 011/A 1011 M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through 55 (205 through 380), or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480); or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1 008/A 1 008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80 (170 through 550), or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480). G. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550) or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G60 (Z180) coating designation; mill phosphatized. H. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550) or High-Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G90 (Z275) coating designation. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 50 or 80 (340 or 550); with Class AZ50 (AZM150) coating. I. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. J. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-11 Metal Building Systems 2.3 MATERIALS FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED ME,TAL PANELS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550), with G90 (Z275) coating designation. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat Embossed finish. 3. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified or indicated on Drawings: a. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil (0.02 mm) for topcoat. b. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm). 2.4 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS A. Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type I, or NAIMA 202 ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-lb/cu. ft. (8-kg/cu. m) density; 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, continuous, vapor-tightedge tabs; and with a flame-spread index of 25 or less. B. Vapor-Retarder Facing: ASTM C 1136, with permeance not greater than 0.02 perm (1.15 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) when tested according to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method. 1. Composition: White polypropylene vinyl film facing, fiberglass scrim reinforcement, and metallized-polyester film backing. C. Retainer Strips: 0.019-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, formed, galvanized steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing. D. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer. 02113/08 G003-106\XC13125 .1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-13 Metal Building Systems 2.7 STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. General: 1. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. a. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. b. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged arc-welding process. c. Brace compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings. d. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing members. e. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. 2. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing. a. Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts. b. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime uncoated secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. B. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing. 1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated. a. Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard, as approved by Architect. 2. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted. 3. Frame Configuration: Single gable. 4. ExteriorColumn Type: Uniform depth Tapered. 5. Rafter Type: Uniform depth Tapered. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-15 Metal Building Systems E. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows: 1. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345); or ASTM A 529/A 529M, Grade 50 (345); minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) at each end. 2. Cable: ASTM A 475, 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter, extra-high-strength grade, Class B zinc-coated, 7-strand steel; with threaded end anchors. 3. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads. 4. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. 5. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads. . 6. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through diaphragm action of metal panels. 7. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option. F. Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide zinc-plated or hot-dipped galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized. G. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreati ng. 1. Prime primary, secondary, and end-wall structural-framing members to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil. Prime secondary steel framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil on each side. 2. Prime galvanized members with specified primer, after phosphoric acid pretreatment. 2.8 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Trapezoidal-Rib, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels (13125.C). Formed with raised trapezoidal ribs at panel edges and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels. 1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0269 inch (0.70 mm) thick. a. Exterior Finish: Siliconized polyester. b. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-17 Metal Building Systems 2.11 METAL SOFFIT PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required forweathertight installation. B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal roof wall panels. 1. Finish: Match finish and color of metal wall panels. 2.12 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels. 2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet stainless-steel sheet, designed to withstand negative-load requirements. 3. Cleats: Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel sheet stainless-steel sheet or nylon-coated aluminum sheet. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 5. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 6. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacer blocks of thickness required to provide 1 inch (25 mm) standoff; fabricated from extruded polystyrene. C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-19 Metal Building Systems appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following tests and inspections and to submit reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections shall be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections shall be tested and inspected accordin"g to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at inspector's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. C. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. PART 3 .. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Erector, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances. 1. Engage land surveyor to perform surveying. C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-21 Metal Building Systems a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned. G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high-strength bolts. 1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls. H. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings. 1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated. I. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing. J. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buil~ings and Bridges." 3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer. 1. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before metal panel installation. B. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. a. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved. in writing by manufacturer. 2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end laps in alignment. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC 13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-23 Metal Building Systems 5. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 6. Provide metal closures at peaks rake edges rake walls and each side of ridge and hip caps. C. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. D. Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing. 2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. 3. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches (102 mm) minimum. 4. When building height requires two rows of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over metal wall panels at eave height. 5. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 6. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 7. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 8. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. 9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated, o~ if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 10. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. 11. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. B. Field-Assembled, Metal Wall Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. C. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13125-25 Metal Building Systems 3.10 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide forthermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 3. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements; manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fastenerswhere possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used orwould not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 2. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC13125 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 1501 0 General Requirements Part 1 General 1.01 General Requirements A. General conditions, supplementary, and Special Conditions of the Contract govern work under this Section. B. Contractors performing work shall be totally responsible for work and shall coordinate, connect and conform to all sections or divisions of the Specifications and all drawings as required to provide complete systems. C. Applicable provisions of this section apply to and are hereby made part of the other sections of this Division. D. The Drawings and Specifications shall be understood to cover, according to their intent and meaning, complete operating systems as shown on the drawings and specified under appropriate sections of the specifications. The Drawings and Specifications are to be taken together. Work specified and not shown or work shown and not specified shall be performed of furnished as though mentioned in both specifications and drawings. E. Minor items and accessories or devices reasonably inferable as necessary to the complete and proper operation of any system shall be provided for such system. F. Verification of Existing Conditions: No allowance shall be made for failure to investigate site before bidding. G. Coordinate all utility construction and service installation with respective utility. H. The Contractor shall remove and/or relocate existing equipment and devices as required to provide clearance for new construction and to render system operational in existing spaces. 1.02 Codes, Standards and Fees A. International Building Code, 2006 Edition with Revisions and Georgia amendments. B. International Plumbing Code, 2006 Edition with Revisions and Georgia amendments. C. International Mechanical Code, 2006 Edition with Revisions and Georgia amendments. D. National Electric Code- 2005 Edition. E. NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors. F. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning & Ventilating Systems. G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code - 2000 Edition. H. International Fuel Gas Code- 2006 Edition with Revisions and Georgia Amendments 1.03 Special Requirements A. LAYOUT OF WORK: Drawings are Diagrammatic. Correlate final equipment locations with governing Architectural and Structural drawings and existing conditions. Layout work before installation so that all trades may install equipmentin spaces available. Provide coordination 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15010 - 3 General Requirements 1/2" x 11" sheets. Provide correct designation on outside cover and on end of brochures, and an index to contents. Organize the material in an orderly manner and provide reinforced sheets tabbed with the appropriate specification reference number followed by the submittal for that portion of the specification. 5. INCOMPLETE SUBMITTALS SHALL BE RETURNED, UNREVIEWED, TO CONTRACTOR FOR COMPLETION AND RESUBMISSION. 6. Coordinate items submitted under this Section with other trades for ratings and characteristics to insure proper operation, e.g., panel board circuit breaker voltage, poles and amp rating vs. Equipment electrical requirements. C. Shop Drawings 1. Furnish one reproducible and three prints (no more) of shop and installation drawings. The reproducible will be marked with corrections (if any) and returned to the vendor through channels. Prints may be made from the reproducible for distribution. For all drawings requiring correction, after corrections have been made by vendor, submit one reproducible and three prints. The reproducible will be marked with the appropriate review stamp and returned to vendor. The vendor shall issue prints for field use from final review reproducible. All prints use on the job shall bear "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED" stamp of the Engineer and the "APPROVED" stamp of the Contractor. Furnish one reproducible and three prints of joint installation drawings showing mechanical and electrical equipment in each mechanical and electrical room. Floor plans and elevations at a minimum of 1/4" equals 1 I, with dimensions of equipment to meet code requirements. These drawings furnished through General Contractor and developed jointly by Mechanical and Electrical Contractors. NOTE: See individual sections of specifications for required additional submittal data. Additional installation and construction drawings may be required by General Contractor. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I I 1.06 Record As-built Drawings: In accordance with the contract. Part 2 Guarantee 15010-5 General Requirements 2. 01 Furnish one year written guarantee to Owner from date of substantial completion on material and workmanship. 2. 02 Furnish extended guarantee certificate on all items where greater that one year guarantee is specified. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15140 Supports, Anchors And Sleeves Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Pipe, duct, equipment hangers, supports and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 15010 General Provisions B. Vibration Isolation C. Piping Insulation D. Equipment Insulation E. Plumbing Piping F. Plumbing Specialties G. Plumbing Fixtures. H. Plumbing Equipment I. Duct work 1.03 Galvanizing, Coatings And Wrappings A. Galvanizing: 1. Hot dip process. Inside and out. 2. Zinc. ASTM:-B-6. Part 2 Products 2.01 Pipe Hangers and Supports A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2": malleable iron, adjustable swivel; split ring. . B. Hangers for pipes 2" and larger: steel clevis style. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3": Cast iron hook. E. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. F. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable copper plated. G. Shield for Insulated Piping 2" and Smaller: 18 gage (1.2 mm) galvanized steel shield over insulation 180 degree segments, minimum 12" (300 mm) long at pipe support. 2.02 Hanger Rods 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15140 - 3 Anchors, Supports and Sleeves A. Prime coat concealed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are considered concealed. B. Finish paint exposed steel hangers and supports to match space where they are installed. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Installation A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors, preset inserts and spring steel clips. B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls, self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces, sheet metal screw in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. D. Do not use powder actuated anchors. E. Do not drill concrete beams without approval. F. Do not drill structural steel members without approval. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon dead bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. . H. Use hangers suitable for connection to channels provided and shown on the Architectural details. See drawings for details and location. I. Repair fire rated construction damaged during construction to original condition in accordance with procedures described in the specific U. L. Design and/or as shown on the Architectural drawings. 3.02 Pipe Hangers and Supports A. Support all horizontal piping as follows: 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 'I 15140 - 5 Anchors, Supports and Sleeves seal air tight. D. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. Use deep cup style where required to cover fittings that extend beyond face of wall. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15190 Identification Of Piping Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Exposed pipes in Equipment Rooms and exterior. B. Pipes concealed above ceilings. 1.02 Applicable Publications: The identification of piping shall be in accordance with Mil. Std. MIL-STD~1 01 B, except as hereinafter noted. Part 2 Products 2.01 Pressure Sensitive Pipe Markers: Pressure sensitive pipe markers that are a manufacturer's standard catalog product maybe used. Where, in Table I, Secondary Arrow is other than black, the arrow may be black but the arrow background shall be color specified. Where the arrow is specified as black, the arrow background shall be the color of the band. 2.02 Primary Warning (Band): The primary warning (band) shall be of the color listed in Table I, and the size listed in Table II. 2.03 Secondary Warning (Arrow): The secondary warning (arrow) shall be of the color listed in Table I and size listed in Table II. The arrows shall be installed so as to indicate the direction of flow in the piping. 2.04 Titles: The titles shall be printed in upper case black letters as listed in Table I. Sizes of letters shall be as listed in Table II. 2.05 Tags: Where pipes are too small or not readily accessible for application of bands, a brass identification tag at least 1-1/2" in diameter with depressed black letters and numerals 1/2" high shall be securely fastened at locations specified for color bands and titles. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Pipes exposed or concealed in accessible pipe spaces shall be provided with color bands and titles adjacent to all valves, not more than 20-foot spacing on straight pipe runs, adjacent to changes in direction, and on both sides where pipes pass through walls or floors; so as to be clearly visible from operating 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15242 Vibration Isolation Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Vibration Isolation 1.02 Related Work A. Air Handling Units with Coils B. Condensing Units C. Exhaust Fans 1.03 References A. ASHRAE - Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of the General Conditions. B. Indicate vibration isolator locations, with static and dynamic load on each, on shop drawings and described on product data. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. 1 .06 Certificates A. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Division 1, that isolators are properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements. Part 2 Products 2.01 Vibration Isolators A. Type 1: Rod isolator. B. Type 2: Open spring mount with stiff springs (horizontal stiffness equal to vertical stiffness). C. Type 9: Rubber waffle pads, 30 durometer, minimum 1/2" thick, maximum 1/4" thick steel plate. D. Color code spring mounts. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15260 Piping Insulation Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Piping insulation B. Jackets and accessories 1.02 Related Work A. Painting: Painting insulation jacket. 1.03 References A. ANSI/ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. B. ASTM/E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ANSI/ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with three years minimum experience. B. Materials: Flame spread smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit product data under provision of Section 15010. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under Provision of Section 15010. Part2 Products 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Armstrong B. Owens Corning C. Knauf D. Certain-Teed E. Pittsburgh-Corning F. Imeco 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15260 - 3 Piping Insulation E. Insulation through rated (1 hour or 2 hour) partitions or floors shall be non- combustible and shall not derate the value of the penetration. F. Provide an insert, not less than 6" long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket, on piping 2" in diameter or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. G. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. H. Finish: 1. Domestic cold and hot water, indoor: Standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass cloth and adhesive. PVC jackets may be used. 2. Refrigerant cold vapor lines and AlC condensates: a) Concealed: insulation as manufactured b) Exposed: interior and exterior painttwo coats as approved by insulation manufacturer. 3.03 Insulation Application (Type A) A. Apply insulation to pipe and fittings with all joints tightly fitted. Secure with jacket lap strip and aluminum bands. Cover fittings with preformed PVC or aluminum cover. B. Hot water valves, unions and pumps do not require insulation. 3.04 Insulation Application (Type G) A. Slip insulation on in tubular form where possible. . B. Longitudinal joint shall be a factory applied pressure sensitive glue or hot glue, field applied. C. Butt joints shall use a hot glue application. 3.05 Schedule INSULATION PIPING AND SYSTEM THICKNESS PIPE VAPOR BARRIER TYPE 3/8 Ale Condensate Lines G All Yes 3/4 Domestic Hot Water AorG All No 1/2 Domestic Cold Water AorG All Yes 3/4 Refrigerant Vapor Lines G All Yes END OF SECTION 01/21/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section. 15290 Ductwork Insulation Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Ductwork Insulation B. Insulation Jackets 1.02 Related Work A. Painting: Painting insulation jackets 1.03 References A. ANSI/ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation application with three years minimum experience. B. Materials: UL listed; flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. Part 2 Products 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Insulation A. Owens-Corning B. Knauf C. Certain-Teed D. Substitutions: Under provisions of General Contract 2.02 Materials A. Type A: Flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612; commercial grade; "k" value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F; 0.002" foil scrim facing for air conditioning ducts. B. Type C: Duct liner flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C553; "k" value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 Ib./cu ft minimum density; coated air side for maximum 4,000 ft/min air velocity. . 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.0 Schedule INSULATION DUCTWORK THICKNESS Supply in Unconditioned Space Return in Unconditioned Space Supply & Return Diffuser Boots Supply & Return Ducts where Noted 2" 2" 1-1/2" 1" END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 15290-3 Ductwork Insulation TYPE Type "A" Type "A" Type "A" Type "C" I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15340 Fire Protection Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Wet Pipe Fire Sprinkler System. B. Extent of fire protection work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this Section. C. Dry Pipe Fire Sprinkler System 1.02 Related Work A. Basic Mechanical Requirements B. Painting and Touch-up of J:>ainted Surfaces C. Supports and Anchors 1 .03 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire protection products, of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with a Nicet level 3 certificate and successful installation experience on project with fire protection work similar to that required for this project. 1.04 References A. NFPA 13 "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems". B. UL Standards; provide UL Label on each product. C. FM Standards; provide FM Label on each product. D. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with local regulations of fire department and Fire Marshall. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Submit shop drawings, hydraulic calculations and product data to authority having jurisdiction, and to Architect/Engineer. C. Shop Drawings and Hydraulic calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where the system is being installed or a NICET Level III Technician. D. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire protection piping 01/21/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Fire Protection 15340-3 H. Tamper switches 2.05 Supports And Anchors A. As required by NFPA 13. 2.06 Valves A. Approved Valve Manufacturers: Allen (W.D.) Mfg. Co.; Div. of J.W. Moon, Inc. Central Sprinkler Corp. Croker-Standard Div.; Fire-End & Croker Corp. Elkhard Brass Mfg. Co.; Inc. Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co., Inc. Grunau Sprinkler Mfg. Co., Inc. Guardian Fie Equipment, Inc. Seco Mfg., Inc. Stockham Valves and Fittings Western Fire Equipment Co.; Div. of Premier Ind. B. Interior Valves: Gate Valves: UL listed for sprinkler service. 2.07 Gages: Pressure gages, 0-250 psi range. 2.08 Fire Protection Specialties A. Approved Manufacturers: Allen (W.o.) Mfg. Co.; Div. of J.W. Moon, Inc. Central Sprinkler Corp. Croker-Standard Div.; Fire-End & Croker Corp. Elkhard Brass Mfg. Co.; Inc. Grinnell Fire Protection Systems Co., Inc. Grunau Sprinkler Mfg. Co., Inc. . Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. Potter Roemer, Inc. Western Fire Equipment Co.; Div. of Premier Ind. Viking Corporation B. Tamper Switches: Provide products recommended by valve manufacturer for use in service indicated. C. Dry pipe valve. D. Air compressor, dedicated to fire sprinkler system. 2.09 Automatic Sprinklers 01/21/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Fire Protection 15340-5 written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that piping systems comply with requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including plumbing piping as necessary to interface components of fire protection piping properly with other work. C. Install drain piping at low points of piping systems. D. Install water flow indicators where indicated. E. Mount supervisory switches on valves as indicated. F. Install pressure gages as indicated and required by NFPA 13. G. Install Inspector's test connection with "Supports and Anchors". H. Install supports and anchors. I. Furnish wiring requirements to electrical installed for electrical wiring of supervisory and alarm switches. J. Coordinate installation of double check valve assembly at sprinkler system water source connection with water company. K. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or . adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. L. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall. M. Place pipe runs to minimize obstructions of other work. N. Piping shall be concealed wherever possible. 3.04 Testing Adjusting and Cleaning A. Sprinkler Piping Flushing: Prior to connecting sprinkler riser flush water feed mains, lead-in connections and control portions of sprinkler piping. After fire sprinkler piping is places in service, flush entire sprinkler system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in NFPA 13. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris will not clog sprinklers. Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire sprinkler piping hydrostatically for period of 2 hours, at not less than 200 psi or at 50 psi in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 150 psi. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system zone being tested. C. Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in accordance with 01/21/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15410 Plumbing Piping Part 1 General 1. 01 Work Included A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings B. Valves C. Hot and Cold Domestic Water System D. Sanitary Waste and Vent System E. Gas Pipe and Fittings F. . Disinfection of Water Piping 1.02 Related Work A. Excavation B. Backfilling C. Trenching D. Painting E. Supports and Anchors F. Piping Insulation 1.03 References A. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 NS 300. B. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. C. ANSI/ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. D. ANSI/ASME Sect. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. E. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. F. ANSI/ASTM - D2466 - Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. G. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. H. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. /. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. J. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel. Black and Hot-dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Use. K. ASTM A232 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. L. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. M. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I !I I I I I I I Plum bing Piping 15410 - 3 A. 2" and Larger 1. Cast iron pipe: ASATM A74, service weight. Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Hub & Spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 2. PVC Schedule 40 with solvent welded joints and drainage pattern fittings. Do not use foam core pipe. B. 1-1/2" and Smaller: Copper Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, cast. bronze, or ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 50B. C. Pipe Thru Rated walls shall be cast iron, copper or PVC. PVC shall be protected by a patented U. L. listed system, 2.02 Cleanouts A. Exterior Surface Areas: Brass plug, cast iron body, Nikaloy top and cover, scoriated cover, vandal proof assembly, Josam 58400 Series with vandal proof screw. B. Interior Floor Areas: Brass plug, cast iron body, Nikaloy top and cover, scoriated cover, vandal proof screw. In carpeted areas provide carpet marker and vandal proof screw. Josam Series 58400. C. Interior Wall Areas: Round s,tainless with vandal proof hardware. Josam 58990 Series. 2.03 Water Piping A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, (Type M above grade), (Type L above/below grade) hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: Above grade, ANSI/ASTM B32, Solder, Grade 95T A or Silvabrite 100. Below Grade, Silver soldered minimum 5% silver. 2.04 Gas Piping A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, (Type M above grade), (Type L above/below grade) hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: Above grade, ANSI/ASTM B32, Solder, Grade 95T A or Silvabrite 100. Below Grade, Silver soldered minimum 5% silver. B. Schedule 40 black steel pipe with threaded joints 2" and smaller (welded joints 2 1/2" and larger) and malleable iron threaded fittings. Forged steel welded fittings. 2.05 Flanges, Unions and Couplings A. Pipe Size 2" and Under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2": 150 psig forged steel slip-on flange for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping; neoprene gaskets for gas service; 1/16" thick preformed. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Plumbing Piping 15410 - 5 3.02 Installation A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 ft. of cover from finished grade. . J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. L. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4" per foot for under 4" pipe, 1/8" per foot for 4" and larger pipe. Maintain gradients. M. Excavate in accordance with Division 2. N. Backfill in accordance with Division 2. O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. a. Install water hammer arrestors where indicated on water riser diagram. 3.03 Application A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only us accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. 3.04 Service Connections A. See site plan for location of utility connections. B. Connection point: 1. Water: Approximately 5' outside of building. 2. Sanitary Sewer: Approximately 5' outside of building. 3. 05 Testing A. Waste and Vent Piping: Test to zero leakage for 1 hour at 10' water column. B. Water System: Test to zero leakage for 2 hours at 150 psig hydrostatic. 3. 06 Disinfection of Water System 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15535 Refrigeration Piping and Specialties Part 1 General 1.01 Work Includes A. Piping B. Refrigerant C. Accessories 1 .02 Related Sections A. Piping Insulation B. Air Cooled Condensing Units C. Air Handling Units with Coils 1.03 References A. ANSIIARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers B. ANSI/ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers C. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration D. ANSIIASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants E. ANSI/ASME Sec 80 - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels. F. ANSIIASME Sec 9 - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code, Welding and Brazing Qualifications G.' ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. H. ANSI/ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. I. ANSI/ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping J. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping K. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal L. ANSI/ASTM 888 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. M. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal N. ANSI/AWS 01.1 - Structural Welding Code, Steel O. ANSI/UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves P. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves Q. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants R. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service S. MIL-I-631 C - (Construction at Solenoid Valve Coils) T. MIL-V-23450C - Valves, Expansion, Thermostatic, Refrigerant 12 and Refrigerant 22 1 .04 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 15010. B. Submit shop drawings indicating schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical dimensions and sizes. C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Refrigeration Piping and Specialties 15535-3 2.02 Refrigerant A. Refrigerant: ANSI/ASHRAE 34. 2.03 Filter-Driers A. Replaceable Cartridge Type: ANSI/ARI71 0, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, flanged cover, for maximum working pressure of 350 psi, as recommended by manufacturer. B. Permanent Type: Steel shell with molded desiccant filter/drier, minimum 350 psi working pressure, solder connectors. 2.04 Solenoid Valves A. Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum operation protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box. B. Coil Assembly: UL Listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box. 2. 05 Expansion Valves A. Angle or Straight thru Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb. B. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop at expansion valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 1 OOF superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at part load. Part 3 Execution 3. 01 Preparation A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges orunions. 3.02 Installation A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Refrigeration Piping and Specialties 15535-5 C. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27" vacuum and at 200 psig using electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage. . END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15671 Air Cooled Condensing Units Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Condensing unit package B. Charge of refrigerant and oil C. Controls and control connections D. Refrigerant piping connections E. Motor starters F. Electrical power connections. 1.02 Related Sections A. Flashing B. Motors C. Vibration Isolation D. Piping Insulation E. Equipment Insulation F. Refrigeration Piping and Specialties G. Air handling Units with Coils H. Controls and Instrumentation I. Equipment Wiring Systems 1.03 References A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - SafetyCode for Mechanical Refrigeration. B. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. C. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. D. ANSI/UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Non-Electrical. E. ANSI/UL 303 - Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. F. ANSI/UL 456 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners. G. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment. H. ARI 520 - Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors, Compressor Units and Condensing Units. I. ASHRAE 14 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Condensing Units.. 01/21/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15671-3 Air Cooled Condensing Units Part 2 Products 2.01 Manufacturers A. Trane B. Carrier C. York D. Substitutions: under Section 15010. 2.02 Manufactured Units A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired units suitable for outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral sub-cooling coil, controls, liquid receiver, and screens. B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240. Testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 14. C. Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) and Coefficient of Performance (COP) not less than prescribed by ANSI/ASHRAE 90A, but not less than 13.5 SEER cooling and 3.2 COP at 470F heating. D. Heat Rejection Capacity: See drawings: at air entering condenser at 950F. E. Heat Pump Capacity: See Drawings. Air entering outdoor coil at 4rF dry bulb. 2.03 Casing A. House components in welded steel frame with galvanized steel panels with weather resistant, baked enamel finish. B. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel provided with full opening access doors. C. Provide removable access doors or panels with quick fasteners. 2.04 Condenser Coils A. Coils: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Air test under water to 425 psig, and vacuum dehydrate. Ship with holding charge of refrigerant. B. Coil Guard: Expanded metal. Louvered, PVC coated steel wire. 2.05 Fans and Motors 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15671-5 Air Cooled Condensing Units 2.08 Controls A. On unit, mount weatherproof steel control panel, NEMA 250, containing power and control wiring, factory wired with single point power connection. B. For each compressor, provide across-the-line starter, non-recycling compressor overload, starter relay, and control power transformer or terminal for controls power. Provide manual reset current overload protection. For each condenserfan, provide across-the-line starter with starter relay. C. Provide the following safety controls arranged so that operating anyone will shut down machine and require manual reset: 1. High discharge pressure switch manual rest for each compressor. 2. Low suction pressure switch automatic reset for each compressor. D. Operating Controls: 1. Adjustable delay timer to prevent compressor from short cycling. Refer to Controls Section 15985. 2. Low ambient operation kit. E. Refer to Controls Section 15985. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Division 16. C. Install units on vibration isolation. D, Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators. Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15. 3.02 Manufacturer's Field Services A. Prepare and start systems under direction of an authorized manufacturer's representative in accordance with the provisions of Section 15010. B. Provide initial start-up and. cooling/heating change-over during first year of operation, including routine servicing and check out on 60 day intervals. C. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigerant circuit. Replace losses of refrigerant and oil. D. Inspect and test for refrigerant leaks every 60 days during the first year of operation. Provide written report of inspection. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15855 Air Handling Units Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Packaged air handling units. 1.02 Related Work A. Vibration Isolation B. Ductwork Insulation C. Air Cleaning D. Ductwork and Accessories E. Controls and Sequence of Operations 1.03 References A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook, B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. E. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers and Shutters. F. ANSIIAFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. G. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. H. ANSIIUL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units. I. ARI 410 - Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Air Heating Coils. J. ARI 430 - Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units. K. ARI 435 - Standard for Application of Central Station Air Handling Units. L. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. M. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Fan Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings:AMCA 301; Tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99 and ARI 430. D. Filter Media: ANSIIUL 900 listed, Class I or Class II, approved by local authorities. E. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410. F. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of components who issue complete catalog data on total product. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15855-3 Air Handling Units Part 2 Products 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Trane B. Carrier C. York D. Substitutions under Section 15010. 2.02 General A. Fabricate draw-thru type air handling units suitable for low pressure operation. B. Fabricate units with fan or fan and coil section plus accessories, including heater, filter section and cooling coil section. C. Factory fabricate and test air handling units of sizes, capacities and configuration as indicated and specified. D. Performance based on sea level conditions. 2.03 Casing A. Construct of 18 gage minimum galvanized steel on channel base. Fabricate channel base of welded galvanized steel or steel coated externally. B. Insulate casing sections with one inch thick, 1-1/2 Ibs per cu ft. density, neoprene coated, glass fiber insulation, "K" value at 750F maximum 0.26 Btu/inch/sq fUdegrees F/hr, applied to internal surface with adhesive. Insulation and adhesive: Conform to NFPA 90A. C. Finish casings with zinc chromate, iron oxide, or phenolic resin paint. Seal fixed joints with flexible weathertight sealer. Seal removable joints with closed-cell foam gasket. D. Construct drain pans from single thickness stainless steel with welded corners and closed cell foam insulation. Cross break and pitch to drain connection. Provide galvanized steel secondary drain pan under coil section. 1. Units 5 tons and smaller may use one piece plastic drain pans. 2.04. Fans A. Forward Curved: Galvanized steel construction with inlet flange, backplate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of air flow, mechanically secured to flange and backplate; steel hub swagged to backplate and keyed to shaft. Secure with set screw or taper lock hub. B. Housing: Heavy gage steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 designated Class I and II 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.01 Installation A. Standard Air Handlers 15855-5 Air Handling Units 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with ARI 435. 2. Install units on vibration isolators. 3.02 Air Handling Unit Schedule - SEE DRAWINGS SCHEDULE END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15870 Power Ventilators Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Ceiling/duct mounted exhaust fans B. Roof mounted exhaust fans C. Supply fans D. Duct mounted fans. 1 .02 Related Work A. Vibration Isolation B. Ductwork C. Duct Accessories: Backdraft Dampers 1.03 References A. AMCA 99 - Standards handbook. B. AMCA210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. E. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. 1 .05 Submittals A. Submit product data on fans under provisions of Section 15010. B. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. C. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 1 5890 Ductwork And Accessories Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Low Pressure Ducts B. Volume Dampers C. Air Turning Devices D. Flexible Duct Connections 1.02 Related Work A. S. C. D. E. 1.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 1.04 A. B. Painting: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating. Supports and Anchors: Sleeves Vibration Isolation Duct Insulation Testing, Adjusting and Balancing References ASHRAE - Handbook 2005 Fundamentals. ASHRAE - Handbook 2004 Equipment. ASTM A90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (galvanized) by hot-dip process. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (galvanized) by Hot-dip Process, Lock Forming Quality. ASTM - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. UL 181 - Factory-made Air Ducts and Connectors. Definitions Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 1/2" WG positive or negative statiq pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm; 1" WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm and 2" WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. 1.05 Regulatory Requirements A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A ASHRAE and SMACNA low velocity standards. 1.06 Submittals 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15890-3 Ductwork And Accessories centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10% duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. F. Connect flexible metal ducts to main ducts with rolled flange, rivets and adhesive. G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round ducts sizes 8" and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. 2.04 Volume Control Dampers A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same as duct to 24" size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24". C. Fabricate splitter dampers of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/4" diameter rod in self-aligning, universal joint action flanged bushing with set screw. D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30". E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72". Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. F. Except in round ductwork 12" and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi.;blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 3D", provide regulator at both ends. H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases or adapters. 2.05 Air Turning Devices A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. OR B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap ceiling mounted rotary operator knob worm drive mechanism with 18" long removable key operator. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.04 15890-5 Ductwork And Accessories B. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. C. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated, except on dryer exhaust duct. D. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. E. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing r:x.rp::ses. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which.may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. B. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excess dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15936 Air Inlets and Outlets Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Diffusers B. Registers/Grilles C. Louvers 1.02 Related Work A. Painting: Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets B. Cleaning 1.03 References A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual. B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. C. ANSI/NFPA 90A -Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. D. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. E. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500. 1.05 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A. 1 .06 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010. B. Provide product data for items required for this project. C. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application and noise level. . D. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructionsunder Section 15010. Part 2 Products 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I G. H. I I. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15936-3 Air Inlets and Outlets Insulate back side of supply air diffusers and return grilles with fiberglass duct wrap. Seal vapor barrier around edge of diffuser. Flex duct shall be secured with a metal band clamp/strap on the inner tube and sealed at the vapor barrier jacket with glass fabric tape and mastic. Linear diffuser boots shall have 1/2" thick duct liner and 2" external duct wrap with vapor barrier. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15985. Air Controls and Sequence of Operation Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Electric/Electronic Thermostats B. Contactors C. Duct mounted smoke detectors D. Time clocks E. Wire and Raceways 1 .02 Related Sections A. Raceways B. Wire C. Ductwork and Accessories D. Air Outlets E. Air Handling Equipment 1 .03 System Description A. This Section defines the controls and the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified. Equipment, devices, and system components required for control systems are specified herein. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit under Section 15010. B. Submit diagrams indicating mechanical system controlled and control system components. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Include written description of control sequence. C. Include flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic. D. Include point-to-point wiring schematic diagrams for the control system. E. Product Data: Include list which indicates use, operating range, total range and location for manufactured components. . 1. Dampers, and Operators 2. Switches and Relays 3. Fire Detection Thermostats (Firestats & Smoke Detectors) 4. Electronic Control Components 5. Control Transformers 6. Time clocks F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with provisions of Section 15010. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 5985-3 Air Controls and Sequence of Operation e. Fans shall be selected to "ON" during the occupied mode.. 2. Air handler shall be interlocked with fire alarm to insure shut-down of unit when alarm mode is initiated. 3. Float switch in Safety pans shall shut down individual air handler. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Examination A. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check and verify location of thermostats, and other control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate room thermostats 60" above finished floor. C. Install electrical work in accordance with Division 16. D. All control wiring shall be in metal raceway. Coordination and installation is the responsibility of the HV AC Contractor. E. After completion of installation, test and adjust and calibrate control equipment.. Submit data showing set points and final adjustments of controls. 3.03 Contractor's Field Services A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 15010. B. Provide 2 hours of field service instruction after systems are fully operational. C. Provide an additional 2 hours of field instructions approximately 2 months after initial instructions upon request of the Owner. 3.04 Demonstration A. Provide systems demonstration to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Test and adjust each piece of equipment and each system as required to assure proper balance and operation. B. Test and regulate ventilation and air conditioning systems to conform to the air volumes shown of the drawings. C. Make tests and adjustments in apparatus and ducts for securing the proper volume and face distribution of air for each grille. D. Where required, provide pulleys for belt drive fans at no additional cost to the Owner, and set to drive fans at the speed needed to give the indicated air flow. E. Where required, provide buck/boost transformers on fans with PSC motors. F. For each system, take the following data in tabulated form: 1. Air volumes at all supply, return and exhaust outlets. 2. Total CFM supplied. 3. Total CFM returned. 4. Filter, coil and fan differential pressure. 5. Motor amperage name plate and running for all motors. 6. Supply, return and coil inlet wb/db. . 7. Ambient temperatures wb/db. 8. Refrigerant pressures suction and discharge. 9. Control system interaction as required by Section 15985. G. Submit three sets of test reports to the Architect for approval. H. Eliminate noise and vibration and assure proper function of all controls, maintenance of temperature, and operation in accordance with the approved design. I. This work is to be coordinated with other Contractors on this project. Part 2 Materials 2.01 Materials A. Test equipment shall be calibrated with certificate dated within 6 months prior to use. B. Forms shall be approved by a national air balance agency. Part 3 Execution A. Systems shall be demonstrated in cooling (greater than 850F) and heating (less than 400) modes. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 1601 0 General Provisions Part 1 General 1.01 Requirements A Division 1 General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract govern work under this Section. B. Contractors performing work shall be totally responsible work and shall coordinate, connect and conform to all sections or divisions of the Specifications and all drawings as required to provide complete systems. C. Applicable provisions of the Section apply to and are hereby made part of the other Sections of these Specifications. D. The Drawings and Specifications shall be understood to cover, according to their intent and meaning, complete operating systems as shown on the drawings and specified under appropriate section of the specifications. The Drawings and Specifications are to be taken together. Work specified and not shown or work shown and not specified shall be performed or furnished as though mentioned in both Specifications and Drawings. E. Minor items and accessories or devices reasonably inferable as necessary to the complete and proper operation of any system shall be provided for such systems. F. Verification of Existing Conditions: No allowance shall be made for failure to investigate site before bidding. G. Coordinate all utility connections and services installation with respective utility. H. The Contractor shall remove and/or relocate existing equipment and devices as required to provide clearance for new construction and to render systems operational in existing spaces. 1 . 02 Codes, Standards and Fees A International Building Code, 2006 Edition with Revisions and Georgia amendments. B. International Plumbing Code, 2006 Edition with Revisions and Georgia amendments. C. International Mechanical Code, 2006 Edition with Revisions and Georgia amendments. D. National Electric Code, 2005 Edition (NFPA) including Local Supplement. E. NFPA 722003 Edition, National Fire Alarm Code. F. NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors. G. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning & Ventilating Systems. H. NFPA 101 - 2000 Edition, Life Safety Code. I. ANSI C2 Edition National Electric Safety Code. J. IES 90-1 Illuminating Engineering Society. 1.03 Regulatory Requirements. A Layout of Work: Drawings are diagrammatic. Correlate final equipment locations with governing Architectural and Structural drawings and existing conditions. Layout work 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16010-3 General Provisions 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. . 4. Format: Compile information into an adequately sized hard-cover, three-ring binder for 8-1/2 x11" sheets. Provide correct designation on outside cover and on end of brochures, and an index to contents. Organize the material in an orderly manner and provide the reinforced separation sheets tabbed with the appropriate specification referenced number followed by the submittal for that portion of the specification. 5. INCOMPLETE SUBMITTALS WILL BE RETURNED, UNREVIEWED, TO CONTRACTOR FOR COMPLETION AND RESUBMISSION. C. Shop Drawings 1. Furnish one reproducible and three prints (no more) of shop and installation drawings. The reproducible will be marked with corrections (if any) and returned to the vendor through channels. Prints may be made from the reproducible for distribution. For all drawings requiring correction, after corrections have been made by vendor, submit one reproducible and three prints. The reproducible will be marked with the appropriate review stamp and returned to vendor. The vendor shall issue prints for field use from final review reproducible. All prints used on the job shall bear "APPROVED" or "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" stamp of the Engineer and the "APPROVED" stamp of the Contractor. Furnish one reproducible and three prints of joint installation drawings showing mechanical and electrical equipment in each mechanical and electrical room. Floor plans and elevations at a minimum of 1/4" equals 1', with dimensions of equipment to meet code requirements. These drawings furnished through General Contractor and developed jointly by Mechanical and Electrical Contractors. NOTE: See individual sections of specifications for required additional submittal data. Additional installation and construction drawings may be required by General Contractor. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16010-5 General Provisions manuals. 1.6 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. In accordance with the contract. Part 2 Guarantee/Warranty 2. 1 Furnish one year written guarantee to Owner from date of substantial completion on material and workmanship. Furnish extended guarantee certificate on all items where greater than one year guarantee is required. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16111 Conduit Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Rigid metal conduit and fittings. B. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings. C. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings. D. Flexible metal conduit and fittings. E. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit and fittings. F. Non-metallic conduit and fittings. 1.02 Related Work A. Cutting and Patching. B. Trenching: Excavation and backfill for conduit and utilities on site. C. Cast-in-place Concrete: Protective envelope for underground conduit installations. D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.03 References A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated. C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. D. FSWW-C-563 - Electrical Metallic Tubing. E. FS WW-C-566 - Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit. F. FS WW-C-581 - Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit. G. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit and Tubing. H. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. Part 2 Products 2.01 Rigid Metal Conduit And Fittings A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1, FS WW-C-581. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. 2.02 Intermediate Metal Conduit (Imc) And Fittings A. Conduit: Galvanized Steel. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; Use fittings and conduit bodies specified above for rigid steel conduit. 2.03 Electrical Metallic Tubing (Emt) and Fittings 01/21/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16111- 3 Conduit F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional conduit. G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled. H. Support conduit at a maximum of 7' on center. 3.02 Conduit Installation A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipecutter; de-burr and ream cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts for fastening conduit to cast boxes, and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. F. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2" size. G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. I. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. J. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints; K. Where conduit penetrates fire-ratedwalls and floors, provide mechanical fire-stop fittings with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. L. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof jack with seal fittings per detail. M. Maximum Size Conduit in Slabs Above Grade: 3/4". Conduits crossing each other may not be larger than 1/2". N. Use rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit larger than 1 ". 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16120 Wire Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Building wire B. Wiring connections and terminations 1.02 References A. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Section 16010. B. Submit shop drawings for modular wiring system including layout of distribution devices, branch circuit conduit and cable, circuiting arrangement, and outlet devices. C. Submit manufacturer's instructions. Part 2 Products A. Thermoplastic-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA W.C. 5. B. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger than #10 AWG: Copper stranded conductor, 600 volt insulation, THW or THHN/THWN. C. Feeders and Branch Circuits #10 A WG and Smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, THW or THHN/THWN, solid conductor. D. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THHN or THWN. E. Intrusion/Security System: Wiring is required by system vendor. F. Telephone/Data: 4 pair 22 gage, Category 5E. G. TV: 75 Ohm coaxial RG 59U. Part 3 Installation 3.01 General Wiring Methods 01/21/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16120-3 Wire A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 16010. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections. E. Perform continuity test on all instrumentation signal and control circuit conductors. 3.05 Wire and Cable Installation Schedule A. All wire shall be installed in raceways. B. Emergency System wiring shall be in its separate conduit and may not be combined with wiring of any other systems. 3.06 Color Coding Wire A. Color code wire as follows: 1. 208 V AC, 3-Phase System A Phase B Phase C Phase Neutral Green Black Red Blue White All Ground Conductors 3.7 Type "MC" cable with ground conductor may be used where concealed in walls. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16130 Boxes Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull. and junction boxes. C. Floor boxes. 1.02 Related Work A. Cabinets and Enclosures 1.03 References A. ANSI/NEMAOS-1 and OS-2: Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts maximum). Part 2 Products 2.01 Outlet Boxes A. Sheet metal outlet boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; one piece Galvanized steel, with 1/2" male fixture studs where required. B. Cast Boxes: Cast feralloy, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs. C. Corrosion Resistant Outlet Boxes: Non-metallic ANSI/NEMA OS-2. 2.02 Pull and Junction Boxes A. Sheet metal Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; Galvanized steel. B. Sheet metal boxes larger than 12" in any dimension: Hinged enclosure in accordance with Section 16160 unless noted with screw cover. C. Cast metal boxes for outdoor and wet location installations: NEMA 250; Type 4 and Type 6, flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as raintight. Galvanized cast iron box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. D. Cast metal boxes for underground installations: NEMA 250; Type 4, outside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting, UL listed as raintight. Galvanized cast iron 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16130-3 Boxes F. Concealed Outlets: At all concealed outlets for electric lights, switches, wall receptacles, telephones, etc., standard one piece galvanized steel outlet boxes, where required, shall be provided. Use non-metal boxes in corrosive locations. Metallic boxes and covers shall not be less than 1/16" thick and in every instance of such form dimensions as to be adapted to its specific use and location, kind of fixtures to be used, number, size, and arrangement of conduit connecting thereto. Outlet boxes shall be provided with 3/8" fixture studs where required. G. Wiring Device Boxes: For switches, receptacles, thermostats, telephones, etc., installed in concrete block, gypsum or plasterwalls shall be square cornered, 2-1/8" deep and set with device ring, flush with the finished wall. Boxes shall be steel 4" or 4-11/16" square cornered with tile ring device adapter. H. Ceiling Outlets: Ceiling Outlets shall be 4" octagon, 4" or 4-11/16" square boxes with covers as required for space for conductors and for conduit arrangement. Where lighting fixtures are hung from the outlet box, fixture studs shall be provided where required. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be supported with Caddy No. 512 clips as a minimum support. I. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes, and within special casework. K. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plans. L. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6" of recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. M. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. N. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices. Coordinate orientation of box (horizontal/vertical) with device configuration. O. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. P. Exposed boxes shall be installed neatly with concern for the appearance of the installation. a. Mounting Heights: Switches- 48" to bottom of box. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16141 Wiring Devices Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Switches B. Receptacles 1. Standard 2. Ground Fault 3. Isolated Ground C. Device plates and box covers 1 .02 References A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power, Connector, Plug, Receptacle and Cable Outlet. B. FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle. C. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. D. NEMA WD 5 - Specific Purpose Wiring Devices. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16010. B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions. Part 2 Products 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Wall Switches and Receptacles. A. General Electric B. Bryant C. Leviton D. Hubbell E. Sierra F. Arrow Hart G. Pass & Seymour H. Substitutions under Section 16010 2.02 Wall Switches A. Wall switches for lighting circuits and motor loads under 1/2 HP: NEMA WD -1; AC general use snap switch with toggle handle; rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts AC. handle: Color to be selected. 2.03 Receptacles A. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD-1. General use: Specification Grade, NEMA 15R. Corrosion resistant melamine body. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16160 Cabinets And Enclosures Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Hinged cover enclosures B. Cabinets C. Terminal blocks and accessories 1.02 References A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipments (1000 volts max). B. ANSI/NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems. C. ANSI/NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16010. B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSI/NEMA ICS 1. Part 2 Products 2.01 Hinged Cover Enclosures A. Construction: NEMA 250; Type 1, steel. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. C. Covers: 1. NEMA 1: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key or padlock. 2. NEMA 4 or 12: Continuous hinge, gasketed door, screw/bolt locking tabs on 3 non- hinged sides of door. D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks, Panels and Electrical Components: 3/4" marine plywood with white enamel finish. 2.02 Terminal Blocks and Accessories A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4; UL Listed. B. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, channel mounted; tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16190 Supporting Devices Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Fastening hardware. 1.02 Related Work A. Cast-in-place Concrete. B. Wood and metal framing system. 1.03 Quality Assurance A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry. . Part 2 Products 2.01 Materials A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel. B. Hardware: Corrosion resistant. C. Clevis Hangers: For supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2" diam. hole for round steel rod. D. Riser Clamps: For supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4" ears. E. C-Clamps: Black malleable iron; 1/2" rod size. F. I-Beam Clamps: Black steel 1-1/4" x 3/16" stock; 3" cross bolt; flange width 2". G. One-hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel. H. Two-hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; 3/4" strap width; and 2-1/8" between center of screw holes. I. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2" rod size, galvanized steel. J. Round Steel Rod: Black steel, 3/8" diameter minimum. K. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting rigid metal conduit: black steel. Part 3 Execution 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16195 Electrical Identification Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Nameplates and tape labels B. Wire and cable markers C. Conduit color coding D. Underground conduits 1.02 Related Work A. Painting 1.03 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 16010. B. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials A. Nameplates: Engraved three layer laminated plastic, colors as scheduled. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type. C. Tape plastic, self adhesive, 1" wide. D. . Paint in accordance with Division 9. E. Plastic underground tear tape with metallic identifier strip. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Installation A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets or adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panel board doors in finished locations. 3.02 Wire Identification A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams and equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16421 Utility Service Entrance Part 1 General 1.01 Section Includes A Arrangement with Utility Company for permanent electric service including payment of Utility Company charges for service. B. Service entrance. C. Metering equipment. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 16111 - Conduit B. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding 1.03 References A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electric Code, 2005. 1.04 System Description A. Utility Company: Georgia Power Co. B. System Characteristics: 208/120 volts, three phase, 4-wire 60 Hz. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Perform work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform tOTequirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. Part 2 Products 2.01 Utility Meters A. Meters will be furnished by Utility Company. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16440 Disconnect Switches Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Disconnect switches B. Fuses C. Enclosures 1.02 References A. ANSI/UL 198C - High-Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types. B. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses. C. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (for Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses). D. FS W-S 865 - Switch, Box (enclosed), Surface-mounted. E. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit product under provisions of Section 16010. B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short circuit, interrupting capacity. Part 2 Products 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Disconnect Switches A. Square-D B. General Electric C. Siemens ITE D. Westinghouse/Challenger E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010. 2.02 Disconnect Switches A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class Rand J fuses. B. Non-fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick- break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosures: Dry locations; NEMA 1; wet/damp locations: NEMA 3R. D. 240V rating on 208V systems, 600V rating on 480 systems. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16450 Secondary Grounding Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Power System Grounding B. Communication System Grounding C. Electrical Equipment and Raceway Grounding and Bonding D. Building Grounding 1.02 System Description A. Verify that the electrical service system neutral is groundedat service entrance equipment to metallic water service piping and to supplementary grounding electrodes. B. Provide communications system grounding conductor from telephone terminal board and connect to nearest panel board ground bus. C. Bond together same-voltage system neutrals. Bond equipment enclosures, exposed non- current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors and plumbing systems. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 16010. B. Indicate location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conduCtors. Part 2 Products 2.01 Materials A. Conductors: Copper, conforming to Section 16120. B. Ground Rods: 5/8" diameter x 10' long copper-clad steel. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Installation A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus or bushing. B. Verify that electrical service grounding electrode conductor is connected to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. C. Verify that a supplementary grounding electrode is connected to electrical service ground in main service equipment area. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16461 Dry Type Transformers Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Dry type transformers 1.02 Related Work A. Electrical Identification . 1.03 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including rated kVA, frequency, primary and secondary voltages, percent taps, polarity, impedance and certification of transformer performance efficiency at indicated loads, percentage regulation at 100% and 80% power factor, no load and full-load losses in watts, % impedance at 750C, hot spot and average temperature rise above 400C ambient temperature, sound level in decibels, and standard published data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's drawings indicating dimensions, and weight loadings for transformer installations, showing layouts, wall bracket mounting and supports, spatial relationship to panelboards and associated equipment, include transformer connections to electrical equipment. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring protection and control diagrams for power distribution transformers. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer- installed and portions to be field;.installed. 1.04 References A. NEMA Compliance: Comply with requirements of NEMA Std. Pub.No.'s ST 20; "Dry-Type Transformers for General Application", and TR 27 "Commercial, Institutional, and Industrial Dry-Type Transformers". B. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Std.'s C57.12.01, C57.12.50, and C57.12.91pertaining to power/distribution transformers. C. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/UL 506; "Safety Standard for Specialty Transformers". Provide power/distribution transformers and components which are UL listed and labeled. D. NESC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI Std. C2) pertaining to indoor and outdoor installation of transformers. Part 2 Products 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers 02113/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I l I I I I I I I I I I 16461-3 Dry Type Transformers A. Prior to energization of transformers, verify all accessible connections for compliance with manufacturer's torque tightening specifications. B. Prior to energization of transformers, verify circuitry for electrical continuity, and for absence of short circuits. C. Upon completion of installation of transformer, energize primary circuitry at rated voltage and frequency from normal power source, and test transformers, including but not limited to, audible sound levels, to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Correct malfunctioning units and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace with new units or component, and proceed with retesting and necessary. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16470 Panelboards Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Service and Distribution panel boards B. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panel boards 1 .02 Related Work A. Contactors B. Supporting Devices 1.03 References A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service. B. FS W-P-115 - Power Distribution Panel. C. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. D. NEMA PB 1.1 -Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 volts or less. E. NEMA PB 1.2 - Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for Equipment. F. NEMA AB 1 - Molded case circuit breakers. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 16010. B. Include outline drawing, support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes, bus material, and type of branch circuit connection. 1.05 Spare Parts A. Keys: Furnish 2 for each panel to Owner. Part 2 Products 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Panelboards A. Square-D B. General Electric 02113/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16470-3 Panelboards A. Install panelboards plumb in conformance with NEMA PB 1. B. Height: 6 ft. above finished floor to highest breaker. C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. D. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. 3.02 Field Quality Control A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboards feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard. between phases exceed 20%, rearrange circuits in the panel board. to balance the phase loads within 20%. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. 3;03 Panelboard Schedule - See Drawings END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16480 Motor Starters/Contactors Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Motor starters not furnished as part of equipment. B. Motor starters specified in this section include the following: Magnetic, Manual. 1.02 Related Work A. Section 16190 - Supports 1.03 Quality Assurance A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. B. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. C. ANSI/UL 198C - High-Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current-Limiting Types. D. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses. E. FS W-C-375- Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service. F. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (for Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses). G. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box, (Enclosed) Surface-mounted. H. NEMA ICS 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. I. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. J. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1 .04 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 16010. B. Indicate on shop drawings, front and side views of motor control enclosures with overall dimensions. Include conduit entrance locations and requirements. C. Provide product data on motor starters and combination motor starters, relays, pilot devices, and switching and overcurrent protective devices. D. Wiring diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for motor starters showing connections telectrical power panels, feeders, and equipment. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer- installed and portions that are to be field- installed. 1.5 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 16010. 02113/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16480-3 Motor Starters/Contactors B. Full voltage starting: Non-reversing type. C. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 hertz. D. Size: NEMA ICS 2; Size as shown on Drawings. E. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; Melting alloy. F. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 and 3R as shown on drawings. G. Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with motor circuit protector disconnect in common enclosure as shown on drawings. H. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; Two field convertible contacts in addition to seal- in contact. I. Pushbuttons: NEMA ICS 2; START/STOP in front cover. J. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2; RUN: Red in front cover. K. Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2; HAND/OFF/AUTO in front cover. 2.04 Controller Overcurrent Protection and Disconnecting Means A. Motor Circuit Protector: FS-W-C-375; circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies:FS W-S-865; Quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Fusible Switch Assemblies: FS W-S-865; Quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: FS-W-F-870; Designed to accommodate Class J fuses. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Installation of Motor Starters A. Install motor starters as indicted, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices; complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL and NEMA standards, to ensure that products fulfill requirements. . 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16495 Transfer Switches Part 1 - General 1.01 Section Includes A. Automatic transfer switch (ATS) 1.02 Related Work A. Section 16622 - Package Engine-Generator System: Testing requirements. 1.03 References A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies. C. NEMA ICS 3 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems: 1.04 Quality Assurance A. A TS Manufacturer: Company specializing in automatic transfer equipment with 5 years experience. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit product data for transfer switches showing overall dimensions, electrical connections, electrical ratings, and environmental requirements. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.06 Operation and Maintenance Data A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include instructions for operating equipment. C. Include instructions for operating equipment under emergency conditions when engine generator is running. D. Identify operating limits which may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions. E. Document ratings of equipment and each major component. F. Include routine preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16495-3 Transfer Switches H. Engine Exerciser: Start engine every 7 days; run for 20 minutes under load. Bypass exerciser control if normal source fails during exercising period. I. Alternate System Exerciser: Transfer load to alternate source during engine exercise period. 2.05 Enclosure: NEMA 1/3R AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS 2.06 Accessories Part 3 A. Indicating Lights: Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate normal source available, alternate source available, alternate source connection, switch position. B. Test Switch: Mount on control panel inside the cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source. C. Return to Normal Switch: Mount on control panel inside the cover of enclosure to initiate manual transfer from alternate to normal source. D. Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: 2 normally open and two normally closed. E. Normal Source Monitor: Monitor each line of normal source voltage and frequency; initiate transfer when voltage drops below 85% or frequency varies more than 3% from rated nominal value. F. Alternate Source Monitor: Monitor alternate source voltage and frequency: inhibit transfer when voltage is below 85% or frequency varies more than 3% from rated nominal voltage. Neutral shall not be switched. G. Manual transfer feature: Switching from normal power service to alternate (emergency) power source may be accomplished using handle furnished with ATS. Execution A. Install enclosed transfer switch where shown on drawings. B. Connect power wiring as shown on power riser diagram. C. Connect battery charging and control wiring per A TS and generator sets manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16510 Lighting Fixtures Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Interior luminaires and accessories B. Exterior luminaires and. accessories C. Lamps D. Ballasts 5. Reuse of existing 1.02 Related Work A. Trenching: Excavation and backfill B. Ceilings C. Painting 1.03 References A. ANSI C82.1 - Specification for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. B. ANSI C82.4 - Specifications for High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple Supply Type). C. FS W-F-414;. Fixture, Lighting (Fluorescent, Alternating Current, Pendant Mounting). D. NEMA LE 2 - H-I-D Lighting System Noise Criterion (LS-NC) Ratings. E. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit products data under provisions of Section 16010. B. Include outline drawings, lamp and ballast data, support points, weights and accessory information for each luminaire type. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 16010. 1.05 Delivery, Storage And Handling A. Deliver products to site. under provisions of Section 16010. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 16010. Part 2 Products 2.01 Interior Luminaires and Accessories A. Fluorescent Luminaires: FS-WF-414. Surface and recessed with lenses as scheduled. 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16510-3 Lighting Fixtures CBM Certified, sound rating "A". B. Electronic type, UL listed. Meets FCC regulations, Part 15J "E" rated. 2.07 Hid Ballasts A. HID Ballast: ANSI C82.4; Suitable for 1220F selected by luminaire manufacturer. B. LS-NC Rating: NEMA LE 2; equal to or less than ratings listed in Table C-1. Part 3 Execution 3;01 Installation A. Install lamps in luminaires and lampholders. B. Support surface-mounted luminaires from ceiling grid T structure; provide auxiliary support laid across top of ceiling T's, fasten using bolts, screws, rivets or approved ceiling framing member clips. C. Install recessed luminaires in non-accessible ceiling to permit removal from below. Use plaster frames. Install grid clips in grid ceiling systems. D. Support recessed fixtures in T -grid ceilings with a minimum of two wires at diagonal corners of the fixture. 3.02 Relamping A. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of Work. 3.03 Adjusting and Cleaning A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of Work. Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed luminaires. B. Replace all damaged fixtures and lenses. 3.04 Luminaire Schedule - See Drawings. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XCO 1026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16535 Emergency Lighting Equipment Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. Emergency lighting units. B. Emergency exit signs. 1.02 References A. FS W-L-305 - Light Set, General Illumination (Emergency or Auxiliary). B. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and. Structures. C. NEMA WD1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices. 1.03 Regulatory Requirements A. Conform to NFPA 101 for installation requirements. 1.04 Submittals A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16010. B. Provide product data for emergency lighting units and exit signs. Part 2 Products 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Self-Contained Emergency Power Exit Signs A. Chloride B. Lithonia C. Dual-Lite D. Substitutions: under provisions of Section 1601 O. 2.02 Incandescent Emergency Lighting Units A. Emergency Lighting Unit: FS W-L-305; Type I, Class I, self contained unit with rechargeable storage batteries, charger and lamps. B. Battery: 6-volt, nickel-cadmium or lead calcium type, with 1.5 hours capacity to supply the connected lamp load. C. Charger: Dual-rate charger, capable of maintaining the battery in a full-charge state during normal conditions, and capable of recharging discharged battery to fully charged within 12 hours. D. Lamps: 8 watt minimum, quartz-halogen. E. Indicators: Provide lamps to indicate AC ON and CHARGING. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16622 Packaged Engine Generator System Part 1 - General 1.01 Section Includes Packaged engine generator system Exhaust silencer and fittings Battery and charger Fuel tank 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 15242 - Vibration Isolation B. Section 16495 - Automatic Transfer Switches 1.03 References: A. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum) B. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators C. ANSIINFPA 70 - National Electrical Code D. ANSIINEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers 1.04 System Description A. Engine generator system to provide- source of emergency and standby power. B. System Capacity: Noted on drawing at 0.8 power factor, elevation of 30' above sea . level, and ambient temperature between 20 and 11 OOF using engine-mounted radiator. C. Operation: Emergency stand-by power source. 1.05 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 16010. B. Submit shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, C. Submit product data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery pack, weather enclosure, battery charger, exhaust silencer vibration isolators and remote annunciators. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 16010. 1.06 Project Record Documents 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16622-3 Packaged Engine Generator System 2.01 1 Manufacturers Caterpillar- No substitutions 2.02 Engine A. Type: Water-cooled inline or V-type four stroke cycle, internal combustion engine. B. Rating: Sufficient to operate at 110% for one hour at specified elevation and ambient limits. C. Fuel System: Diesel D. Engine Speed: 1800 rpm. E. Governor: Isosynchronous type to maintain engine speed within 0.5%, steady state, and 5%, no load to full load, with recovery to steady state within 2 seconds following sudden oad changes. F. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer. G. Engine Starting: DC starting system with positive engagement, number and voltage of starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Include remote starting control circuit, with MANUAL-OFF-REMOTE selector switch on engine-generator control panel. H. Engine Jacket heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostatic control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90 FO(320C), and suitable for operation on 120 volts AC. I. Lubrication: Positive displacement oil pump shall circulate lubricating oil to engine parts during operation. Oil filter shall be replaceable as a unit or shall have replaceable element. J. Radiator: Using glycol coolant, with propeller fan, sized to maintain safe engine temperature in ambient temperature of 110oF, (430C). Radiator Air Flow Restriction: 0.5" of water (9.34 mm of mercury,) maximum. Provide freeze protection to OOF. K. Engine Accessories: Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, belt- driven water pump. Include fuel pressure gage, water temperature gage, and lube oil pressure gage on engine-generator control panel. L. Mounting: Provide unit with structural steel base and suitable spring-type vibration isolators. 2.03 Generator/Exciter A. ANSI/NEMA MG 1; One phase four pole, re-connectable brush less 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16622-5 Packaged Engine Generator System I. Frequency Meter: 45-65 Hz range, 3-1/2" dial. J. AC Outlet Voltmeter: 3-1/2" dial, 2% accuracy, with phase selector switch. K. AC Output Ammeter: 3-1/2" dial, 2% accuracy, with phase selector switch. L. Output voltage adjustment. M. Push-to-test indicator lamps, one each for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspeed, and overcrank. N. Engine start/stop selector switch. O. Engine running time meter. P. Oil pressure gage. Q. Water temperature gage. R. Auxiliary Relay: 3PDT, operates when engine runs, with contact terminals prewired to terminal strip. S. Remote Alarm Contacts: Pre-wire DPDT contacts to terminal strip for remote alarm functions. T. Outdoor weather-protective housing: Factory assembled to generator set base and radiator cowling. Housing shall provide ample airflow for generator set operation. The housing shall have hinged side-access doors and rear control door. All doors shall be lockable. All sheetmetal shall be corrosion protectioned and finish painted with the manufacturers standard color. 2.05 Fuel Tank A. Fuel tank (base/belly style) with double wall construction. B. Sight glass and drain for interstitial space. C. Fill and vent fittings. D. Size and vent fittings. E. Size for minimum 124 hours at 75% rated load. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Examination A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field dimensions are as shown on Drawings. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16622-7 Packaged Engine Generator System 3.09 Additional Services A. Contractor shall provide one full fuel tank. Fuel for testing shall come from this full tank. END OF SECTION 02113/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16650 Surge Suppressors Part 1 General 1.01 Description A. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for transient voltage surge suppressors (TVSS) for the protection of all AC electrical circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents, sub-station switching transients and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and/or capacitive load switching. 1.02 Related Work Specified Elsewhere A. General Electrical Requirements. B. Raceways, Boxes and Fittings C. Wire and Cable D. Grounding 1.03 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings, product data and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. The surge suppression submittals shall also include: 1. Dimensional drawing of each suppressor type indicating mounting arrangements. 2. Manufacturer's certified test data for each suppressor type indicating: a. Compliance with this section. b. Category C3 test results. c. UL 1449 clamping documentation. Part 2 Products 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Advanced Protection Technologies B. Lea Dynatech C. MCG D. Sentrex E. Current Technology F. EDCO G. Substitutions: Under section 16010. 1H. Siemens Energy and Energy & Automation, Inc. 2.02 Suppressors For Main Distribution Panelboard A. Suppressors shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1449, Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. B. For 3-phase, 4-wire delta configurations, suppressors shall provide suppression elements between all phases and each phase conductor and the system neutral, and between each phase and ground. An additional suppression element is required between the system 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16650-3 Surge Suppressors 1. Maximum Single Impulse Current Rating: 20,000 amperes (8 x 20 fJS - waveform). NOTE: If the suppressor utilizes fuses, the maximum single impulse current cannot exceed the rating of the fuse. 2. Pulse Life Rating: 5,000 amperes (8 x 20 fJS - wave form): 50 occurrences. 3. Pulse Life Rating: 1,000 amperes (8 x 20 fJs - wave form) 100 occurrences. 4. Maximum clamping voltage will be 500V listed for a 3KA, 8 x 20fJs current waveform. G. Suppressors shall have turn-on and turn-off times of less than one nanosecond. H. Suppressors shall be of solid-state componentry and shall operate bi-directionally. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Main Distribution Panelboard A. Install one secondary suppressor at distribution panel as shown on drawings. B. Suppressors shall be connected on the load side of the panel main with #2 copper conductor. C. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment to the panel board shall be kept as short and straight as possible. D. Suppressors shall be installed with separate grounding and grounded conductors. The grounding and grounded conductor shall have no contact at this point unless the service panel is a "separately derived system" according to NEC 250-5 (d). 3.02 Branch Circuit Panelboards A. Install one secondary suppressor at each sub-panel location that is feeding computer loads. B. Suppressors shall be connected on the load side of the service panel main, using #2 copper conductors. C. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment to the panel board shall be kept as short and straight as possible. D. Suppressors shall be installed with separate grounding and grounded conductors. The grounding and grounded conductor shall have no contact at this point. 3.03 Warranty A. The suppressor will have a warranty guarantee for a period offive years, incorporating a one time free replacement if the suppressor is destroyed by lightning within the warranty period. END OF SECTION 02/13/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16681 Lightning Protection Part 1 General 1.01 Summary A. Section Includes: 1. Air terminals and interconnecting conductors. 2. Grounding and bonding for lightning protection. B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01110- Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents. 1.02 References A. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI): 1. LPI-175 - Lightning Protection Installation Standard. 2. LPI-176 - Lightning Protection System Material and Components Standard. 3. LPI-177 - Inspection Guide for LPI Certified Systems. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA780 - Lightning Protection Code. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1 . UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components. 2. UL 96A - Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems. . 1.03 System Description A. Design Requirements: Lightning protection conductor system consisting of air terminals on roofs, parapets, bonding of structure and other metal objects; grounding electrodes; and interconnecting conductors. 1.04 Submittals A. Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1. Product Data: Provide dimensions and materials of each component, and include indication of listing in accordance with UL 96. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, and conductor sizes, and connection and termination details. . 3. Assurance/Control Submittals: 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16681-3 Lightning Protection A. Air Terminals: Copper solid, with adhesive bases for single-ply roof installations. C. Grounding Rods: Solid copper. D. Ground Plate: Copper. E. . Conductors: Copper cable. F. Connectors and Splicers: Bronze. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Examination A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. C. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to Owner. 3.02 Installation A. Install in accordance with NFPA 780, UL 96A, and LPI-175. B. Connect conductors using mechanical connectors. Protect adjacent construction elements and finishes from damage. C. Bond exterior metal bodies on building to lightning protection system. D. Install wiring visually concealed from persons at grade. 3.03 Construction A. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate Work with roofing and interior finish installations. 3.04 Field Quality Control 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 16721 Fire Alarm and Security System Part 1 General 1.01 Work Included A. New Fire Alarm B. Security System 1.02 Related Sections A. Conduit B. Wire and Cable 1.03 References A. NFPA 72 - Installation, Maintenance and Use of Auxiliary Protective Signaling System for Fire Alarm Service.. B. NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors C. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 1.04 Regulatory Requirements A. System: UL listed. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. 1.05 Qualifications A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in fire alarm systems with five years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in fire alarm systemswith 5 years documented experience, certified by manufacturer and State of Georgia as fire alarm installing contractor. 1.06 Submittals A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 1601 0.. Provide wiring diagrams, data sheets, and equipment ratings, layout, dimensions and finishes. C. Provide catalog data for equipment, equipment ratings, layout, dimensions and finishes. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 16010. 1 .07 Project Record Drawings 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16721-3 Fire Alarm And Security System 1. Visual and audible trouble alarm by zone at control panel. 2. Manual ACKNOWLEDGE function at control panel silences audible trouble alarm. Visual alarm is displayed until initiating trouble is cleared. . 3. Transmit trouble signal to digital communicator. F. Lamp Test: Manual LAMP TEST function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire alarm control panel. G. Zoning: As scheduled on drawings. Part 2 Products 2.01 Systems A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Notifier 2. Simplex 3. Edwards 4. BRK 5. Substitutions: Under Section 16010. B. Control Panel 1. Control Panel: Modular construction with surface wall-mounted enclosure. 2. Power Supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciators, relays and alarm signaling devices. Include battery operated emergency" power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode for 10 minutes. . 3. Detection Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication. 4. Signal Circuits: Supervised signal module, sufficient for signal devices connected to service. 5. Auxiliary Relays: Provide sufficient SPOT auxiliary relay contacts for each detector to provide accessory functions specified. 6. Remote Annunciator: Panel to provide indication of system status, trouble, normal, alarm, reset, zone status.. 7. Provide TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE and ALARM SILENCE switches. C. Initiating Devices 1. Manual Station: Semi-flush mounted, double action manual station with break-glass rod, and auxiliary relay contacts for each detection zone to 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16721-5 Fire Alarm And Security System 3. Control panel shall have two security zones as shown on drawings. C. Batteries: Proper ampere-hour rating to operate the system tripping circuits under supervisory conditions for (60 hours) and shall be capable of operating all audible signal devices under alarm conditions for 30 minutes, at the end of the 60 hours. Reliable separation between cells shall be provided to prevent contact between battery terminals and other metal parts. D. Motion Detectors: Combination microwave and passive infrared dual protection unit which must sense intrusion in both fields. Contractor shall select distance and angle sensitivity for the specific application and location. E. Door contacts- magnetic switch. F. Break glass sensor. G. Audible Alarms: Weatherproof electronic micro-processor based selectable signal horn system, 110 db at 10 feet. Unit shall be Edwards "ADAPTONE" #5530-AQ or equal designed for high noise application with supervised alarm systems. H. Key Pad: Standard interior service. 2.03 Digital Communicator A. Three zone digital alarm communicator transmitter. Dual telephone lines for central station reporting. Primary and secondary phone numbers. Unit shall communicate using BFSK or pulsed single fast format or other format as required by Owner's selected monitoring agency. B. program system to owner's selected agency. 2.4 PROVIDE RJ-31X INTERFACE JACKS AND WIRING BETWEEN JACKS, ALARM/SECURITY PANEL AND TELEPHONE TERMINAL BOARD. Part 3 Execution 3.01 Installation A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install manual stations with operating handle 48" above floor. C. Install audible and visual signal devices in accordance with the A.D.A. . D. Use 14 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm signal circuit conductors. E. Automatic Detector Installation: NFPA 72. F. Furnish and install. G. Verify communicator telephone interface functions to RJ-31X telephone jack. H. Install devices as noted on drawings. 02/13/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 Section 16726 Cabling Identification PART 1 GENERAL 1.1. CABLE ADMINISTRATION: A. All telephone and data cables, receptacles, connection blocks and patch panels shall be properly tagged with the standard labeling scheme described below. B. Any cable that exceeds the maximum length as specified in Section 16729 shall be 1) reported to the Design Team, 2) clearly marked with red tape at both ends of each cable indicating the exact cable length and, 3) noted in the required AS-Built Label Report. C. Prior to system acceptance, the contractor shall submit an as-built report providing the room numbers and cable lengths for each of the installed cables. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 lABEL REQUIREMENTS A. Labels shall be white with typewritten legible characters. No handwritten labels. Ink shall be non-smear type. B. Labels shall have self-adhesive backing. C. Labels for cables shall be provided with protective wrap-around plastic transparent coves which will serve to protect the ink from smearing and secure the label to the cable. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Maker B. Hubbell C. Amp PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL . A. Apply labels such that all the lettering is visible. B. Labels shall be typed in a horizontal fashion. C. Apply label for the cables such the leader of the label raps around over the edges of the label preventing it from easily peeling off. 3.2 INSTAllATION A. Cable Plant Identification - All cable and wire installed within the ceiling for voice and data communications shall be properly tagged with the standard labeling scheme described below. 1. Standard Labeling Scheme- the standard labeling scheme is used to identify the physical location of each end of any given cable/wire. The number identifies the room locations and provides a unique sequence number. 06/30/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 Section 16729 Data and Telephone Cabling Systems PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for installation and testing of the data and voice communications horizontal cable system as noted on drawings and in these specifications. The Contractor will install station jacks, wall plates, horizontal cables, connection blocks, patch panels and punch wires down to the appropriate connection blocks. The Contractor shall also submit as-built drawings that reflect the installed cable route, port location and labeling information, prior to system acceptance. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 16010 for requirements. B. Also submit as assembled typical data receptacle fully assembled and wired for pre- construction acceptance. C. Provide a 12" long sample of each type cable used on the project. 1.3 QUALITY CRITERIA A. In addition to the requirements setfor the in Section 16010, the persons installing the data cabling shall: 1. Show proof of being in the low voltage Voice/Data Communication trade for a minimum of three years. 2. Provide three (3) references with contact names and telephone numbers regarding successful completion of Voice/Data Communication projects. General electrical trade staff (electricians) shall not be used for the installation of the premises distribution system cables and associated hardware. 1.4 WARRANTY A. This Contractor shall deliver the work in a first-class operating condition in every respect. This Contractor shall also warrant the material, equipment, and workmanship furnished shall be entirely free from defects. This Contractor shall repair or replace any material, equipment, or workmanship in which defects may develop within five (5) years after the date of final acceptance by the Owner at no additional expense to the Owner. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review by the owner's design Engineer a notebook with material specifications to to be incorporated in the work. Support submittals by descriptive means, i.e. catalog sheets, product data sheets, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the manufacturer. 06/30/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16729 - 3 Data And Telephone Cabling Systems 1. 15t pair: White/Blue and Blue/White 2. 2nd pair: White/Orange and Orange/White 3' 3rd pair: White/Green and Green/White 4. 4th pair: White/Brown and Brown/White 5. Acceptable Manufactures of Category 6 voice and data station cable: a. Hubbell- 24 Gauge b. Belden- 24 Gauge c. AMP-24 Gauge 2.4 DATA PATCH PANELS A. Patch panels for termination of data cables shall be Category 6 (approved EIA/TIA standard), T568B and contain a minimum of 48 ports. Provide multiple patch panels as required to accommodate the number of cables installed, plus 75% spare. The panel shall have 110 connection blocks for termination of horizontal cables and 8 position modular jacks mounted on the front for connection of patch cords. The panel shall be mounted in a rack mount configuration. If the 110 connection blocks are mounted on the back of the panel, provide panel with removable standoff feet for easy access to terminations. B. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Panduit 2. Ortronics 3. Hubbell 2.5 PATCH CORDS A. Provide one (1) Category 6 (approved EIA/TIA standard) cord per station cable pulled to MDF and IDF's. Lengths of the patch cord to be determined prior to cable installation. B. Provide one (1) 15 ft. Category 6 (approved EIA/TI standard) cord for station end. 2.6 RACK A. EIA 19 inch Rack 1. The mounting rail shall be free standing. It shall be aluminum finished, rack drilled and taped on both sides. 2. The rack shall have a 15 inch wide foot with holes for bolting to floor. 3. Shall have top and bottom angles on both sides for support. 4. Shall provide shelves as noted on drawings, 5. Shall have adequate cable management for station cables and patch cords. 6. Rail shall be bolted to the floor. 7. Horizontal support is required at top of rack. Method of support is ladder rack from rack to terminal board. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STATION JACK INSTALLATION - GENERAL 06/30108 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16729 - 5 Data And Telephone Cabling Systems E. Install color coded jacks at the room receptacles. Blue for data and faceplate color for voice. F. Leave enough cable (approximately 1 foot at the outlet and 3 feet at the backboard) to allow easy termination of the cable. G. Station cable that runs outside the walls shall be in wiremold, J-hooks, cable tray, or conduit (refer to the drawings). H. Minimum 1" conduit shall be installed in all new walls and shall be run to above ceiling line (see drawings for conduit size). Terminate all conduits with bushings. A minimum 200 ts polyline pull string to run the length of the vacant conduit. I. When conduit is run from room to room, provide a metered tape and a minimum 200 ts polyline pull string to run the length of the vacant conduit. J. Cabling shall not be run in the same conduit or raceway with power conductor except where the raceway is separated by a divider. K. Installation of the cable shall be in accordance with the marked floor plan. All deviations to the cable route shall be approved by the Communications Designer and Owner IT personnel prior to installation. L. Cable routing shall follow the dictates of the design while avoiding locations of high RFI/EMI radiation of adverse environmental conditions. Cable shall be routed at least 2 feet from any fluorescent ballast or other sources of low level EMI. M. Cables shall not be tie wrapped to electrical or gas conduit. The cable shall not be compressed, crimped, crushed, or stretched. The cable jacket should not be cut or damaged in any way which would expose the inside wires. N. D-rings and wire management D-rings panels shall be provided and mounted to route the station cables at the backboard locations (and in chase locations if designated on the drawings). Install D-ring panel between any/each two termination panels. O. Enough slack will be provided to neatly route the station cable through the O-rings to the appropriate termination point and to allow for panel to swing out if necessary. P. All plastic type molding must be anchored to the wall with appropriate type of wall screw every five (5) feet. When surface raceway must be used (surface mounting is not preferred) Panduit type A1, type ATD, or type At3" is to be used. See electrical specifications for acceptable raceways. Q. Label all cables as specified in the section covered in the specified Standard Labelinq Scheme. 3.4 WIRING TESTING A. Contractor shall provide all necessary testing equipment to test all data and voice cables. B. Each cable terminating in a station jack shall be tested from the patch panel/connection block with a 4-pair wire tester. The tester shall verify continuity, faults, swaps and pairing. C. Each Category 6 (approved EIA/IA standard) cable as defined in the EIA/TIA TSB 67 shall also be tested for near-end crosstalk and attenuation up to and including 100 MHZ and shall verify the cable length. D. If the near-end crosstalk levels are below the specified worst case values and/or the attenuation is greater than the maximum attenuation levels at 100 MHZ (for Category 6 cable) and or fails the CAT 6 MHZ test, the Contractor shall repair. replace. 06/30/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 Section 16730 Multi-Mode Fiber Optic Cables PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The contractor shall provide all necessary labor, supervision, materials, tools, and testing for complete and acceptable installation of fiber optic cables including termination equipment, connectors and accessories for terminated fiber links between the locations as noted on drawings and in these specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 16 Section 16010 Submittals for requirements. B. Provide a 12" long sample of each type cable used on the project. 1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. In addition to the requirements set forth in Section 16010, the persons installing the fiber cabling shall: 1. Show proof of being in the low voltage Data Communication trade for a minimum of three (3) years. 2. Provide three (3) references with contact names and telephone numbers regarding successful completion of Data Communication projects. General electrical trade staff (electricians) shall not be used for the installation of the fiber optic cables and associated hardware. 1.4 QUALITY CRITERIA A. Raceways, boxes, cabinets and conduit shall comply with all applicable UL, NEC and NEMA standards and requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPTICAL FIBER A. Interior fiber optic cable shall be plenum rated and conform to type CAS OFN/FT 4, EIA/TIA- 455, OFNP. All fiber cable shall be in full compliance with Bellcore TR- TSY-409 and ICEA standards. B. Each optical fiber cable shall have a maximum installation tensile load rating at least 500 pounds. C. All fiber optic strands shall be capable of withstanding a minimum bending radius of 9 inches. D. There shall be no conducting component in the cable; steel strength members are not acceptable. E. The operating temperature range shall be between -20 to +70 degrees centigrade. F. All optical fiber cable purchased shall be factory certified per reel. G. A single fiber optic cable or duplex cables shall be run with required multiple fibers as noted on drawing to form a point to point cable run between the space termination locations. 06/30/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16730-3 Multi-Mode Fiber Optic Cables 1. Wall-mountable interconnect center, shall contain connector coupling panels to contain 12 or 24 each SC type connector sleeves with protective caps on each side of the sleeve. Each compartment shall contain a cable organizer which allows coiling of excess cable and shall have a door with a latch to secure the door closed. Provide a leQend on the inside of one of the doors, for identifyinq cables. Provide multiple cabinets, where required. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Siecor b. Ortronics c. Siemens PART 3 -INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIBER OPTICAL CABLE A. The fiber optic cable shall not be spliced. Cable runs shall be continuous from beginning to end. B. Placement in Ducts and Trays: A pulling lubricant which is compatible with the low density sheath can be used to minimize friction of the optical cable with the conduit walls. However, the use of the lubricant is not always necessary and may complicate cable handling. If mechanical and/or electrical wrenching devices are used to pull the cable the cable tension shall be monitored with a commercial dynamometer or load- cell to ensure that the fiber manufacturer's pulling specifications are not exceeded. Use pulling grips and swivel designed for pulling. C. Precautions shall be taken during the installation to ensure the cable is not kinked or crushed. Replacement of the cable will be at the contractor's expense if the cable does not pass the acceptance test. Minimum cable pulling radius shall be no less than the manufacturer's specifications. Pulling wheels shall be used when pulling around sharp corners in conduit Lbs, junction boxes and/or cable. Pull cable with kellum type pulling grips and swivel designed for installing fiber. Strip jacket of fiber cable, tie off Kevlar to center eyelet, tape grip to jacket, tie swivel to grip and tie pull rope to swivel. D. The cable shall be racked or strapped to rack hangers and other devices to provide support. Ten feet (10' ft.) slack shall be left in each junction box, entry and exit of conduit, and cable trays so the cable is not binding on the entry and exit of these devices: cable shall be loose and limp. Bundle cable and cable tie every two feet (2' ft.) of unsupported length. E. Provide 5 meters of jacketed cable at all termination locations to be coiled (not to exceed minimum installed bend radius) and mounted to the backboard. 1. When SC connectors are directly installed onto fiber buffer cable or fusion spicing of factory assembled SC pigtails, provide 6' of fiber coiled per strand at each termination location. 2. Neatly tie all cables to bundles as they enter the distribution frame or cabinets and into the Fiber Termination storage cabinet. Follow all manufacturers' installation instructions. Attach a #6 ground wire to the building ground from the WIC. F. Prepare individual cables for field installed and fusion spliced pigtails connectors as per connector manufacturer's instructions. Install SC connectors as per manufacturer's recommended procedures. Connector end face shall be polished perpendicular and smooth to achieve a minimum loss of 0.2 db per mated pair and a 06/30/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16730-5 Multi-Mode Fiber Optic Cables graphic chard illustrating the vertical scale, horizontal scale, fiber refractive index, wavelength, A to B distance and the reflectometer trance. Fiber to be shot from both ends. G. An Attenuation data sheet shall be prepared for all cable noting the test results of each fiber strand per cable as per the attached Attenuation test data sheet. H. Submit the test OTDR and Attenuation data sheets for approval and acceptance of the cable installation. Contractor will be responsible for materials and labor for replacing optical system which fails to comply with specifications. I. Connectors shall have no more than a minimum loss of 0.2 db per mated pair and a maximum loss of 0.4 db per mated pair. Cable attenuation shall not exceed 2% more than attenuation of the cable of the reel as certified at the factory. J. All test reports shall be submitted and approved by the Owner/Architect before final acceptance or final inspection will be performed. K. The tester shall provide a hard copy report and disk copy of the results of each cable tested. The report shall indicate the cable label, values of the parameters measured and a pass or fail indication. L. It is the contractor's responsibility to replace or repair any cables, connectors or jacks found to be defective. M. If the test results indicate a failure of any cable, the contractor shall repair, replace, and/or rework any or all defective components to achieve a pass condition prior to acceptance of the installation. 3.4 RECORD MANUALS A. Refer to Section 16010 for requirements. CABLE SYSTEM ATTENUATION DATA Date: Page: Project: Testing Team Members: Fiber Type and Size: Distance: 06/30/08 G003-1 06\XC01 026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 16730-7 Multi-Mode Fiber Optic Cables Vertical Scale: Horizontal Scale: Fiber Refractive Index: Wavelength: Distance A to B: Reflectometer Trace or Photo of Display: END OF SECTION 06/30108 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 Section 16741.. Communications Systems PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Inside data wiring S. Telephone wiring C. Fiber optic cables D. Equipment terminals and outlets E. Outside conduits and wiring 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. S. C. D. E. F. G. H. 1.3 A. 1.4 A. S. 1.5 Painting: Field painting of backboards Conduit: Telephone service entrance raceway Supporting Devices:. Supports for conduit, backboards and cabinet Wire and Cable Multimode fiber optic cable Data and telephone cabling systems Wiring methods for data and voice systems Cabling identification QUALITY ASSURANCE Install work in accordance with telephone Utility rules and regulations and conforming to requirements in related sections. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Submit record documents under provision of Section 16010. Accurately record location of service entrance, conduit, outlets and termination backboards. WARRANTY A. In accordance with Division 1 and related sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TERMINATION BACKBOARDS A. Material: Plywood. A-C marine grade. B. 3/4" thick. 2.2 OUTLETS A. Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep with 2-gang device ring. B. Raceways: 1" conduit unless noted otherwise. C. Floor Boxes: See Section 16130. D. Surface-mounted wireways: Wiremold series 4000 with divider and power/grommet panels. E. Provide two gang plate with openings for Owner's data and telephone outlets. Coordinate with Owner for exact opening size. 06/30/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 Seqtion1 ()800 Wiring Methods for Data and Voice Cabling Systems PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work required under this section of the specifications consists of the wiring methods to be utilized for the installation of the data and voice cabling system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submittals: Refer to Section 16010 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Outlet boxes, raceway systems required for the rough-in devices shall be provided under this division of the work in accordance with Section 16130. B Provide systems products as described in the individual specifications sections. 2.2 CABLE CHARACTERISTICS A. Wire size, shielding and insulation requirements for cables shall be as specified in the required section or as determined by the system manufacturer for each system based on specific system requirements, the National Electrical Code and EIA/TIA standards B. Cables installed outdoors or run below grade shall be suitable for use in wet locations. 1. Telephone cable: 24 gage solid copper, jelly-filled insulating jacket. . Leased circuits: Conduit, only, cable furnished by utility company. C. All indoor cables shall be plenum-rated type. 2.2 BRIDLE RINGS AND J-HOOKS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ERICO (Caddy Fasteners) 2. B-line 3. Atlas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Wiring methods shall comply with Articles 725, 760, 800 and 810 of the National Electrical Code for power-limited circuits and EIA/TIA standards, as applicable. B. Wiring concealed in walls, above inaccessible ceilings, run exposed (indoors or outdoors) and wiring run below grade shall be installed in raceways, Wiring above 06/30/08 G003-106\XC01026 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ... - W III (ij ..J Jj s: ..- ::l l- e 0.. w :I: o C/) :I: C/) Z u. I III ... c:: Cl) E E 00 '<t '<t '<t '<t "t""'"" or- ~ ~ LUUJLULU 1-1-1-1- 0000 zzzz Cl .= 'Qj o ..-NNN 0000 0..0..0..0.. <t:<t:<t:<t: ..1:_ ... - :::s III JS s: ..- I- 0.. ..- ..- ..- 1-1-1- 0..0..0.. n; s: ... III Cl) s: ~ ~ ~ ~ 1-1-1-1- 0..0..0..0.. ..- ..- ..- 1-1-1- 0..0..0.. ..1:_ t::(ij ~s: ~ 0.. ..- ..- ..- 1-1-1- 0..0..0.. Cl) en -r- ~ 'T"'"" .,- III (r:J Cf) Cf) (/) aJ 0::: 0::: 0::: 0::: f! o ..2 u. N 1-..-..-..- 0..C/)Cf)C/) 00:::0::0:: .. > Cl) tt::: Cl) E III Z E o o tt::: E . oOo~8~ 1.9 z ::;;:: ..- ..- ..- ~ ,:2:2:2 '<t'<t '<t ..-..-1'-1'-..- UJLULULULU 1-1-1-1-1- 00000 zzzzz NN N 000..0..0 o..o..XXo.. <t:<t:LULU<{ ~ ~ .,- .,- or- 1-1-1-1-1- 0..0..0..0..0.. ~ or- .,- or- .,- 1-1-1-1-1- 0..0..0..0..0.. or- .,- or- .,- .,..... 1-1-1-1-1- 0..0..0..0..0.. .,- .,- ~ .,- .,- 1-1-1-1-1- 0..0..0..0..0. ..- ,... ..- C/)Cf) Cf) 0:: 0:: I I 0:: ,... ,... ..- C/)C/)OO(/) 0::0::(/)(/)0:: l{)CCl'-com 00000 iii~~ '<t ,... '<t'<t '<t'<t'<t'<t'<t'<t'<t'<t'<t'<tcO.:'<t"-"- "\'T"'"".,-.,--r-,--r-T"""'T"'""T"""V"-"-"- LULULULULUUJUJWUJLULULULULU 1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1- 00000000000000 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ NNNNNNNN '<t'<t'<t'<tOOOOOOOO 1-1-1-1-0..0..0..0..0..0..0..0.. 0..0.. o..o.<t:<t:<t:<t:<t:<{<{<{ I .,-.,-.,-.,-.,-.,-y-.,-.,-"-"-"-"-"- 1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1- 0.0..0.0.0..0..0.0..0..0.0.0..0..0.. .,-.,-"-"-'T"'"".,-.,-"-"-T"""-r-"-"-"- 1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1- 0..0..0.0.0..0.0..0..0..0.0.0..0.0.. .,-T""".,--r-or-.,-"-"'--"-"-"-"-"-"- 1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1- 0.0.0.0..0..0..0.0..0..0..0..0.0.0.. .,-"-"-"-"-OC-"-T""""-"-"-"-"-"- 1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1- 0..0.0.0..0..0..0..0.0..0..0..0.0.0. T""".,-.,......,-~-r-T'"".,-.,-.,-T""""\C\lN (/)(/)(/)C/)Cf)C/)C/) Cf)(/)(/)Cf)(/)(/)Cf) 0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0:: .,-.,-T"""T""" "\-r-T""" T""""-T"""'T"'"" T"""NN C/)(/)Cf)Cf)C/)C/)C/)(/)C/)(/)Cf)(/)Cf)Cf) 0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0::0:: Cf) 0:: 0:: W w 3: 3: 01-0 I(/). LU I Z -I~<t: OCf)- 1-0::0 C/)LUO :':t:1- ZOCf) LUO::::> :2-10 I- UJ ::::! o I- C/)(/) ZZ UJill ::2:~ 00 3:3: ill o u:: lL o (/) ~ LU (!) <{ Z <{ 0:::2 0-1 O::::!I- (2lLLU lLO::OC/) OOZO ~o::Sd >- ~<{ UJLU :200:: OZ<t: O<t:~ O::ZCO ti:i 0:: ~ I-ZLU I 0:: -I-uJ Cf)0 O~o::~~g 1-C/)(r:J,>lL o Z o o LU Cf) 0:: o C/) ~ UJ W ~ I- ~ 0.:J I- <t: ill It (/) ZO::-.::o <(a' UJ :2 I- 9: 0:: -I 0 Cf) C/) ::::> 0 0:: ~ 0:: <{ ~ W-l@~OO~~Z >-!:::~>-~OO-O::LUW co -I W > UJ (2 0:: 0:: t; I- 0 co (3 Z <t:o.. 0:: w w w 6;u:: o <{ UJ w::::> a::::! 0:: -I <{u. -IlL (!) ICf) 0 lL lL w:20 O..-NC')'<tl{)CCI'-COmo..-NC'l T""""\T"""T"""T"""-r-"--':-T"""'T"""NNNN T"""T""",,-,,-,,-"-T"""T"""T'"'"-r-.,-.,-T""""- ~:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2:2 T""" .,- .,- .,- T""" OOOO() 0..0..0.0..0. <t:<{<t:<t:<{ ~~~j:~ 0..0..0..0..0. T""".,-.,-T"""T""" 1-1-1-1-1- 0..0.0.0..0. ~~~~~ 0..0..0.0..0. T""" .,- .,- or- .,- 1-1-1-1-1- 0..0..0.0..0. CiiCiiOi~Oi 0::0::0::00:: ~~~,...j:: 0..0..0..1-0. 00000 LU o U::o:: lLOI- aI-wI- ZO(/)UJ willo....JCf) 0..0::-100:: OOOI-UJ ..-NC')'<tl{) 00000 NNNNN :2:2:2:2:2 Q) "'5 '0 Q) ..c o en ..c en '2 u:: () X c.o o ..- I C') o o <9 co o (;5 ..- -- N o I I I I I I I I I 0 z I UJ (9 UJ ...J I ~ I z u: I I I I I I I I J 0:: W UJ 0 ...J Z ..-.. ~ C/) <{ ~ 0 iY: :.p ...J 0 '=t UJ U N u.. ...J _x ....... <{ '=t ~ ::> ~ 0 (j) <D ...J <{ (t) ...J ..-.. U 'l:t: <{ W ~ (j) ~ ...J (j) I ~ 0 W (j) ~ ...J 0:: 0:: Z (9 0 0... <{ W Z U >- ~ U ~ 0 l{) U U ...J (t) 0:: 0 <( E w ::> 0 ~ ....... $ CO <{ 0 (j) W C/) 19 ...J 0: ~ w 0 (t) <( ...J ~ U L() 0 0 <3 u.j T""" 0:: ::> (j) I (!) Z ...J N ~ ..-.. 0 (j) ..., ...J ~ 0 Z CO ~ W i= T""" I"- a: E fo- W T""" 0 0... ...J 0 <( T""" W (l) iY: (j) {: Z Z T""" u.. - Z <( 0 C/) U 0:: 0 0 <( r-- u.. ~ 0 (j) CO ~ Z ~ 0 (j) (j) ...J ....... UJ 0 Z S w 5 """ u.. u.. 0 ~ iu 0 0 z () co Z 0 (j) 0 w L() I' ~ 0:: i= 0:: () 'l:t: 5 w T""" us I 0 (j) ~ 0 z (!) T""" U 0:: (j) 'l:t: 0:: ~ iY: w W <( 0... 0 ::> w z {: 0 ...J Z X 0:: UJ Z ~ U Z W ...J ;?; 0... W ~ ...J {: 0 0:: (!) ::i w 0 S2 ~ z 0 U ...J X U 0 N ...J u.. Z (j) <( () (j) CO 0 W N ...J <( 0 ...J U Z w ~- cj cr: ...J 0:: T""" ::> (j) co W 'l:t: ~ US :J 0 () z 0 :S 0:: l.L W ...J W 0: w a: cr: (j) (j) ::> z 0... ...J <( ~ r> 0 0 0 ::> ~ & ...J . ~ (j) 0:: 0 ...J (9 ::> u CO (t) r-- """ 0.:- <{ 0 () 0 w a ::> l.L I I , (j) U ...J N () ~ (j) 0 :2 w L() <D co ::> u.. ::> T""" """ T""" cr: 0 ...J 0 T""" 0:: <( 0 ~ 0:: (t) """ L() :=; ...J (t) ~ (0 <{ (!) 0:: 0 0 0:: :=; """ ~ ~ (j) ~ ~ 0 (!) U 0... N ...J W 0... cr: ~ 0:: ~ T""" (0 ::> ~ (!) l.L >=" Z Z Z 0 ~ w z w w (!) z <( 0 <( <c :2 u w S2 z 0 z 0 <{ w :2 ::::! ...J Ci W 0... ~ 0- 0- <( ~ ~ ~ (j) ~ i= <{ u ~ 0... I U I I I 0 :2 ~ (!) (!) ::::! u :2 ~ ~ u w w ::> 0 (!) w (!) (!) z u 0 ...J ...J Z Z W cc ...J cc 0:: 0 () ::> ...J ...J 0 0 co ...J U W (!) ~ CO :> :> w ::> (j) ::> ::> u ~ ~ 0:: 0:: :2 (j) U CO W CO CO I L() U w (j) (j) ~ ~ 0 w w (j) (j) (j) () ~~ 0 0... (j) (j) (j) (j) ~ :2 t: CO ~ ~ ~ :r: cr: 0... ~ 0 :2 :2 C/J co w 0 ~ ~ :r:1O 0 N 0 0:: 0:: cr: ::> 0 z 0: ~ 0: 0: :2 (j)~ :2 <( 0:: () () <{ <( () ~ ~ W T""" N """ N 0 """ T""" N (t) """ ~ ~ ~ T""" T""" N U U T""" T""" N 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ T""" 0... 0... U co ~ b 0... 0... ~ ~ (j) () U 0... 0... 0... 0... C/J U U > cr: () <( <{ (!) 0:: (j) (!) (!) z z w ::i ::i ::::! ill ill w ~ U U (!) <.9 0... Z >- ...J ...J Z Z W ~ 0 w w 0:: 0:: ~ E z z W ...J <( <( 0 0 0:: <( (j) 0:: 0 w w UJ 0... 0- 0 0 () ...J ...J W 0- ~ ...J ...J ...J ...J l.L l.L Z i= i= <( <( 0 ~ :2 co U U (j) (j) () 0 () () i= i= ::> ::> :2 ~ ~ u cr: ~ 0 0 0 w w w ~ :2 (j) (j) ~ ~ ~ ~ Z 0... 0... ...J co ~ ~ ::> ::> ::> z z W ...J Z Z Z Z <( 0:: 0:: >- co 0 0 0 U5 (j) <{ <c <c <c <( ~ <{ <( z ::> w w U U 0:: w w W 0... 0- 0- 0... C/J U U :> 0:: u U <( <( (9 0:: 0:: C/) -0 C OJ Ol OJ ...J ..r: C/) "2 u:: U ~ (0 o ..... I C") o o (!) co o "i'5 ..... N o - -... - I . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a I